<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><TEI xmlns="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0" xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance" xsi:schemaLocation="http://www.tei-c.org/ns/1.0 nzetc-p5.xsd" xml:id="GriBook" xml:lang="en">
  <teiHeader type="aacr2">
    <fileDesc xml:id="fileDesc-0001">
      <titleStmt>
        <title type="marc245">Book &amp; Print in New Zealand : A Guide to
          Print Culture in Aotearoa</title>
        <title type="sort">Book &amp; Print in New Zealand : A Guide to
          Print Culture in Aotearoa</title>
        <title type="gmd">[electronic resource]</title>
        <editor role="editor"><name key="name-120609" type="person">Griffith, Penny</name></editor>
        <editor role="editor"><name key="name-121548" type="person">Harvey, Ross</name></editor>
        <editor role="editor"><name key="name-120907" type="person">Maslen, Keith</name></editor>
        <respStmt xml:id="respStmt-0001">
          <resp>Creation of machine-readable version</resp>
          <name key="name-036430" type="organisation">Victoria University Press</name>
        </respStmt>
        <respStmt xml:id="respStmt-0002">
          <resp>Creation of digital images</resp>
          <name key="name-121618" type="person">Sarah Walker</name>
        </respStmt>
        <respStmt xml:id="respStmt-0003">
          <resp>Conversion to TEI.2-conformant markup</resp>
          <name key="name-121593" type="person">Louise O'Brien</name>
        </respStmt>
      </titleStmt>
      <extent>ca. 1900 kilobytes</extent>
      <publicationStmt>
        <publisher><name key="name-121602" type="organisation">New Zealand Electronic Text Centre</name></publisher>
        <pubPlace>Wellington, New Zealand</pubPlace>
        <idno type="etc">Modern English, GriBook</idno>
        <availability status="unknown">
          <p>Publicly accessible</p>
          <p n="public">URL: http://www.nzetc.org/collections.html</p>
          <p>copyright <date when="2002">2002</date>, by Victoria University of Wellington</p>
        </availability>
        <date when="2001">2001</date>
      <idno type="vuw-bbid">713981</idno></publicationStmt>
      <notesStmt xml:id="notesStmt-0001">
        <note xml:id="note-0001">Illustrations have been included from the original
          source.</note>
      </notesStmt>
      <sourceDesc xml:id="sourceDesc-0001">
        <biblFull>
          <titleStmt>
            <title level="m"><name key="name-121550" type="work">Book &amp; Print in New Zealand: A Guide to Print Culture in New Zealand</name></title>
            <editor role="editor"><name key="name-120609" type="person">Griffith, Penny</name></editor>
            <editor role="editor"><name key="name-121548" type="person">Harvey, Ross</name></editor>
            <editor role="editor"><name key="name-120907" type="person">Maslen, Keith</name></editor>
            <respStmt xml:id="respStmt-0004">
              <resp/>
              <name key="name-121615" type="person">Ross Somerville</name>
            </respStmt>
          </titleStmt>
          <extent>Book; 352 p.; ill., ports.; 30cm.</extent>
          <publicationStmt>
            <publisher><name key="name-036430" type="organisation">Victoria University Press</name></publisher>
            <pubPlace><name key="name-008844" type="place">Wellington, New Zealand</name></pubPlace>
            <date when="1997">1997</date>
            <idno type="callno">Source copy consulted: First edition
              owned by Louise O'Brien</idno>
          </publicationStmt>
          <notesStmt xml:id="notesStmt-0002">
            <note xml:id="note-0002">Electronic file corrects an original
            author omission (<name key="name-120265" type="person">Ann
            Beaglehole</name>) on contents page, at request of <name key="name-120609" type="person">Penny
            Griffith</name>.</note>
          </notesStmt>
        </biblFull>
        <bibl xml:id="_div2-N1066D-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111535" type="work">From Māori oral traditions to print</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-120886" type="person">Jane McRae</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div2-N1097E-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111536" type="work">New Zealand English</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-120590" type="person">Tony Deverson</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div1-N10A39-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111537" type="work">Printing and Production</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-120385" type="person">K.A. Coleridge</name></author>
          <author><name key="name-123193" type="person">John Ross</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div2-N11366-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111538" type="work">Private printing</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-121304" type="person">Noel Waite</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div2-N11426-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111539" type="work">The process of publishing</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-121615" type="person">Ross Somerville</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div2-N1181A-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111540" type="work">The publishers</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-121615" type="person">Ross Somerville</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N11A1D-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111541" type="work">Colonial editions</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-121268" type="person">Luke Trainor</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N11AAD-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111542" type="work">Regional publishing: Wellington</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-120385" type="person">K.A. Coleridge</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N11AEE-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111543" type="work">Regional publishing: Otago</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-200196" type="person">George J. Griffiths</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N11BB9-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111544" type="work">Government publishing</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-121136" type="person">Bruce Ringer</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N11C3E-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111545" type="work">Science journal publishing</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-123180" type="person">Jaap Jasperse</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N11D60-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111546" type="work">Newspapers</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-121548" type="person">Ross Harvey</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N11F9E-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111547" type="work">Māori newspapers</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-120561" type="person">Nicola Frean</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N1204E-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111548" type="work">Periodicals</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-123196" type="person">Clark Stiles</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N12107-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111549" type="work">Children's books</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-120296" type="person">Lynne Jackett</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N121BE-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111550" type="work">Educational publishing</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-036075" type="person">Hugh Price</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N12222-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111551" type="work">Religious publishing</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-120783" type="person">Peter Lineham</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N122A6-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111552" type="work">Music publishing</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-123190" type="person">Elizabeth Nichol</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N122D9-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111553" type="work">Directories</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-123178" type="person">Michael Hamblyn</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div2-N1239D-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111554" type="work">Bookselling</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-130001" type="person">Alan Preston</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div2-N124D5-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111555" type="work">Libraries</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-120851" type="person">Brian McKeon</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div2-N128D9-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111556" type="work">Book buyers and collectors</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-123193" type="person">John Ross</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div2-N12DC1-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111557" type="work">Reading and literacy</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-202122" type="person">Lydia Wevers</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div2-N130A6-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111558" type="work">Creating an interest in print culture</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-123195" type="person">Jane Stafford</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div2-N13212-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111559" type="work">Recognition, and rewards of success</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-120624" type="person">Stephen Hamilton</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div2-N13436-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111560" type="work">Changing trends and special needs</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-121622" type="person">Sydney Shep</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div2-N134EA-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111561" type="work">Access tools</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-121331" type="person">Sheila Williams</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div4-N13720-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111562" type="work">Cook Islands Māori</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-123188" type="person">Jean Mitaera</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div4-N13764-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111563" type="work">Niuean</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-123194" type="person">Lagi Sipeli</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div4-N137AA-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111564" type="work">Tokelauan</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-120609" type="person">Penny Griffith</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div4-N13802-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111565" type="work">Western Samoan</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-123179" type="person">Alfred Hunkin</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N13855-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-423961" type="work">Educational publishing</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-120794" type="person">Don Long</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N1390E-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111567" type="work">Colonial consolidation, 1900-1960</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-123198" type="person">Diane Woods</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N13995-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111568" type="work">Current: official and trade</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-120754" type="person">Patrick King</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N139CD-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111569" type="work">Current: community and creative</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-120688" type="person">Robert Holding</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N139E9-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111570" type="work">Sources and resources</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-123198" type="person">Diane Woods</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div2-N13B00-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111571" type="work">Languages other than English, Māori and Pacific Island</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-120265" type="person">Ann Beaglehole</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div4-N13B77-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111572" type="work">[Chinese:] The 19th century</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-200366" type="person">James Ng</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div4-N13C5A-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111573" type="work">[Chinese:] The 20th century</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-123189" type="person">Nigel Murphy</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N13D3D-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111574" type="work">Croatian</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-123181" type="person">Stephen Jelicich</name></author>
          <author><name key="name-121273" type="person">Andrew Trlin</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N13F18-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111575" type="work">Dutch</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-123183" type="person">Robert Leek</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N13FEA-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111576" type="work">French</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-111520" type="person">R.D.J. Collins</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N140F6-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111577" type="work">Gaelic (Scots)</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-123175" type="person">Jennie Coleman</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N141C8-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111578" type="work">German</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-111427" type="person">James N. Bade</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N14210-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111579" type="work">Greek (Ancient) and Latin</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-123184" type="person">Douglas Little</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="_div3-N1441E-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111580" type="work">Polish</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-121167" type="person">Theresa Sawicka</name></author>
        </bibl>
        <bibl xml:id="div3-N1449C-bibl">
          <title level="a"><name key="name-111581" type="work">Scandinavian</name></title>
          <author><name key="name-123186" type="person">Rick McGregor</name></author>
          <author><name key="name-123191" type="person">Edwin Nye</name></author>
        </bibl>
      </sourceDesc>
    </fileDesc>
    <encodingDesc>
      <projectDesc xml:id="projectDesc-0001">
        <p>Prepared for the New Zealand Electronic Text Centre.</p>
      </projectDesc>
      <editorialDecl>
        <p>All unambiguous end-of-line hyphens have been removed, and
          the trailing part of a word has been joined to the preceding
          line. Every effort has been made to preserve the Māori macron
          using unicode.</p>
        <p xml:id="ETC">Some keywords in the header are a local Electronic
          Text Center scheme to aid in establishing analytical
          groupings.</p>
      </editorialDecl>
      <classDecl>
        <taxonomy xml:id="nzetc-subjects">
          <bibl>NZETC Subject Headings</bibl>
        </taxonomy>
      </classDecl>
    </encodingDesc>
    <profileDesc xml:id="profileDesc-0001">
      <creation>
        <date when="1997">1997</date>
      </creation>
      <langUsage>
        <language ident="en">English</language>
      </langUsage>
      <textClass>
        <keywords scheme="http://www.example.org/folksonomy">
          <term>nonfiction</term>
          <term>prose</term>
          <term>masculine/feminine</term>
          <term>Printing/ New Zealand/ History/ Publishers and publishing/ Book industries and trade/ Imprints</term>
        </keywords>
        <keywords scheme="http://www.nzetc.org/nzetc-subjects">
          <list>
            <item>
              <rs key="subject-000006" type="subject">Literary Criticism and History</rs>
            </item>
          </list>
        </keywords>
      </textClass>
    </profileDesc>
    <revisionDesc xml:id="revisionDesc-0001">
      <change xml:id="change-0005"><date when="2006-05-01">1 May 2006</date><label>corrector</label><name key="name-110032" type="person">Jamie Norrish</name>Added missing diacritics in 'other languages' section, corrected spacing, and corrected misplaced text.</change>
      <change xml:id="change-0004"><date when="2005-05-13">13 May 2005</date><label>corrector</label><name key="name-110032" type="person">Jamie Norrish</name>Corrected some instances of markup causing incorrect spacing.</change>
      <change xml:id="change-0001"><date when="2004-12-01">1 December 2004</date><label>corrector</label><name key="name-121556" type="person">Colin Doig</name>Added name tags around various names of people, places and organisations.</change>
      <change xml:id="change-0002"><date when="2004-06-14">14 June 2004</date><label>corrector</label><name key="name-110032" type="person">Jamie Norrish</name>Corrected details of electronic publisher. Added extent
	  of electronic document.</change>
      <change xml:id="change-0003"><date when="2002-03">March 2002</date><label>corrector</label><name key="name-121593" type="person">Louise O'Brien</name>Added TEI header and tags</change>
      <change n="quickProof"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:00">21:18:00, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Text-proofing of a sample of the text</change>
      <change n="teiMarkup"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:00">21:18:00, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Conversion to TEI.2-conformat markup</change>
      <change n="scriptedMarkup"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:00">21:18:00, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Adding scripted markup</change>
      <change n="encodingDesc"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:00">21:18:00, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Addition of encodingDesc</change>
      <change n="addBibls"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:00">21:18:00, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Addition of bibls</change>
      <change n="assembleImages"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:00">21:18:00, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Assembled all images</change>
      <change n="derivativeCreation"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:00">21:18:00, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Creation of derivative images</change>
      <change n="teiValidation"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:00">21:18:00, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Validation of TEI</change>
      <change n="nameValidation"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:00">21:18:00, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Validation of names</change>
      <change n="utf8Conversion"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:00">21:18:00, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Conversion to Unicode (utf-8)</change>
      <change n="makeProduction"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:00">21:18:00, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Promotion to production</change>
      <change n="drmAddition"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:00">21:18:00, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Addition of text to access control</change>
      <change n="harvestTopicMap"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:00">21:18:00, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Harvest into Topic Map</change>
      <change n="browserCheck"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:00">21:18:00, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Checking of text using browser</change>
      <change n="corpusAddition"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:00">21:18:00, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Addition of text to corpus</change>
      <change n="catalogueAddition"><date when="2007-08-07T21:18:00">21:18:00, Tuesday 7 August 2007</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Addition of text to Library Catalogue<!-- BBID=713981 --></change>
      <change n="live"><date when="2008-09-23T14:47:37">14:47:37, Tuesday 23 September 2008</date><label>editorial</label><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Make text available on NZETC website</change>
    <change n="epubPreparation"><date when="2009-08-04T14:08:38">14:08:38, Tuesday 4 August 2009</date><name type="organisation" key="name-121602">NZETC</name>Preparation of EPUB (and other formats such as DaisyBook)</change></revisionDesc>
  </teiHeader>
  <text xml:id="t1">
    <front xml:id="t1-front">
      <div type="covers" xml:id="_div1-N10183">
        <p>
          <figure xml:id="GriBoFco">
            <graphic url="GriBoFco.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="GriBoFco-g"/>
            <figDesc>Front cover</figDesc>
          </figure>
          <figure xml:id="GriBoSpi">
            <graphic url="GriBoSpi.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="GriBoSpi-g"/>
            <figDesc>Spine</figDesc>
          </figure>
          <figure xml:id="GriBoBco">
            <graphic url="GriBoBco.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="GriBoBco-g"/>
            <figDesc>Back Cover</figDesc>
          </figure>
        </p>
      </div>
      <titlePage xml:id="_N65957">
        <titlePart type="illustration">
          <figure xml:id="GriBoTit">
            <graphic url="GriBoTit.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="GriBoTit-g"/>
            <figDesc>Titlepage</figDesc>
          </figure>
        </titlePart>
        <titlePart type="half">BOOK &amp; PRINT
               <lb/>IN NEW ZEALAND
               <lb/>
               <pb xml:id="n1"/>
            </titlePart>
        <titlePart type="main">BOOK &amp; PRINT
               <lb/>IN NEW ZEALAND
               <lb/>
            </titlePart>
        <titlePart type="sub">A GUIDE TO
               <lb/>PRINT CULTURE
               <lb/>IN AOTEAROA
               <lb/>
            </titlePart>
        <byline>EDITED BY
               <lb/>
               <docAuthor>PENNY GRIFFITH
                  <lb/>
               </docAuthor>
               <docAuthor>ROSS HARVEY
                  <lb/>
               </docAuthor>
               <docAuthor>KEITH MASLEN
                  <lb/>
                  <lb/>
               </docAuthor>WITH THE ASSISTANCE OF
               <lb/>
               <docAuthor>ROSS SOMERVILLE
                  <lb/>
               </docAuthor>
            </byline>
        <docImprint><publisher>VICTORIA UNIVERSITY PRESS
                  <lb/>
               </publisher><pb xml:id="n2"/><publisher>VICTORIA UNIVERSITY PRESS</publisher><lb/><pubPlace>Victoria University of Wellington
                  <lb/>PO Box 600 Wellington
               </pubPlace><lb/>First published
               <date when="1997">1997</date><lb/>© The Humanities Society of New Zealand
               <lb/>Te Whāinga Aronui <date when="1997">1997</date>
               <lb/>ISBN 0 86473 331 3
               <lb/>This book is copyright. Apart from
               <lb/>any fair dealing for the purpose of private study,
               <lb/>Copyright Act, no part may be reproduced by any
               <lb/>process without the permission of
               <lb/>the publishers
               <lb/>The preparation and publication
               <lb/>of this book were assisted by grants from the
               <lb/>Trustees of the National Library of New Zealand
               <lb/>and the New Zealand Lottery Grants Board
               <lb/>(Environment and Heritage) Printed by GP Print Ltd,
               <pubPlace>Wellington</pubPlace>
            </docImprint>
      </titlePage>
      <div type="contents" xml:id="_div1-N10250">
        <head>Contents</head>
        <p>
          <list>
            <item>Foreword 9</item>
            <item>Acknowledgements 10</item>
            <item>Introduction 11</item>
            <item>1: <hi rend="b">Transitions</hi> 17
                <list><item>From Māori oral traditions to print (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-120886" type="person">Jane McRae</name></hi>) 17
                  <list><item>Conventions and authorities for writing and print 18</item><item>Printed works in Māori to the 1850s 22</item><item>Māori oral traditions in print 25</item><item>Māori use of writing and print to <date when="1900">1900</date> 28</item><item>Publishing in the 20th century 34</item></list>
                  </item><item>New Zealand English (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-120590" type="person">Tony Deverson</name></hi>) 40</item></list>
                </item>
            <item>2: <hi rend="b">Printing and Production</hi> (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-120385" type="person">K.A. Coleridge</name> &amp; <name key="name-123193" type="person">John Ross</name></hi>) 44
                <list><item>General studies 45
                  <list><item>Historical collections, exhibitions, museums and awards 52</item></list>
                  </item><item>Technology 53
                  <list><item>Type and materials 56
                    <list><item>Typography 56</item><item>Presses and other machinery 61</item><item>Graphic reproduction techniques 64</item><item>Paper 66</item><item>Binding 67</item></list>
                    </item><item>Stationery manufacture and supply 69</item></list>
                  </item><item>The trade 69
                  <list><item>Men and women of the trade 69</item><item>Owners and firms 73</item><item>Trade unions and trade conditions 75</item></list>
                  </item><item>Economics 78
                  <list><item>Government regulation 81</item></list>
                  </item><item>Private printing (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-121304" type="person">Noel Waite</name></hi>) 82</item></list>
                </item>
            <item>3: <hi rend="b">Publishing</hi> 86
                <list><item>The process of publishing (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-121615" type="person">Ross Somerville</name></hi>) 86
                  <list><item>Author and publisher 88</item><item>Encouragement to publish 92</item><item>Restrictions to publishing 94</item><item>The publisher's tasks 95
                    <list><item>Editorial tasks 96</item><item>Design and typography 97</item></list>
                    </item><item>Education and training 99</item><item>Publishers' organisations 99</item><item>Trade publications 101</item><item>Economics of publishing 101</item></list>
                  </item><item>The publishers (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-121615" type="person">Ross Somerville</name></hi>) 104
                  <list><item>The businesses 104</item><item>The people 109</item></list>
                  </item><item>General and regional studies 112
                  <list><item>Colonial editions (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-121268" type="person">Luke Trainor</name></hi>) 113</item><item>Regional publishing: Wellington (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-120385" type="person">K.A. Coleridge</name></hi>) 117</item><item>Regional publishing: Otago (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-200196" type="person">George J. Griffiths</name></hi>) 118</item></list>
                  </item><item>Some categories of publication 122
                  <list><item>Government publishing (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-121136" type="person">Bruce Ringer</name></hi>) 122</item><item>Science journal publishing (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-123180" type="person">Jaap Jasperse</name></hi>) 124</item><item>Newspapers (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-121548" type="person">Ross Harvey</name></hi>) 128</item><item>Māori newspapers (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-120561" type="person">Nicola Frean</name></hi>) 136</item><item>Periodicals (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-123196" type="person">Clark Stiles</name></hi>) 138</item><item>Children's books (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-120296" type="person">Lynne Jackett</name></hi>) 141</item><item>Educational publishing (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-036075" type="person">Hugh Price</name></hi>) 144</item><item>Religious publishing (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-120783" type="person">Peter Lineham</name></hi>) 146</item><item>Music publishing (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-123190" type="person">Elizabeth Nichol</name></hi>) 151</item><item>Directories (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-123178" type="person">Michael Hamblyn</name></hi>) 152</item></list>
                  </item></list>
                </item>
            <item>4: <hi rend="b">Distribution</hi> 156
                <list><item>Bookselling (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-130001" type="person">Alan Preston</name></hi>) 157
                  <list><item>History 157</item><item>General studies 160</item><item>People 161</item><item>Administrative structure and government controls 164</item><item>Studies and sources 166</item></list>
                  </item><item>Libraries (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-120851" type="person">Brian McKeon</name></hi>) 168
                  <list><item>General description and history 168</item><item>Origins and development 170</item><item>Government and governance 172</item><item>Standards and measures of performance 174</item><item>Associations 175</item><item>Librarianship 177</item><item>People 181</item><item>The Carnegie Corporation 183</item><item>Surveys and planning 183</item><item>Free library service 184</item><item>Library service for children 186</item><item>Māori and library service 187</item><item>Types of library 188</item><item>Libraries and print culture issues 189</item><item>The National Library of New Zealand 193</item><item>Information technology 196</item></list>
                  </item><item>Book buying and collectors (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-123193" type="person">John Ross</name></hi>) 197
                  <list><item>Book buying 197</item><item>Book collectors 201
                    <list><item>Categories of collectors 202</item><item>Aids to collecting 202</item><item>Collectors as a community of interest 203</item><item>Studies of collectors 204</item><item>Individual collectors 206</item></list>
                    </item></list>
                  </item></list>
                </item>
            <item>5: <hi rend="b">Readers and Reading</hi> 212
                <list><item>Reading and literacy (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-202122" type="person">Lydia Wevers</name></hi>) 212
                  <list><item>Before <date when="1877">1877</date> 212</item><item>Education Act <date when="1877">1877</date> 214</item><item>Reading series and methods 215</item><item>Teaching reading 217</item><item>Literacy 218</item><item>Te reo and literacy programmes for Māori 219</item></list>
                  </item><item>Creating an interest in print culture (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-123195" type="person">Jane Stafford</name></hi>) 221</item><item>Recognition and rewards of success (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-120624" type="person">Stephen Hamilton</name></hi>) 227
                  <list><item>Book reviewing and literary criticism 227</item><item>Literary prizes and book awards 231</item></list>
                  </item><item>Changing trends and special needs (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-121622" type="person">Sydney Shep</name></hi>) 233</item><item>Access tools (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-121331" type="person">Sheila Williams</name></hi>) 239
                  <list><item>Bibliographies and indexes 239</item><item>General reference sources 243</item></list>
                  </item></list>
                </item>
            <item>6: <hi rend="b">Print Culture of Other Languages</hi> 245
                <list><item>Pacific Island languages 245
                  <list><item>Language and religious publishing 247
                    <list><item>Cook Islands Māori (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-123188" type="person">Jean Mitaera</name></hi>) 247</item><item>Niuean (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-123194" type="person">Lagi Sipeli</name></hi>) 249</item><item>Tokelauan (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-120609" type="person">Penny Griffith</name></hi>) 250</item><item>Western Samoan (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-123179" type="person">Alfred Hunkin</name></hi>) 252</item></list>
                    </item><item>Educational publishing (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-120794" type="person">Don Long</name></hi>) 253</item><item>Colonial consolidation, <date from="1900" to="1960">1900-1960</date> (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-123198" type="person">Diane Woods</name></hi>) 256</item><item>Current: official and trade (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-120754" type="person">Patrick King</name></hi>) 257</item><item>Current: community and creative (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-120688" type="person">Robert Holding</name></hi>) 259</item><item>Sources and resources (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-123198" type="person">Diane Woods</name></hi>) 259</item></list>
                  </item><item>Languages other than English, Māori and Pacific Island (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-120265" type="person">Ann Beaglehole</name></hi>) 263
                  <list><item>Chinese 267
                    <list><item>The 19th century (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-200366" type="person">James Ng</name></hi>) 267</item><item>The 20th century (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-123189" type="person">Nigel Murphy</name></hi>) 271</item></list>
                    </item><item>Croatian (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-123181" type="person">Stephen Jelicich</name> &amp; <name key="name-121273" type="person">Andrew Trlin</name></hi>) 276</item><item>Dutch (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-123183" type="person">Robert Leek</name></hi>) 281</item><item>French (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-111520" type="person">R.D.J. Collins</name></hi>) 284</item><item>Gaelic (Scots) (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-123175" type="person">Jennie Coleman</name></hi>) 287</item><item>German (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-111427" type="person">James N. Bade</name></hi>) 291</item><item>Greek (Ancient) and Latin (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-123184" type="person">Douglas Little</name></hi>) 293</item><item>Polish (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-121167" type="person">Theresa Sawicka</name></hi>) 298</item><item>Scandinavian (<hi rend="i"><name key="name-123186" type="person">Rick McGregor</name> &amp; <name key="name-123191" type="person">Edwin Nye</name></hi>) 301</item></list>
                  </item></list>
                </item>
            <item>Notes on Contributors 304</item>
            <item>Bibliography 308</item>
            <item>Index 344</item>
          </list></p>
      </div>
      <div type="preface" xml:id="_div1-N1051A">
        <head>Foreword</head>
        <p>The Trustees of the National Library are pleased and proud to be associated with <hi rend="i">Book &amp; Print in New Zealand</hi>. When the proposal to develop a guide to print culture in New Zealand was presented in <date when="1996">1996</date>, the Trustees recognised that it was central to the work of the National Library in supporting a better understanding of New Zealand's national identity. A close working relationship has developed between the programme for the History of Print Culture in New Zealand and the Alexander Turnbull Library, New Zealand's principal repository of print forms.</p>
        <p>As we look to the role of electronic resources in the century to come, and celebrate the enthusiasm for te reo Māori, it is timely to reflect on the impact of print culture on New Zealand. <hi rend="i">Book &amp; Print in New Zealand</hi> presents a survey of the role of print culture in the economic, technological and intellectual life of our country which will appeal to a broad range of New Zealanders. It is particularly relevant to the research aims of the Trustees in that it will undoubtedly provide a stimulus to further research which will develop our knowledge of New Zealand culture and history.</p>
        <p>The Trustees therefore welcomed the opportunity to support this publication and to be its major sponsor. We are delighted that further financial support has been provided by the Lottery Grants Board, and we would also like to acknowledge the amount of voluntary work which individuals and organisations have contributed to bring this publication to fruition. Foremost among these have been the members of the Humanities Society of New Zealand/Te Whāinga Aronui (HUMANZ). They have worked hard for several years to develop awareness for the need for a national research programme on the history of print culture in New Zealand, and to gather support for it to become a reality.</p>
        <p>The Trustees congratulate HUMANZ on the successful completion of this part of the programme. We have no doubt that <hi rend="i">Book &amp; Print in New Zealand</hi> will enhance the understanding of the role played by print culture in our bicultural society, and we look forward to the work which will build on this initial achievement.</p>
        <p><name type="person" key="name-000002">Wyn Hoadley</name><lb/>     Chair
               <lb/>     Trustees of the National Library</p>
      </div>
      <div type="acknowledgements" xml:id="_div1-N10555">
        <head>Acknowledgements</head>
        <p>Many people and institutions have been involved in the creation of this work, and the editors would like to thank in particular the following people for various help and personal encouragement: <name key="name-200071" type="person">Elizabeth Caffin</name>, <name key="name-120380" type="person">Roderick Cave</name>, <name key="name-111049" type="person">Peter Foster</name>, <name key="name-200194" type="person">John Griffin</name>, <name key="name-200196" type="person">George Griffiths</name>, <name key="name-120688" type="person">Robert Holding</name>, <name key="name-111050" type="person">Marjorie Maslen</name>, <name key="name-111051" type="person">Shef Rogers</name>, <name key="name-121159" type="person">Rachel Salmond</name>, <name key="name-111052" type="person">Bob Stables</name>; and especially <name key="name-111053" type="person">Brian Opie</name>, without whose initiative this book would almost certainly not have happened.</p>
        <p>We would also like to thank the following institutions for their practical support of the project: <name key="name-000507" type="organisation">Alexander Turnbull Library</name>, <name key="name-120541" type="organisation">National Library of New Zealand</name>; Department of Information Studies, Curtin University of Technology; English Department, University of Otago; English Department, <name key="name-008371" type="organisation">Victoria University of Wellington</name>.</p>
        <p>For specific contributions we also acknowledge the Evening Post, the Ministry of Education, National Archives, Mataaliki Press and the Alexander Turnbull Library for granting permission to reproduce illustrations; <name key="name-111054" type="person">Moira Thompson</name> for copy-editing and indexing, and <name key="name-121331" type="person">Sheila Williams</name> for collating the Bibliography. Our publisher, <name key="name-005126" type="person">Fergus Barrowman</name>, has provided very welcome encouragement and support towards the end of the project.</p>
        <p>Funding grants from the Trustees of the National Library and the Lottery Grants Board provided financial support for a project which has grown in both scope and the number of people involved since it was initiated. The grants have not only covered the operating costs of the project, but enabled small payments to be made to the contributors and editors, and we were very pleased to receive this form of recognition.</p>
        <p>But above all, the editors' warmest appreciation is due to the contributors for their great willingness to help with a project brought to completion in some 15 months. Like the editors, they too saw the great potential interest of the field of print culture, and were prepared to meet impossible deadlines in the cause of opening up the field and stimulating further research.</p>
        <p>Throughout the project the editors have consulted at every point and acknowledge their joint responsibility for the work as a whole. For practical purposes the chapters were divided among the editors, with <name key="name-120609" type="person">Penny Griffith</name> editing Chapters 1, 5 and the Pacific Island languages section of Chapter 6 and providing overall project management; <name key="name-121548" type="person">Ross Harvey</name> edited Chapter 3; and <name key="name-120907" type="person">Keith Maslen</name> edited Chapters 2, 4 and Chapter 6 (all languages other than Pacific Island).</p>
        <p>While we have all made every endeavour to be comprehensive and accurate, there will no doubt be errors and omissions, for which we seek your sympathetic understanding.</p>
      </div>
      <div type="intro" xml:id="_div1-N1057B">
        <head>Introduction</head>
        <p>We in Aotearoa New Zealand are culturally defined in many ways: through our relations with the environment and with each other, through our systems of belief and forms of government, and whatever else we have brought here or developed here. One quality in this many-stranded culture is so ingrained and widespread as to be easily overlooked. This is our dependence on the technology of printing. Printing, in all its phases of production, distribution, and reception influences our lives at every turn from cradle to grave. By means of printing we communicate, express ourselves, and store information. For Māori, print has been the most dramatic challenge to a 900-year oral tradition. To belong to our modern society is to have to cope with the printed word in all its forms. Schools teach us multiple uses of print, libraries are its storehouses. The producers of print, the printing and related industries,are of major importance to our New Zealand economy. Without printing we could not be governed. All these causes and effects are covered by the term 'print culture' which is the subject of this guide. The aim of this book, simply stated, is to explore the impact of printing on our New Zealand culture.</p>
        <p>So long familiar and so pervasive is the printed word that we have tended to take it for granted, leaving the study of particular aspects to specialists. Only in the second half of this century have these discrete studies begun to integrate and move mainstream. In the 1980s and early 1990s national projects for the history of print culture, or the history of the book—the terms are more or less interchangeable—have been set up in a dozen countries overseas, including Great Britain, the United States, and in most countries of western Europe. Closer to home, the History of the Book in Australia project (HOBA) has recently instituted a concerted programme of research, encouraged by the holding of conferences, workshops, and the like. Plans are well advanced for a three-volume <hi rend="i">History of the Book in Australia</hi> to be published at the beginning of the new millennium.</p>
        <p>New Zealanders, too, are rising to the challenge. The initial move towards our own national project in the <date when="1993">spring of 1993</date> is noted in <name key="name-120907" type="person">Keith Maslen</name>'s 'Towards a history of the book in New Zealand', published appropriately enough in the Australian-based <hi rend="i">Bulletin of the Bibliographical Society of Australia and New Zealand</hi>, in its last issue for <date when="1993">1993</date>. As the work before you is witness, much has been achieved since <date when="1993">1993</date>.</p>
        <p>Several reasons may be given for the rise of this new historical awareness. During the 20th century there has been a steady broadening in the scope of historical research. In France, the powerful movement towards more inclusive kinds of history, combining socio-economic and intellectual as well as political factors, is associated with Lucien Febvre and his so-called <hi rend="i">Annales</hi> school, named after the journal founded in <date when="1929">1929</date>. From the 1950s, disciples of Febvre began to apply the same spirit of all-embracing historical enquiry to what the master had called <hi rend="i">l'histoire du livre</hi> (the history of the book). Scholars in the English-speaking world were moving along similar lines. The very title of <name key="name-120509" type="person">Elizabeth Eisenstein</name>'s influential book <hi rend="i">The Printing Press as an Agent of Change</hi> (<date when="1979">1979</date>) indicates the widening of focus. Bibliographers previously intent on the book itself came to see the value of the collateral evidence of book trade records, prompted by the work of the New Zealanders D.F. McKenzie and <name key="name-120907" type="person">Keith Maslen</name>, among others. J.E. Traue in his distinctive way has pressed the need for deeper and wider study of the book in New Zealand.</p>
        <p>Meanwhile, modern literary theorists for their part were insisting that the meaning of a literary text cannot be appreciated in isolation from the means of transmission and the society to which it belongs. Textual meanings, they argued, are the collaborative creation of all who participate in the processes of transmission. A text cannot therefore be properly understood without an enquiry into the conditions in which it is conceived, produced, and received.</p>
        <p>All these things have led specialists in the many branches of the history of the book to see themselves as belonging to a wider and more unified field of enquiry. However, another pressure has been felt. Urgency has been given to such work by the acute sense that the rise of the new electronic media is rapidly revolutionising our traditional means of communicating through time and space. The long familiar means of producing print on paper are changing faster than the trade, or society at large, can cope. The death of the book is predicted. Libraries are full of computers and CD-ROMs. People have become used to speaking, hearing and seeing at a distance by means of the telephone, radio, television, and the computer. We use our personal computers to read, and to print and publish for ourselves, on paper, or, thanks to the Internet and the World Wide Web, on someone else's computer screen anywhere in the world.</p>
        <p>It is time therefore for us to take stock of the traditional technologies and the ways they have affected our lives before the world we have lived in but not clearly known is changed and gone for ever. The need for a concerted effort to study the history of print culture in New Zealand is obvious. Elements of that history may be found to be similar to those being discovered in other countries, perhaps especially in other formerly British territories, such as Australia. However, what these similarities are will not be known until we look for ourselves at our own history. There are also bound to be significant differences, for our time and place is distinctively New Zealand. Above all, the meeting of an imported culture based on printing with the oral culture of the tangata whenua forms a special and fascinating part of our island story.</p>
        <p>A major history is some years away. Such a work of synthesis must be based on a sufficient foundation of systematic research, and this foundation has yet to be laid.</p>
        <p>Leading to this goal, but providing a valuable achievement in itself, <hi rend="i">Book &amp; Print in New Zealand</hi> is the first comprehensive attempt to chart the many ways in which print culture in all its aspects has influenced our lives. The aim is primarily to introduce readers, general and specialised, to this rapidly developing subject by surveying the territory, noting work already done and indicating areas still to be explored. What is offered is a beginning, assembled with more haste than scholarship prefers. There is more to be said, even at the present level of broad survey. If this work elicits critical comment and additional insights and information, it will have achieved part of its aim.</p>
        <p>The concept of a guide is simple, yet novel. No overseas models exist. In France and England well-funded programmes of research are linked to ambitious schemes for publication of massive histories. The <hi rend="i">Histoire de l'édition fraçaise</hi> is in four great volumes; the <hi rend="i">History of the Book in Britain</hi> is to be in seven. In early <date when="1996">1996</date>, while the three editors of this guide were planning a large and long-term project on the overseas pattern, <name key="name-035771" type="person">Don McKenzie</name> urged the early publication of a necessarily more modest work. The suggestion that this be a guide was made by <name key="name-121159" type="person">Rachel Salmond</name>. The editors readily agreed. The example of <name key="name-121340" type="person">G.A. Wood</name>'s <hi rend="i">Studying New Zealand History</hi>, originally entitled <hi rend="i">Guide for Students of New Zealand History</hi>, first edition <date when="1973">1973</date>, was most instructive. In those days Dr Wood could take for granted his readers' broad understanding of the usual kinds of history then being practised. Our guide, as Dr Wood shrewdly noted, would have to create in the reader's mind a sense of the subject.</p>
        <p>The breadth of the subject was formidable—no less than all phases of the production, distribution, and reception of the printed word within New Zealand (not forgetting its overseas territories). The work would begin with the coming of print in <date when="1769">1769</date> and its interaction with a purely oral culture, and end in the electronic present, a period of scarcely less dramatic change.</p>
        <p>Developing the logical threefold scheme of production, distribution, and reception into the more numerous manageable sections of a book proved less easy. The transfer of meaning from author to reader calls for the services of intermediaries, each contributing to the total act of creation. The key functions are those of printer, publisher and distributor, it being understood that these labels cover any number of specialities. So far, so good. However, in the relatively small and unspecialised New Zealand economy, one person or one firm may play many parts. Functions, though neatly divisible in theory, tend in practice to be interconnected and overlap. This was especially true in the early days, but has not ceased to be so. For example, Henry Wise began in <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> in the mid 1860s as printer and binder, as well as a retailer of a range of stationery and other goods. Such diversification was required of the pioneer business person, and vertical or horizontal diversification is still an option for the ambitious—the Whitcombes for instance—as well as for those, especially in small towns, who struggle to survive. Where then should Wise be slotted in, under production or distribution? The answer is under publishing, for Wise later became well known throughout New Zealand and then Australia for his series of business directories. This does not mean that Wise is not worth studying in his lesser roles. Rather it should be remembered that an historical phenomenon is capable of being looked at in various lights. An historical study of the New Zealand book trade, based on other principles —say as an investigation of economic growth—might better serve to highlight the interrelations between parts. But it remains true that in order to develop a sense of a whole one is well advised to look closely at the parts.</p>
        <p>This book was finally divided into six main chapters:</p>
        <list>
          <item>
            <p>Chapter 1 (Transitions) is in two parts. The first, 'From Māori oral traditions to print' deals with the impact of an imported print culture on the existing Māori oral culture, and gives an overview of printing and publishing in the Māori language. The importance of this complex topic is by no means purely historical, for knowledge of the past has implications for language survival in the future. The second part is concerned with the development of an identifiable printed (and written) New Zealand English language.</p>
          </item>
          <item>
            <p>Chapter 2 deals with printing and production (loosely interchangeable terms covering a host of processes, functions and agencies) from the 1830s up to the present day. The topic is treated under four main headings: technology, trade personnel, economics, and private or non-commercial printing.</p>
          </item>
          <item>
            <p>Chapter 3 is on publishing. The term basically means 'uttering to the public' and is capable of the widest application. However, nowadays publishing is normally understood in a rather more limited sense, covering the choice of work to be printed, design and editorial activities leading up to production, the securing of finance, and lastly the initial phase of the distribution process. Most—though not all—modern publishers content themselves with wholesaling, leaving the final retailing stage of distribution to others. There are four main sections: the process of publishing, the publishers, general and regional studies, and categories of publications.</p>
          </item>
          <item>
            <p>Chapter 4 (Distribution) contains three distinct topics and sections. The first two—bookselling and libraries—are concerned with the need to get printed materials to their final consumers. Libraries may be thought of as storehouses and centres of distribution, situated somewhere between bookseller and reader. In the third, attention is focused on book buyers and the book trade in general and on book collectors in particular. The latter are not only end users, but often remarkable gatherers of printed materials for the use of posterity.</p>
          </item>
          <item>
            <p>Chapter 5 on readers and reading opens up a large topic: the development of attitudes to reading and literacy, including activities to increase interest in printed material and meet special needs. Book reviewing, literary criticism, and awards are also considered. A final section, 'Access tools', is a practical guide to the key reference works which support further print culture investigation.</p>
          </item>
          <item>
            <p>Chapter 6 deals with print culture in languages other than English and Māori. There are two parts, the first dealing with the print culture of those Pacific Island languages with a New Zealand connection, the second with other languages brought into New Zealand from further afield.</p>
          </item>
        </list>
        <p>If it was quite a task for the editors merely to outline so encompassing a scheme, the next was even more challenging. This was to find expert contributors, willing and able to construct a text on the foundation so laid. Wide consultation gradually identified suitable contributors. Those who accepted—and they were most of those first approached—showed a remarkably quick appreciation of what was being proposed, and a gratifying willingness to play their part, large or small. For the contributors perhaps the hardest job was to reduce large and often complex fields of knowledge into a relatively small space, without sacrificing clarity or precision of detail. In areas where little research had already been done, and contributors had themselves to engage in pioneering work, it was necessary, especially given the constraints of time, to divide up the tasks into more manageable units, and allot these to a larger number of people. This was the especially so for the Publishing and LOTEs (Languages Other Than English) chapters. It became clear that such smaller contributions should be allowed to retain much of their individuality, though within the general scheme, rather than for them to be forced into a stylistic and methodological straitjacket. It is hoped that the effect of varied approaches and styles, in broad conformity with the overall plan, will prove stimulating, for no one approach can give a rounded view of any subject. The result all in all should be seen for what it is: a work of very considerable originality, authority, and usefulness.</p>
        <p>This book may be regarded as a report on the state of research into fields covered by the broad concept of print culture in New Zealand. What lessons are to be learned must largely be left for the reader to supply. There exists at present little or nothing in the form of major general studies, grounded on
               thorough research, and conducted to a professional standard. Print culture as an historical discipline may be judged not yet quite to be of age in this country. As for more particular studies, existing typically as pamphlets or articles in periodicals, there is often surprisingly much. The aim has not been to list all and every such piece, but to offer a broad view of each topic, and to select and report on the best or most modern studies in that area.</p>
        <p>Now that this book is a reality, what next? The Humanities Society of New Zealand for its part is planning a range of research projects to build on the foundation so laid. It is hoped that others will follow. A pattern of annual conferences has been established to stimulate continuing work and present research findings to the growing community of interest. Readers who are surprised and pleased to learn how much has been achieved, should be delighted at the many enticing prospects of future discovery.</p>
        <p><name type="person" key="name-120609">Penny Griffith</name><lb/>
          <name type="person" key="name-121548">Ross Harvey</name><lb/>
          <name type="person" key="name-120907">Keith Maslen</name></p>
      </div>
      <div type="acknowledgements" xml:id="_div1-N10631">
        <head>Use of the macron in Māori and Pacific Island language references</head>
        <p>In accordance with current standard policy, the macron has been used to indicate long vowels in both Māori and Pacific Island words. The exceptions to this policy are in titles of books or articles (or other quoted material) where the original did not use the macron; in these cases the macron is not used. We acknowledge the assistance of Te Taura Whiri i te Reo Māori/Māori Language Commission and <name type="person">Mīria Simpson</name>, Māori Language Consultant at the Alexander Turnbull Library, in confirming correct use of the macron in Māori words.</p>
      </div>
    </front>
    <body xml:id="t1-body">
      <div type="chapter" xml:id="_div1-N10648">
        <head>Transitions</head>
        <div type="intro" xml:id="_div2-N10654">
          <p>Captain <name key="name-207700" type="person">James Cook</name>'s first visit in <date when="1769">1769</date> to the islands that were to become New Zealand initiated a process of change that is the focus of the first section of this chapter—it was the first time words in Māori had been written down, and subsequently printed and published. The second section also relates to how oral language changes and is transformed into print. Together these sections define the two factors unique to the print culture of Aotearoa New Zealand: Māori language print culture and New Zealand English.</p>
          <p>The first section, 'From Māori oral traditions to print', reviews the impact on existing Māori oral culture of the imported print culture—one impact in a period of profound social changes, and one to which Māori responded with enthusiasm. The section covers how the language became codified, the publication of Māori oral traditions, Māori use of writing and print in the 19th century, and an overview of publishing in Māori and by Māori through to the present day.</p>
          <p>This approach to the history of Māori-European interaction from a print culture perspective refers to a wide range of publications, and identifies a number of important areas for further investigation and research. Detailed coverage of specific aspects of Māori language print culture (e.g. newspapers, literacy programmes) are covered in the later chapters.</p>
          <p>The second section 'New Zealand English' describes the distinctiveness of and changes within our own variety of the English language—as it appears in print, where it responds more slowly to change than spoken New Zealand English. Current lexicographical research is also described, in which a major milestone has been reached in <date when="1997">1997</date> with the publication of <name key="name-035992" type="person">Harry Orsman</name>'s long-awaited historical dictionary.</p>
        </div>
        <div type="section" xml:id="_div2-N1066D" decls="#_div2-N1066D-bibl">
          <head>From Māori oral traditions to print</head>
          <div type="intro" xml:id="_div3-N10679">
            <p>The many interests of the meeting between Māori oral society and literacy are reflected in the range of those who write about it: literary historians, linguists, historians, enthusiasts of print and Māori culture. But theirs have been small studies which amount to a partial knowledge of this encounter, generating a sense of potential. Three issues are pertinent to a review of this literature and contemplation of future study.</p>
            <p>First, the fact that Māori acquired literacy at a time of colonisation by the British is a critical determinant, but one balanced by the autonomy of Māori tribal society. Secondly, and a direct result of colonisation, is the fact that Māori use of writing and print is complicated by two languages. English displaced Māori as a first language, and Māori literature is in large part of both languages, in small part in Māori. The third issue arises from this dual language heritage, for at the time of their first encounter Māori and English were respectively of oral and literate traditions. Māori therefore came to experience those two traditions across both languages.</p>
            <p>The assumption of literacy by Māori is not a straightforward, predictable history, although it compares with other oral peoples' response to literacy. What remains to be known is the situational detail of Māori literacy, which in turn could assist language survival, would acknowledge the singularity of Māori literature, and contribute to international scholarship on orality and literacy.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N1068E">
            <head>Conventions and authorities for writing and print</head>
            <p>There are two kinds of first writing of Māori, one unsystematic but with human interest in the grappling with transcription of foreign sounds, and the other systematic, a serious, scientific conversion of Māori to written symbols. The first kind can be found in journals and travel narratives by late 18th-century and early 19th-century explorers, visitors and settlers such as Cook, Dieffenbach, Nicholas. <name key="name-209289" type="person">Patrick Smyth</name> refers to sources of such transcriptions in <hi rend="i">Maori Pronunciation and the Evolution of Written Maori</hi> (<date when="1946">1946</date>). Those writers, however, were simply collecting information and were neither sufficiently motivated nor informed to organise a spelling system. Purpose in the translation and dissemination of Christian doctrine and access to expertise enabled the missionary community to create an orthography. In an appendix to <name key="name-120285" type="person">Judith Binney</name>'s life of <name key="name-120745" type="person">Thomas Kendall</name>, <hi rend="i">The Legacy of Guilt</hi> (<date when="1968">1968</date>), there is a detailed account of his initiation of a writing system. Kendall was a lay-teacher for the <name key="name-200092" type="organisation">Church Missionary Society</name> in the Bay of Islands, and his <hi rend="i">A Korao no New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1815">1815</date>) contained the first printed Māori, and an alphabet. In <date when="1820">1820</date> Kendall went to England and improved his alphabet by working together with a scholar of oriental languages, Professor āpuhi speakers <name key="name-120780" type="person">Samuel Lee</name> of Cambridge University, and NgHongi Hika and Hōhaia Parata Waikato, and by reference to a vocabulary compiled by other northern speakers Tuai (referred to in some sources as 'Tui') and Titere on a visit to England in <date when="1818">1818</date>. In the course of the missionaries' translations it was modified to the current, economical form for printers, of five vowels and ten consonants.</p>
            <p>There are only brief histories of this remarkable innovation. <name key="name-207684" type="person">William Colenso</name> worries over errors in transcription and printing of names in 'On nomenclature' (<date when="1883">1883</date>); <name key="name-207252" type="person">Johannes Andersen</name>'s 'Maori alphabet' (<date when="1940">1940</date>) recounts problems with representation of sounds; <name key="name-120783" type="person">Peter Lineham</name> in <hi rend="i">Mission and Moko</hi> (<date when="1992">1992</date>) and <hi rend="i">Bible and Society</hi> (<date when="1996">1996</date>) reports translators', typographers' and readers' difficulties with spelling in the Bible; D.F. McKenzie puts a spare, elegant account of progress to an orthography in <hi rend="i">Oral Culture, Literacy &amp; Print in Early New Zealand: The Treaty of Waitangi</hi> (<date when="1985">1985</date>). There are remarks about the adequacy of the orthography in publications about the language, particularly in translations of 19th-century manuscripts. These offer excellent sources for investigation of whether the spelling system accurately replicated the sounds of Māori, whether the missionaries' concerns as translators and printers influenced the choice of letters, and how the alphabet affected language use.</p>
            <p>Linguists have drawn attention to the effect of the orthography on dialect, <name key="name-120639" type="person">Ray Harlow</name> surveying historical records and contemporary use in 'Regional variation in Maori' (<date when="1979">1979</date>). The alphabet assigned fixed values to sounds. Missionary translators would have appreciated this but it precluded representation of phonological differences. Translators and publishers, modelling other literature, possibly corrected local usage before printing—Lineham (<date when="1992">1992</date>) mentions Bible translators' disagreements over dialect. The first printed Scriptures (widely circulated) were mainly of the similar dialects of Ngāpuhi and <name key="name-030978" type="place">Waikato</name>; this language has often been asserted as classical Māori and has consequently influenced speech and writing. Writing and particularly print therefore accentuated a uniform rather than diverse language. Speech, however, can also cause change in dialect, while writing may have the value of preserving it. For the Chatham Island people's <name key="name-207078" type="organisation">Moriori</name> language (which differs from Māori in pronunciation of some vowels and consonants), writing came too late. Written records from the late 18th and early 19th centuries are examined by Ross Clark in '<name key="name-207078" type="organisation">Moriori</name> and the Maori: the linguistic evidence' (<date when="1994">1994</date>). The greatest part of the extant record was written down some 30 years after the <date when="1835">1835</date> invasion and subjugation of the <name key="name-207078" type="organisation">Moriori</name> by the Taranaki people whose own dialect modified the <name key="name-207078" type="organisation">Moriori</name> language.</p>
            <p>The standardised spelling created some difficulty in comprehension, as is suggested by a rare printed example of <name key="name-036461" type="place">South Island</name> Māori, very likely produced by the Wesleyan Rev. <name key="name-200553" type="person">James Watkin</name> from his Waikouaiti parish, and published in <date when="1841">1841</date>. Watkin had found that the Scriptures supplied from the northern mission were not understood by people in his locality, and he adjusted the alphabet to express their sounds. Harlow includes a facsimile of Watkin's work in <hi rend="i">Otago's First Book</hi> (<date when="1994">1994</date>), and a discussion of his spelling system and <name key="name-036461" type="place">South Island</name> vocabulary in <hi rend="i">A Word-list of South Island Maori</hi> (<date when="1985">1985</date>).</p>
            <p>The orthography represented the language sufficiently, however, for missionary translations and teaching of literacy. Māori evidently found it satisfactory for they used it effectively from the late 1830s, but their writing suggests that a more accurate alphabet might have resulted had the missionaries worked with them in refining it. Nineteenth- and 20th-century writing shows adjustment to the orthography, a claim to accuracy and pride in dialect. In a transcription and translation of Te Kāhui Kararehe's late 19th-century writing (<date when="1993">1993</date>), <name key="name-121204" type="person">Ailsa Smith</name> notes that he resisted convention and wrote in the characteristic sounds of his Taranaki speech. Evidence that much writing was done last century is suggested by (little used) attempts to abbreviate it to a shorthand, as described in <hi rend="i">Hicks's Maori Shorthand</hi> (<date when="1894">1894</date>) and <name type="person">H.W. Williams</name>'s <hi rend="i">A System of Shorthand for Maori</hi> (<date when="1896">1896</date>).</p>
            <p>Summarising the history of Māori in 'The Maori language past and present' (<date when="1968">1968</date>), <name key="name-120280" type="person">Bruce Biggs</name> points out that the alphabet was deficient until vowel quantity was marked, for length of vowel sound can distinguish meaning. He remarks elsewhere that Māori introduced the double vowel to signify length as it occurs, although not consistently, in their 19th-century manuscripts. This is the one unresolved problem in what is otherwise a conveniently phonetic writing system. Nineteenth- and early 20th-century grammars and dictionaries experimented with different accents for long vowels, but in the 20th century the lack of accepted practice led to controversy as to whether vowel length should be marked at all, or by a double vowel or macron. As the language has come to be printed outside academia (where the double vowel was in vogue) the macron has been preferred. This has caused some typographical problems since not all fonts allow for it, and unsightly alternative diacritics have been used in some publications. It seems likely that in future the macron will be looked for in correct spelling of Māori.</p>
            <p>Although accomplished readers of the symbols of art and landscape, Māori had had no form of alphabetic script and the transition of the oral language to a written form (in conjunction with the arrival of foreigners and colonisation) brought far-reaching changes to the content and traditions of language use which have yet to be fully documented. Two examples of change are neologisms and public access to traditional knowledge. Writing out the oral vocabulary did not alter meaning, but contact with Pākehā brought other words into it—either additional meanings were attributed to old words to signify new concepts and objects, or English words were transliterated to Māori sounds. Such additions, which may have originated orally, were reinforced in the literature. Another extraordinary result of writing was that traditional knowledge could be disseminated far beyond the reaches of a tribal audience. Access to oral or written texts may be circumscribed, by selection of an audience, by limited print runs. But it was a feature of Māori oral traditions to be closely controlled by the tribal group; with writing they could be communicated well outside its boundaries. Place names provide a case in point. Personal to and resonant of tribal life, they came to be spelled out on signposts, buildings, maps—the spelling and pronunciation of them becoming an issue of national debate in the 20th century. In recent times some tribes have refrained from published documentation of names which indicate sacred sites or resources.</p>
            <p>Conventions associated with writing, and especially print, came with the orthography. For instance, consistency in spelling and punctuation, correctness in grammar, precision in word meaning, the layout of a written text—titles, chapters, paragraphing. In addition there were numbers, symbols and systems relating to money, weight, and time. Some of these had been specified in pamphlets and workbooks printed for missionary teaching and were apparent in published literature. But standards were made explicit, and served tuition in literacy and the progress of a literature, by grammars and dictionaries. These too were new to Māori, for the oral traditions did not record definitions of words or description of language components and structure. Both grammars and dictionaries could usefully be studied for their influence on usage, each providing evidence of its time, and bearing an authority which is often, though not always correctly, associated with print.</p>
            <p>Clergy compiled the first published grammars and dictionaries; Māori were sometimes advisers. The first was Kendall and Lee's <hi rend="i">Grammar and Vocabulary</hi> (<date when="1820">1820</date>), the next the Rev. <name key="name-208703" type="person">Robert Maunsell</name>'s insightful <hi rend="i">Grammar</hi> (<date when="1842">1842</date>). The Williams family's contribution to publishing the lexicon and grammar is remarkable: <name key="name-209653" type="person">William Williams</name>'s <date when="1844">1844</date> <hi rend="i">Dictionary of the New Zealand Language and a Concise Grammar</hi>; several editions of <name key="name-209654" type="person">W.L. Williams</name>'s important <hi rend="i">First Lessons in the Maori Language</hi> (<date when="1862">1862</date>); seven editions from the <date when="1844">1844</date> dictionary to <name type="person">H.W. Williams</name>'s <hi rend="i">Dictionary of the Maori Language</hi> (<date when="1971">1971</date>) which remains unequalled.</p>
            <p>Dictionaries are also testimony to how the language has been used: most have been Māori-English, none all in Māori. The English-Māori lexicon was properly established with Biggs's <date when="1981">1981</date> <hi rend="i">Complete English-Maori Dictionary</hi>, and enlarged by <name type="person">H.M. Ngata</name>'s <hi rend="i">English-Maori Dictionary</hi> (<date when="1993">1993</date>)—the first compiled by a Māori and which records, without explicit intention, his Ngāti Porou dialect. This and other contemporary dictionaries emphasise the spoken language; new words appear in them many of which have long been used in speech, but print has not yet fully captured colloquial usage, transliterations, neologisms, and dialect.</p>
            <p>The first Māori to produce a grammar was <name type="person">H.M. Stowell</name> with the <hi rend="i">Maori-English Tutor and Vade Mecum</hi> (<date when="1913">1913</date>). In the 20th century, linguist <name key="name-120280" type="person">Bruce Biggs</name> produced the influential <hi rend="i">Let's Learn Maori</hi> (<date when="1969">1969</date>), which became the first grammar in Māori when translated by Cleve Barlow (<date when="1990">1990</date>). It is a sign of language loss rather than of use of literacy that there is no other grammar in Māori. In the 20th century Māori published grammars with the aim of assisting language learning. Māori had declined as a first language as a result of colonisation's impact—government policy from <date when="1867">1867</date> that teaching be in English; the move since the 1950s by Māori away from their tribal communities where the language and oral traditions were habitual, to towns where English and literacy predominated. Print, which at least by association with colonisation had contributed to the decline of Māori, was paradoxically used as an essential medium of instruction to revive it. Indeed it might be argued that a recurring, sometimes sole, reason for Māori using print has been for survival—linguistic, political and cultural survival. Māori compilers of 20th-century language tutors added a new dimension in recording dialect (previously incidental in grammars) simply by using their own language, as in <name key="name-209543" type="person">Hoani Waititi</name>'s <hi rend="i">Te Rangatahi</hi> series (<date when="1970">1970</date>) and Tīmoti Kāretu's <hi rend="i">Te Reo Rangatira</hi> (<date when="1974">1974</date>) for Ngāti Porou and Tūhoe.</p>
            <p>The reduction in use of spoken and written Māori over a long period is indicated by the purposeful creation in the late 20th century of a vocabulary for inventions, technological, scientific, and legal terms. The Māori Language Commission (established by statute in <date when="1987">1987</date> to promote use of the language) created some 5,500 words by attribution of new meanings to old words and transliterated borrowing from English, published in <hi rend="i">Te Matatiki</hi> (<date when="1996">1996</date>). Despite common use in 19th-century writing, where possible the Commission avoided transliterations. Other registers of vocabulary are concordances, of the Bible by <name type="person">Barlow</name> (<date when="1990">1990</date>), and of two classics of Māori oral literature by <name type="person">Harlow</name>, <hi rend="i">A Name and Word Index to 'Nga Mahi a nga Tupuna'</hi> (<date when="1990">1990</date>) and, together with <name type="person">A.H.F. Thornton</name>, <hi rend="i">A Name and Word Index to 'Nga Moteatea'</hi> (<date when="1986">1986</date>). These, a very studied use of print, will serve scholars and, like the grammars and dictionaries, may help the language survive, at worst only in print.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N10738">
            <head>Printed works in Māori to the 1850s</head>
            <p>In the period up to <date when="1850">1850</date> the <name key="name-200092" type="organisation">Church Missionary Society</name> principally, but also the Wesleyan and Roman Catholic Missions, carried out the printing in New Zealand (and overseas) of a considerable amount of religious material and some government documents in Māori. Two printers are often recalled in histories of this time. <name type="person">William Yate</name> was the first to print the language in New Zealand, in <date when="1830">1830</date> at Kerikeri, producing hymns and a catechism. <name key="name-207684" type="person">William Colenso</name>, commissioned by the <name key="name-200092" type="organisation">Church Missionary Society</name> as printer at Paihia in <date when="1834">1834</date>, put out translated parts of the Bible in <date when="1835">1835</date>, and took on a considerable role in the printing of Māori, as his own published writings and biography relate.</p>
            <p>Stories of the mission presses (Māori were employed in some), the difficulties associated with production (the small number of letters must have been some relief), and details of the output of literature in Māori, are quite well covered in diverse sources, but could be covered in one specialist history. Colenso gives a personal account of his work in <hi rend="i">Fifty Years Ago in New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1888">1888</date>), <name type="person">A.W. Reed</name> a spirited response (<date when="1936">1936</date>), <name type="person">Andersen</name> a picturesque history in 'Early printing in New Zealand' (1940a), and <name type="person">D.F. McKenzie</name> (<date when="1985">1985</date>) a selective guide to the period. The recent restoration by the New Zealand Historic Places Trust of the Pompallier building in <name type="place">Russell</name>, which recreates the French Catholic mission press environment effectively, is described in detail in <hi rend="i">New Zealand Historic Places</hi> (no.44, <date when="1993-11">Nov. 1993</date>, pp.4-36). At the turn of the century there was reflection back to this time in <name type="person">Hill</name>'s 'The early days of printing in New Zealand' (<date when="1900">1900</date>), Hocken's 'Some account of the beginnings of literature in New Zealand' (<date when="1900">1900</date>), and the separate Māori section in his <hi rend="i">Bibliography of the Literature Relating to New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1909">1909</date>). The fullest information is to be read from <name type="person">H.W. Williams</name>'s <hi rend="i">Bibliography of Printed Maori to <date when="1900">1900</date></hi> (<date when="1924">1924</date>). The Introduction informs about the presses; the bibliographic entries are detailed, with imprint, dates, production numbers, physical character, and content. The chronological arrangement enables an easy view
                     <figure xml:id="GriBo023"><graphic url="GriBo023.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="GriBo023-g"/><head>This unsigned watercolour [<hi rend="i">Woman and child</hi>] by <name type="person">Joseph Jenner Merrett</name> is the first known record of a Māori woman reading. It was painted between <date from="1841" to="1843">1841 and 1843</date> and is one of the works in the album presented to <name type="person">Eliza Hobson</name> (Governor Hobson's widow) when she left New Zealand in <date when="1843">1843</date>. The original album, in the collections of the Alexander Turnbull Library, was reproduced in <date when="1990">1990</date> as <hi rend="i">Mrs Hobson's Album</hi> (Auckland University Press in association with the Library) with commentary and catalogue by <name type="person" key="name-405264">Elsie Locke</name> and (now Dame) <name key="name-121075" type="person">Janet Paul</name>. This painting is printed as Plate 12 in the reproduction, with catalogue notes on p.122.(Alexander Turnbull Library, Wellington, NZ, reference number F-21814-1/2)
                        </head><figDesc>black and white reprint</figDesc></figure>of the scope of material of any one time. (There are two supplements, neither complete, by Williams (<date when="1928">1928</date>) and <name type="person">A.D. Sommerville</name> (<date when="1947">1947</date>); an augmented edition is in progress at the National Library.)</p>
            <p>Up to <date when="1850">1850</date>, virtually all the printed material available to Māori was of Christian doctrine—chapters and books of the Bible, hymns, orders of service, catechisms, almanacs, and religious tracts. It was also used as examples in printed workbooks and grammars. Although a literature of translation and esoteric subject matter, it is of worth to linguists, theologians and historians. Distribution of and response to this literature are documented in Michael Jackson's 'Literacy, communications and social change' (<date when="1975">1975</date>), Lineham's accounts of biblical translations from the mission presses and the British and Foreign Bible Society (<date when="1992">1992</date>, <date when="1996">1996</date>), and McKenzie's review of Māori literacy (<date when="1985">1985</date>).</p>
            <p>In this era of British aspirations to govern Aotearoa, two documents in Māori, the Declaration of Independence and the <name key="name-122436" type="work">Treaty of Waitangi</name>, came to have extraordinary significance for the future, and invite further print-centred review. The Declaration of Independence was printed, in Māori and English, in <date when="1835">1835</date> at the request of <name key="name-207552" type="person">James Busby</name> the British Resident, and some 34 chiefs consented to it—four signed their names, others made a mark. The signatories were designated, by that act of writing, the United Tribes of New Zealand. The Declaration was printed twice and circulated for others to sign. It arose partly out of an earlier document, an <date when="1831">1831</date> Māori petition for protection sent to King William IV which 13 northern chiefs signed. This public document of government between Māori and Pākehā has a late 20th-century sequel in <name type="person">David Simmons</name>'s booklet <hi rend="i">Ko Huiarau</hi> (<date when="1991">1991</date>)—which affirms the contemporary role of the United Tribes and the Declaration.</p>
            <p>The <name key="name-122436" type="work">Treaty of Waitangi</name> has been the more powerful example of print, symbolising relations between Māori and Pākehā. Most Māori literature to the 1850s remains a rarity of religious or academic import. The Treaty has been constantly and radically an active inheritance of print, as <name key="name-121052" type="person">Claudia Orange</name>'s <hi rend="i">Treaty of Waitangi</hi> (<date when="1987">1987</date>) chronicles. The complexity of the Treaty meeting between oral and literate peoples has been convincingly portrayed by McKenzie (<date when="1985">1985</date>). The signatories to the document have been presented graphically in Mīria Simpson's <hi rend="i">Ngā Tohu o te Tiriti: Making a Mark</hi>, which was published in <date when="1990">1990</date> (the 150th anniversary of the Treaty) in conjunction with a National Library exhibition entitled 'Ngā kupu kōrero, the people of the Treaty speak'. The book with its various signatures and the exhibition title encapsulate the continuing dynamic of the oral-literate interaction over the Treaty. It is sometimes said that the Treaty is always speaking; it has certainly been source of long argument between Māori and Pākehā. Perhaps print exacerbated this. If it had been an oral contract its very text and meaning would have been changed according to the time. As a static printed document it raises expectations of a complete understanding of what it meant in the past which, as <name type="person">Bruce Biggs</name> proposes in an aptly entitled 'Humpty-Dumpty and the Treaty of Waitangi' (<date when="1989">1989</date>), is unrealistic.</p>
            <p>The continuing print legacy from the Treaty makes history. There is a rare published statement about it in Māori by <name key="name-208832" type="person">Apirana Ngata</name> (<date when="1922">1922</date>). There is a literature from the <name key="name-036452" type="organisation">Waitangi Tribunal</name> (set up in <date when="1975">1975</date> to hear claims against the Crown for breaches of the Treaty): documentation from hearings published in microform, findings in print. The <date when="1990">1990</date> commemoration prompted special funding from Government for Māori literature, and the National Library's informal publication of selected manuscripts and commitment to recataloguing and describing printed Māori. The Treaty's imprint, the text or comment about it in Māori, embellishes a range of objects from art works to clothing.</p>
            <p>After <date when="1840">1840</date> and the assumption of British government there were other translated documents of government—proclamations, public letters, Acts, the Māori Gazette, and instructions about European life—portions of <hi rend="i">Robinson Crusoe</hi> and <hi rend="i">Pilgrim's Progress</hi>, information about medicine, the keeping of bees and cultivation of tobacco, histories of <name key="name-005976" type="place">Britain</name>, of Peter the Great. All this is recorded in Williams's <hi rend="i">Bibliography</hi>, as are the government newspapers in Māori begun in <date when="1842">1842</date> and a substantial body of print of considerable historical merit. (A microform edition of extant Māori newspapers has made them accessible and a bilingual bibliography is in progress at the National Library.)</p>
            <p>The primary purpose of printing up to <date when="1850">1850</date> was to distribute the literature of church and state; it was one means by which these institutions advised and legitimated their presence. Such use of print invites examination of whether it was a tool of colonisation, a point touched on by <name key="name-120726" type="person">Kuni Jenkins</name> in 'Te ihi te mana te wehi o te tuhi <date from="1814" to="1855">1814-55</date>' (<date when="1991">1991</date>). As religious, bureaucratic, linguistic literature, it is, in retrospect at least, not very attractive. Nothing at the time was printed of Māori knowledge, history, or religion, nothing familiar which Māori could turn to when fascination with the new, foreign literature waned. But from the early 1850s the oral traditions came into print and Māori took up publishing.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N107A7">
            <head>Māori oral traditions in print</head>
            <p>The history of publication of Māori oral traditions, of the narratives, songs, sayings, and genealogies handed down over generations is, as some historians of literacy might expect, marked by length and quality of experience of literacy. The transition of the oral traditions to print would make a fascinating history. There is ample material for such research, as Williams's <hi rend="i">Bibliography</hi>, <name type="person">C.R.H. Taylor</name>'s excellent <hi rend="i">Bibliography of Publications on the New Zealand Maori</hi> (<date when="1972">1972</date>) and <name key="name-120886" type="person">Jane McRae</name>'s 'Māori literature: a survey' (<date when="1991">1991</date>) attest. It would be important to an examination of Māori response to writing and print, and might support McKenzie's contention that the nature of Māori literacy needs reassessment (<date when="1985">1985</date>). At least with regard to traditional knowledge, Māori have retained many customs of an oral tradition.</p>
            <p>When the oral traditions have come to print there have been mediators between the very different repositories of the Māori memory and literature. Pākehā published the first books of oral traditions in the 19th century from manuscripts written by Māori. They encouraged Māori into print as contributors to serials in the 19th century, and as authors of books and journals in the 20th century. By that time Māori were encouraging Māori into print. In the 19th century one motive for publication by Pākehā was to preserve the traditional knowledge which must have seemed dangerously ephemeral, not only oral but of a dying race. But there was also intelligent pleasure in the artistic compositions and some, like the typographer Coupland Harding who made it the subject of an article in <hi rend="i">Transactions and Proceedings of the New Zealand Institute</hi> (<date when="1892">1892</date>), appreciated the comparison between Māori, Greek and Roman oral literature.</p>
            <p><name key="name-208095" type="person">Sir George Grey</name> was the first mediator. In the 1850s he produced four books of songs, narratives and sayings, all in Māori. The sayings also had English translations and the narratives a separate English edition. He was therefore the first to decide how the oral texts, the form of songs, sayings and genealogies, should be laid out in print. (Some scholars of oral traditions suggest that the way in which narratives are printed may alter how they are understood.) Grey was also a source of printed oral texts, the reason for speeches and songs in <hi rend="i">Maori Mementos</hi> (Davis, <date when="1855">1855</date>) which were composed when he left the country in <date when="1853">1853</date>. The relationship between newly literate Māori and Pākehā publishers and Māori opinion on this exercise are exemplified in Jenifer Curnow's '<name key="name-110529" type="person">Wiremu Maihi Te Rangikaheke</name>: his life and work' (<date when="1985">1985</date>) about one of Grey's principal writers, and <name key="name-121123" type="person">Michael Reilly</name>'s articles (<date when="1989">1989</date>) concerning <name key="name-209610" type="person">John White</name>'s collecting for his six-volume bilingual <hi rend="i">Ancient History of the Maori</hi> (<date from="1887" to="1890">1887-90</date>).</p>
            <p>The complexities of the shift to print can be envisaged from the history of S. Percy Smith's bilingual <hi rend="i">The Lore of the Whare-wananga</hi> (<date when="1913">1913</date>, <date when="1915">1915</date>) of edited versions of manuscripts believed to be transcripts of teachings by Wairarapa elders in the 1860s made to preserve their knowledge. The provenance of these manuscripts and the scribal role in copying them are explored in Biggs and Simmons's 'The sources of "The Lore of the Whare-wananga"' (<date when="1970">1970</date>), and will be further elaborated by Agathe Thornton in a forthcoming book with interesting comparison with a similar transition in Greek oral traditions. These studies, along with evidence from unpublished manuscripts, also raise questions about the work of Māori scribes apprenticed to elders or Pākehā publishers.</p>
            <p>If bibliographers are correct in saying that form affects meaning, then there is reason to examine the impact of print on the oral traditions. A little of this has been done. Close comparison of Grey's published narratives with the Māori manuscripts reveals him as an intrusive editor by late 20th-century standards. Perhaps to please readers unfamiliar with oral style, he changed words, names, grammar, the order of events. Editing for a reader shifts the emphasis from the ear to the eye, and the isolated reader requires an explicitness unusual to the oral texts which were typically, although comprehensibly to tribal kin, oblique and elliptical. The public purpose of print pressed changes on that style. Print also brought translation to the oral traditions; it is rare for the oral literature to be only in Māori. Grey started that way, although he wrote prefaces in English. Almost all subsequent work has been bilingual, or a new literature retold in English. This rewriting began at the turn of the century and attracted Pākehā enthusiasts of Māori culture (<name type="person">A.W. Reed</name> was a prolific writer), but little has been done since the 1970s. For most publishing an English rather than Māori readership has been expected.</p>
            <p>Publication also saw a shift from a tribal to a consolidated Māori content, and therefore fragmentation of the unified local tradition. As Simmons has shown (<date when="1966">1966</date>), Grey began what was to become a common practice of knitting together tribal versions of stories into a printed Māori whole. As the alphabet obscured dialect, so print masked tribal identity in the oral traditions and this prevailed until later this century when Māori began their own publishing. The literary practice of subject studies also saw intricately interconnected tribal knowledge excerpted, in Māori or English, to illustrate ethnographic and other literature about Māori society. Tribal control over traditional knowledge was relinquished with its transition to the very accessible medium of print.</p>
            <p>Publishing of the oral traditions ensued from another practice of literacy, analysis and commentary. By this kind of work linguists and literary historians such as 
                     <name key="name-120280" type="person">Bruce Biggs</name>, <name key="name-121053" type="person">Margaret Orbell</name> and <name type="person">Agathe Thornton</name> have accorded these texts the interest given to classics of European literature, but few Māori have taken up such analysis. Some have objected to it, claiming that it exploits and misrepresents the oral traditions. Government agencies such as the Māori Land Court have been said to have forced written and printed recording of the oral evidence of tribal history. But that record in turn has been used by Māori for their own publications—<hi rend="i">Karanga Hokianga</hi> (<date when="1986">1986</date>) is the Motuti community's edited version of court-related committee minute books.</p>
            <p>How Māori regarded, if they purchased, whether they read, early printed works of oral traditions remains to be known. Many provided material for books but were selective about what they offered. For some there were symbolic and practical aspects to publication—pride, preservation. Māori first published their traditional texts in 19th-century Māori newspapers and journals. At the turn of the century both <hi rend="i">Transactions and Proceedings of the New Zealand Institute</hi> and the <hi rend="i">Journal of the Polynesian Society</hi> had Māori contributors, often in partnership with Pākehā translators such as <name type="person">S. Percy Smith</name> and <name type="person">Elsdon Best</name> who were instrumental in this publishing. In the 1920s the Board of Māori Ethnological Research started a journal, <hi rend="i">Te Wananga</hi>, with the express intention of printing traditions, although it ran only two issues.</p>
            <p>The production of books by Māori has been limited and invariably the work of Māori scholars, knowledgeable elders or those whose professions—in the church, university, government—required literate scholarship. This raises interesting questions about the nature of Māori literacy, of the kind explored in Norman Simms's <hi rend="i">Points of Contact</hi> (<date when="1991">1991</date>). Early in the century <name key="name-208832" type="person">Apirana Ngata</name> of Ngāti Porou made an exceptional contribution to the oral literature. Maybe it was, as <name key="name-207252" type="person">Johannes Andersen</name> put it, his 'scientific mind and literary spirit', as well as his desire to revive the oral arts, that led him to collect hundreds of songs and chants for publication. Ngata tested out his enterprise by publishing first in instalments in <hi rend="i">Te Toa Takitini</hi> and the <hi rend="i">Journal of the Polynesian Society</hi> between <date from="1924" to="1951">1924 and 1951</date>. The three volumes of translated and annotated songs, <hi rend="i">Nga Moteatea</hi> (<date from="1959" to="1970">1959-70</date>), resulted after another scholar, <name key="name-208359" type="person">Pei Te Hurinui Jones</name> of Ngāti Maniapoto, carried on the work after Ngata's death. Of all the oral traditions the songs are most visible in writing and print. There are hundreds in manuscripts, typescripts assist groups learning them; books record and analyse them; oral archives keep them. Yet as Mervyn McLean notes in his study <hi rend="i">Maori Music</hi> (<date when="1996">1996</date>), songs are commonly learned from individuals, and for some there are rituals to follow in the copying and use of song books. However, some composers have refused to have their compositions published.</p>
            <p>Since Grey's <date when="1857">1857</date> collection, there has been regular publication of lists of sayings by Māori and Pākehā, a major bilingual collection being published in parts by <name key="name-120611" type="person">Neil Grove</name> and <name key="name-120918" type="person">Hirini Moko Mead</name> (<date when="1994">1994</date>). Narratives published by Māori have usually been from their own tribes: Anaru Reedy's annotated transcription and translation of ancestral writing <hi rend="i">Ngā Kōrero a Mohi Ruatapu</hi> (<date when="1993">1993</date>), Jones and Biggs's <hi rend="i">Nga Iwi o Tainui</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>). These printed reproductions of the ancient texts recall the repetition of an oral tradition, but do not have the creative reworking that characterised oral performance. There is a little such innovation, as in the rewriting of the Tāwhaki legend (in Māori and English) by Hirini Moko Mead (<date when="1996">1996</date>). For this kind of publishing a primary consideration has been to support language learning, a secondary one to preserve the knowledge, a third to attract general interest.</p>
            <p>There is no way of knowing whether, the circumstances being different, Māori would have printed more or less of their traditional knowledge. There is still adherence to the thinking and ways of an oral tradition. Few Māori have sought to publish their manuscript histories, perhaps because print serves a public who has long been indifferent to Māori culture, perhaps because they are family histories. There is sentimental attachment to the voice and face-to-face communication, a point made by Ngata in 'The Maori and printed matter' (<date when="1940">1940</date>). As the marae exemplifies, there is a preference for company, exchange of talk and performance, over the silent, solitary occupation of reading about traditions. Print cannot equal the warmth and intimacy of the human voice or the association of words on the breath which come from and link to the gods and ancestral world. But literacy combines with that tradition: elders use books to supplement their knowledge, quotations from the Bible and other literature are heard in songs and speeches. A danger in this interaction is that, as much of the oral literature are out of print, and the language and oral tradition are not sufficiently habitual to maintain the texts, they may disappear in the gap between orality and literacy.</p>
            <p>Māori react variously to publication. The most conservative refuse. Others value it as a means of preservation, a voice to future generations, a way of communicating world wide. More research could identify the scope and aspirations of Māori publishing, and discover whether the relatively limited publishing is a consequence of a recent history of literacy, colonisation, language loss, or religious views about the traditional knowledge, and whether use of print is essentially response to a crisis, to save this knowledge for the next generations of Māori. If this is the motive, it is quite different from an active choice of print to publish for common knowledge.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N1082E">
            <head>Māori use of writing and print to <date when="1900">1900</date></head>
            <p>Māori use of writing and print in the 19th century occurred in a time of profound, often aggressive change. If writing had been introduced without colonisation and Māori had chosen at their own pace and in their own way how, even if, to use these arts, there would have been a different story. But very soon after the introduction of writing, Christianity and British government were exerting considerable force on their way of life. Undoubtedly Māori were influenced, maybe indoctrinated by print but they were not passive in reply to it, they argued the reasoning in Scriptures with missionaries and challenged government by their own use of it.</p>
            <p>Māori began reading and writing in the early 1800s. There is ample account of and some disagreement about their literacy. Parr's articles (<date when="1961">1961</date>, <date when="1963">1963</date>) contain a wealth of primary sources; Jackson investigated literacy's impact on social life (<date when="1975">1975</date>), and McKenzie's Treaty-based thesis (<date when="1985">1985</date>) was acute and, as it turned out, contentious. His argument that the historical record had exaggerated the extent and sophistication of Māori literacy drew replies from historians that he underestimated it. Lyndsay Head and Buddy Mikaere's 'Was 19th-century Maori society literate?' (<date when="1988">1988</date>) brought specific examples of use by way of rebuttal. This clash of scholarly opinion invites further investigation of the particulars of Māori literacy. There is material enough for it and an extensive literature of comparison—from Polynesia no more thorough a model than Niko Besnier's study on literacy in Nukulaelae, Tuvalu (<date when="1995">1995</date>).</p>
            <p>There are ample records, however, to leave no doubt as to Māori people's discriminating and efficient use of literacy and literature in their own language in the 19th century. Excitement over, enchantment with, demand for, and intelligent reply from reading and books are reported in the studies referred to above. But more might be discovered about the habits of readers, for instance, what was read most, at all, of the government papers and Christian tracts listed in Williams's excellent guide as to what was available to read. When and where did people read? What response was there to an inanimate object rather than a person, informing the solitary reader? Did the predominance of Christian, of foreign literature estrange the reader from their own society? Most reported interaction over literacy has been about missionaries and Māori, Pākehā writers and Māori colleagues, chiefs and government, with less about that between Māori and Māori, individual and tribe, elder and young.</p>
            <p>The Bible, the sole literature for many for a long time (well into the 20th century it was the only literature in Māori some read), provides one measure of response. Māori may have found it attractive because of similarities to the oral traditions—the genealogies, psalms, moral, mythological stories, the rhetorical, oblique, poetical mode. Lineham has relevant information on acquisition, use and reaction to the Bible (<date when="1992">1992</date>, <date when="1996">1996</date>). For instance, Māori disliked the new format of the <date when="1884">1884</date> edition and asked for a return to the old version. Was this a conservatism from the predictably patterned oral compositions or because it changed sounds, rhythms, words of memorised passages, or a reaction to layout and font? It was characteristic of 19th-century sensibility that translations of the Bible were carried out by Pākehā without Māori engaged or (if so) acknowledged. This exclusion of Māori from publishing intended for them continued for a long time.</p>
            <p>That the Bible was well read and understood is evident from reports of memorising of long passages, and from quotations and allusions to characters, stories and Christian morality in songs, stories, articles and speeches. As histories of these individuals and movements recount, the Bible's deepest impression is to be found in the writings of 19th-century prophets and printed records of syncretic religious movements—Te Ua Haumēne and the Pai Mārire, Te Kooti and the Ringatū Church, Tāwhiao and the King Movement. The Bible is said to have been the only literature which the prophet Te Whiti kept, but he and Tohu banned the Pākehā's tool of writing at their Parihaka community in the late 19th century. (Mervyn McLean, collecting songs in the 1960s for his work on Māori music (<date when="1996">1996</date>), found some Taranaki informants illiterate as a result of this proscription.) The Bible may have also been read without religious reference, as a good story; it was not always read with the result that missionaries wished. Some Māori revered it as the repository of sacred knowledge, others' use was entirely secular. A story often recalled, perhaps for its irreverence or sense of justice, is of the Bible's paper used for cartridges. As a book it retains a special status because of its language which is often regarded as exemplary Māori, despite some curious ways of expressing the cryptic content.</p>
            <p>The missionaries refrained from producing reading which might distract their pupils from the faith. But from the late 1840s other literature became available—grammars and dictionaries, books of the oral traditions, the government's assortment. How much of this Māori read might be gauged from references to it in their writing. Māori read government, church and their own newspapers, as is apparent from correspondence in them. Letters also attest to a Māori readership of late 19th-century journals, although it is noticeable that these are from tribal leaders, colleagues of Pākehā publishers of traditions, those in the church or prominent in government. The general Māori population's reading habits may have been different. A survey of reading would also refer to government literature, the Gazette, Acts, <hi rend="i">Appendices to the Journals of the House of Representatives (AJHR)</hi>, printed reports of meetings, Parliamentary debates, and, from the 1860s, the literature associated with the Native Land Court. Since this was all vital to political contest, it was possibly as well as if not more widely read than the Bible.</p>
            <p>Exceptional evidence of how and what Māori wrote after first acquiring this skill lies in the large extant stock of 19th-century Māori letters and manuscripts. Large collections are held in the Alexander Turnbull Library in Wellington, the Hocken Library in <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name>, the Auckland Public and Auckland Museum Libraries, smaller collections in university and provincial libraries, and also in family and tribal possession. There has been some publication from them; much remains unpublished.</p>
            <p>Letters dated from the 1830s offer outstanding material for enquiry into Māori use of writing and print. The popularity of letter-writing is noted in all the studies of literacy cited above. Pleasure in conversation with those at a distance led to letters being delivered on paper, slate, leaves. As personal, individual examples of writing they provide evidence of use of the orthography, representation of dialect, development of a writing style—letters often follow the formalities of oratory (as heard in speeches on the marae), beginning with traditional greetings, closing with a song. The topics of letters are also instructive. They were a means of expressing personal feelings, of making requests (often for pens, paper, ink, books), and especially of discussing political matters. Formal and informal letters in Māori can be found in great number in the papers of officials of church and government—Bishop
                     <figure xml:id="GriBo031"><graphic url="GriBo031.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="GriBo031-g"/><head>An unsourced illustration reproduced in <name type="person">A.W. Reed</name>'s pamphlet <hi rend="i">The Maori and His First Printed Books</hi> published in <date when="1935">1935</date> by A.H. &amp; A.W. Reed, <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name>, in the Reed's Raupo series of New Zealand gift books. The stories and illustrations relate to the period up to <date when="1840">1840</date>, and describe the challenges faced by the early printers as well as the enthusiastic response of Māori. (Alexander Turnbull Library, Wellington, NZ, reference number B-K 92-6-)
                        </head><figDesc>black and white reprint</figDesc></figure>Selwyn, <name key="name-208095" type="person">Sir George Grey</name>, Sir <name key="name-208610" type="person">Donald McLean</name>, for instance. Opinion was also put in written and printed petitions (recorded in <hi rend="i">AJHR</hi>), and in letters to newspapers and journals. The sense of an audience in this public readership brought rhetorical strategies to pen; argument, challenge and provocation typical to oral performance were transferred to a written forum. Letters have been reproduced in published histories and in Porter and Macdonald's anthology of women's letters (<date when="1996">1996</date>).</p>
            <p>Another way in which Māori used writing was to record domestic matters. There are diaries and personal records of monies, family celebrations, meetings, problems. There are biographical details about family members—for example, an account of his life dictated in <date when="1845">1845</date> by <name key="name-400991" type="person">Te Rauparaha</name> to his son <name key="name-100231" type="person">Tāmihana Te Rauparaha</name> in the papers of <name key="name-208095" type="person">Sir George Grey</name>. There are travel accounts: a diary by Rēnata Kawepō of Ngāti Kahungunu, of a journey across the country with Bishop Selwyn between <date from="1843" to="1844">1843-44</date>, is reproduced in <name key="name-120681" type="person">Helen Hogan</name>'s <hi rend="i">Renata's Journey</hi> (1994a) and accounts of other journeys are examined in her PhD thesis (1994b). Such annotated translations of 19th-century writing—as Curnow's of Te Rangikāheke's writing (<date when="1985">1985</date>) and Smith's of Te Kāhui Kararehe's (<date when="1993">1993</date>)—make comment on how Māori used the orthography and adjusted the oral style, and are essential sources for a history of response.</p>
            <p>Especially important is the writing which records the oral traditions, the copies that were made of songs, genealogies, sayings, histories, and the explanations of customs and rituals. From the late 1840s Māori recorded their traditions either because they saw the oral practice changing or because they enjoyed writing out the memorised texts. Some did this entirely for their own use and many such records have stayed at home, some have been delivered over to public archives. Others were encouraged by friendship, money, pens and paper, to supply interested Pākehā, and their writing remains in the papers of, for example, <name key="name-208095" type="person">Sir George Grey</name>, <name key="name-209610" type="person">John White</name>, <name key="name-207424" type="person">Elsdon Best</name>, who published from them.</p>
            <p>Māori created many written records in response to government, possibly so time-consuming an occupation that it obviated other uses of literacy. Their own political organisations generated letters, circulars, minutes of meetings, submissions to government. Private minuting of Māori Land Court sittings and committees became precious books of family history, copies often made or new information added with each generation (and this writing continues). The Court (like the contemporary <name key="name-036452" type="organisation">Waitangi Tribunal</name>), in defining title to land required oral witness which it minuted, confirming in writing what had been known in the oral record. 'Māori, literacy and the Land Court' is one among many possible titles for study.</p>
            <p>Nineteenth-century Māori wrote for numerous reasons, each an object of interest, together an informative history. They wrote as memory, to record daily activities, to instruct the next generations; they wrote as a social pleasure —to friends, to work out problems of arithmetic (and later to record commercial activities); they wrote to satisfy others' desire for knowledge—sometimes in this they wrote for money; they wrote as a matter of political acumen.</p>
            <p>Active, autonomous use of print began for Māori with the publication of newspapers as a direct answer to the government papers. A history of these newspapers would be timely, for they are an unusual source of Māori opinion and activities. Williams gives details about many in his <hi rend="i">Bibliography</hi>. Articles about Māori printers (there was an interesting conceit amongst some 19th-century Pākehā printers to transliterate their names to Māori) and presses record something of the newspaper history: <name type="person">W.J. Cameron</name>'s 'A printing press for the Maori people' (<date when="1958">1958</date>), Andersen's 'Maori printers and translators' (<date when="1940">1940</date>), Jackson (<date when="1975">1975</date>) also refer to them. None can resist the famous story of the King of Austria's gift of a press to the King Movement, the publication of the paper <hi rend="i">Te Hokioi o Niu Tireni</hi> (<date from="1862" to="1863">1862-63</date>), the government's counter to it <hi rend="i">Te Pihoihoi Mokemoke</hi> (<date when="1863">1863</date>) and <name key="name-100080" type="person">Rewi Maniapoto</name>'s removal of the press on which it was produced. It reveals each side's view of the power of the press.</p>
            <p>A Pākehā, C.O.B. Davis, was instrumental in encouraging Māori to collect money for a press and production of papers. Several independent papers were printed between <date when="1857">1857</date> and the turn of the century, some short-lived because of insufficient funds. (Of religious newspapers produced last century, some had Māori ministers as editors.) Apart from the occasional Pākehā editor these papers were the work of Māori and were a highly pragmatic means of putting opinion to government and reporting on politics. They were also generally informative, with correspondence, local and international news, accounts from the oral traditions, advertisements. Political movements, too, engaged in newspaper production. The Māori Parliament put out a newspaper and recorded its proceedings in print. The King movement printed a newsletter <hi rend="i">Te Paki o Matariki</hi> (<date when="1891">1891</date>- ) to report on its activities and interchanges with government. Andersen described its decorative masthead as an example of 'Maori typographical ingenuity'—perhaps the starting point for further investigation into Māori printers and typesetting.</p>
            <p>Māori use of writing and print in the 19th century was apposite and gradual, a response to both internal cultural change and external government. In some situations Māori were fast and focused in using literacy to contend with settlers and government; in others, as with the oral traditions, they were slower and considered. By the end of the century, with the growing ascendancy of English, Māori were becoming dependent on literacy at least in that language. But practices of the oral traditions remained—the oral arts on the marae, the oral communication of traditional knowledge (despite recording it on paper) in tribal meetings or from elders to the young, all continued into the 20th century.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N1089E">
            <head>Publishing in the 20th century</head>
            <p>There could be interesting histories of Māori publishing in the 20th century which address matters such as the range and style of publications, the individuals and tribes who produced them, the intended and actual readership, the extent of Māori literacy, what education initiatives—the Kōhanga Reo, Kura Kaupapa Māori and tribal universities—have brought to print, what publication tells of the future of the language. This research would inform current thinking about language survival and identify future publications.</p>
            <p>There are a number of ways in which a Māori literature with its own emphases and characteristics has come to national notice in the 20th century. Researchers have learnt of its range through Taylor's comprehensive bibliography (<date when="1972">1972</date>). The outcome of a librarian's knowledge, like many books in this area it arose from a scholarly interest in the language and culture. The inclusion of McRae's survey in the <date when="1991">1991</date> <hi rend="i">Oxford History of New Zealand Literature in English</hi> also singled out the literature as a special yet integral part of national publishing. This kind of juxtaposition of English and Māori literature has rarely occurred—the 1980s Penguin anthologies of New Zealand poetry with songs in Māori and English are other examples. The rarity derives in part from the fact that there is little public appreciation of this literature. Until very recently it was not taught as part of school and university curricula. It is not uncommon to hear or read in letters to the newspaper, opinion of the kind which, it is said, led to the rejection of <name key="name-208832" type="person">Apirana Ngata</name>'s recommendation in <date when="1925">1925</date> that the language be a subject for the BA at the University of New Zealand—that there is no Māori literature.</p>
            <p>The shift to greater awareness of this literature might be attributed to Māori themselves who, since the 1970s, have strongly asserted their cultural identity and set out to reclaim a cultural heritage diminished by colonisation. This has involved extensive research into family and tribal history for personal satisfaction and for submission of claims on land and possessions to the <name key="name-036452" type="organisation">Waitangi Tribunal</name>. Schools and universities have responded to this cultural renaissance by tuition in Māori language and subjects, thus generating a demand for literature for teaching. The guardians of print, librarians, have likewise turned attention to accumulation, preservation and access to Māori literature.</p>
            <p>Increased demand for Māori materials especially by Māori researchers has led to better cataloguing of them and to appointment of specialist librarians. There has been published documentation of collections, National Archives' <hi rend="i">Guide to Māori Sources</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>) and Curnow's catalogue of manuscripts in the Auckland Museum Library, <hi rend="i">Ngā Pou ārahi</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>). Computerised databases for popular materials such as the Māori Land Court minute books are also underway. Moreover, in the last decade many Māori have been employed as librarians or as elder experts to advise on collections. They have encouraged Māori into libraries and reminded libraries of their obligations to this unique literature. More has been communicated in the press and on television about this part of the nation's heritage, especially about the manuscripts. Such developments have given rise to new publishing.</p>
            <p>In terms of preferred publications, the 20th century is like the 19th in that serials retain an important place. The churches' continued acknowledgement of the language is expressed in periodicals. Meeting religious and secular interests, and all in Māori, some ran on from last century, others started anew, but circulation of them ceased around the 1960s: <hi rend="i">Te Toa Takitini</hi> from the Church of England and the Presbyterian <hi rend="i">Te Waka Karaitiana</hi> are well known examples. The <hi rend="i">Journal of the Polynesian Society</hi> saw most participation by Māori and of Māori material around the turn of the century and up to the 1950s. Cultural and linguistic custom, historical traditions, contemporary issues were the subject of articles and debate between Māori and Pākehā subscribers. Since then Māori content has been slight and from academics. Other journals have published articles and oral texts in the language but, like the <hi rend="i">Journal of the Polynesian Society</hi>, have been primarily in English: <hi rend="i">Te Ao Hou</hi> (<date from="1952" to="1975">1952-75</date>) from the Māori Affairs Department; <hi rend="i">Te Karanga</hi> (<date from="1985" to="1990">1985-90</date>) produced by subscriptions to the Canterbury Māori Studies Association; <hi rend="i">He Pukenga Kōrero</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>- ) from Massey University's <name key="name-427727" type="organisation">Māori Studies Department</name>; the glossy magazine <hi rend="i">Mana</hi> (<date when="1993">1993</date>- ) an independent Māori publication.</p>
            <p>In the late 20th century there has been a resurgence of newspapers. They are regionally or tribally based and report local and national news. There is also an occasional serialised literature in Māori—pamphlets, booklets, newsletters. In these later serials there is a clear sense of Māori purpose and readership which, however, is not exclusive, not only because (unlike those of last century) they have only sections in Māori, but because they report on Māori life which is now intrinsically bicultural.</p>
            <p>Māori began the more substantial (in time, cost and expertise) publishing of books this century. The teaching texts have been referred to but by the end of the century there were diverse books in Māori and English and, like the serials, these were serving Māori needs. Books of the oral traditions are discussed above and demonstrate the significant role of scholars such as <name key="name-208832" type="person">Apirana Ngata</name>. He and others of his generation were accomplished writers in both languages and corresponded and contributed articles to contemporary journals on many matters. <name key="name-208359" type="person">Pei Te Hurinui Jones</name> also had a publishing record, of books in English about Tainui traditions, and of translations from <hi rend="i">The Merchant of Venice</hi> (<date when="1946">1946</date>) and the <hi rend="i">Rubaiyat of <name key="name-203438" type="person">Omar Khayyam</name></hi> (<date when="1975">1975</date>). Over the course of this century Māori scholars such as Te Rangihīroa (Sir Peter Buck), Hirini Moko Mead, and I.H. Kāwharu, have published books in English about Māori culture. A new genre of tribal histories has arisen, some—J.H. Mitchell's <hi rend="i">Takitimu</hi> (<date when="1944">1944</date>) for instance—compiled by tribal members; these have put a tribal stamp on the literature, as have descriptive catalogues of treasured features of tribal territories such as F.L. Phillips's <hi rend="i">Landmarks of Tainui</hi> (<date when="1989">1989</date>). There have also been many ethnographies by Pākehā who have drawn information from literature in Māori and of the oral traditions, notably the work of Elsdon Best.</p>
            <p>As the century has progressed more Māori have published in Māori. There has been writing in new genres, including non-fiction (to use a literary term): Barlow's bilingual descriptions of cultural concepts <hi rend="i">Tikanga Whakaaro</hi> (<date when="1991">1991</date>) and, all in Māori, Hēmi Pōtatau's autobiography (<date when="1991">1991</date>) and āti Ruanui leader and prophet, Tītokowaru (<name key="name-120326" type="person">Ruka Broughton</name>'s biography of the Ng<date when="1993">1993</date>), in which oral traditions, contemporary talk and written sources were brought together. Many Māori writers and translators participate in the largest document of printed Māori, <hi rend="i">Ngā Tāngata Taumata Rau</hi> (1990-96), the Māori editions of the <hi rend="i">Dictionary of New Zealand Biography</hi>. All these are new kinds of writing, intended for a public readership, which test the resources of the little-used language.</p>
            <p>Reprints are another way in which the literature has grown. A substantial trio in Māori—and without translation, suggesting a new readership—reproduced writings by Ngāti Porou elders, <name key="name-208832" type="person">Apirana Ngata</name>, Mohi Tūrei, Rēweti Kōhere and others, prepared by Wiremu and Te Ohorere Kaa (1994-96). These have traditional histories, letters, articles on political issues, local anecdotes, most published in turn-of-the-century journals and books. (The number of Ngāti Porou publishers is interesting, perhaps the influence of Ngata.) There have been other, informal, products in Māori from Māori Studies departments in universities: transcriptions of 19th-century letters and manuscripts, texts of newly composed songs.</p>
            <p>A statement of the scope of Māori writing, particularly of that in English, is made in the five volumes of <hi rend="i">Te Ao Mārama</hi> (1992-96) edited by <name key="name-035642" type="person">Witi Ihimaera</name>. This anthology of fiction, non-fiction, poetry and children's literature contains some new writing but is mainly reprints which, taken together, illustrate how the size of this literature is disguised by its appearance in serials, newspapers, small books. The writing exemplifies how Māori use both oral and literary genres. In English there are short stories, novels, poetry, plays. These styles are known and emulated by Māori writers from their unavoidable experience of English literature at school. In Māori there are songs, mythological accounts, stories of tribal tradition, a little creative writing. But there is also movement between genres; writing in English often pays homage to the oral traditions by quotations and allusions. The development from an oral tradition in Māori to a literature in Māori and English begs its own study which might be informed by comparison with this transition in other South Pacific cultures as summarised in Subranami's <hi rend="i">South Pacific Literature</hi> (<date when="1985">1985</date>) and <name key="name-121191" type="person">Norman Simms</name>'s work.</p>
            <p>Literature helped Māori cross the divide between the oral traditions and English. If capitulation to English was disappointing, it at least enabled the vital human habits of composing stories and poetry and led to the renowned work of writers such as Keri Hulme and Hōne Tūwhare. As the fiction of Patricia Grace and <name key="name-035642" type="person">Witi Ihimaera</name> tells, the move from the tribal and Māori language domain to the city and English created, by its strangeness, a new life to be written about. In the 19th century Māori were secure in their culture and selectively incorporated the strange, new literature and experiences into it. Māori who write in English often reflect on the differences between the old secure world and the new strange one, especially in terms of loss of language, voice and culture, which print cannot on its own return. In Patricia Grace's novel <hi rend="i">Potiki</hi> (<date when="1986">1986</date>) the characters regret learning strangers' stories at school while their own have to be rediscovered in themselves and told. Literature brought new stories; the old stories are now in part (oral storytelling is a strong tradition in Māori families) retold in this new way, in English and through print. From this writing in English there have been two translations into Māori, of Ihimaera's books <hi rend="i">Pounamu, Pounamu</hi> (<date when="1986">1986</date>) and <hi rend="i">The Whale Rider</hi> (<date when="1987">1987</date>). (This resembles the 19th-century translating of <hi rend="i">Pilgrim's Progress</hi>, insofar as it is publishing with an intention other than the author's, in this case to promote the language.) But there has been little original fiction in Māori. Some short stories appeared in <hi rend="i">Te Ao Hou</hi> in the 1950s and 1960s, a small collection <hi rend="i">Ngā Pakiwaitara a Huia</hi>, was published in <date when="1995">1995</date>. Fictional writing in Māori has been mainly stories for children.</p>
            <p>Since the 1980s the amount of publishing of literature for children has been striking, some is included in the fourth volume of <hi rend="i">Te Ao Mārama</hi> (<date when="1994">1994</date>). Print again has been enlisted to aid language acquisition. Some books are bilingual, many solely in Māori; ancient and modern life are content for the stories. Many Māori have been drawn to this task, and books have come off the press in great numbers. The Ministry of Education has sponsored them, mainstream publishers have produced handsome examples, and others have been published with pride and dedicated purpose by small groups in local communities.</p>
            <p>Major incentives for Māori publishing in the 20th century might be posited as to turn the tide of language loss by provision for teaching, and to preserve traditional knowledge. But there are signs—the newspapers, children's literature, and writing in English—that publishing has broader objects, perhaps the typically literary use of making ideas, knowledge, and stories public. Most publishing has been funded by government, through educational institutions or funds designated for literature and the arts. Self-sufficiency in publishing has been rare, economically difficult, but as Māori have gained economic and cultural autonomy, there has been a move to independent publishing. There are certain long-standing centres of production such as churches of different denominations and of the Māori faiths of Ringatū and Ratana, which publish Māori prayer and hymn books, new editions of the Māori Bible, journals. Limited funds, the small potential readership, sometimes the speed with which things are produced, have led to the corpus of Māori literature having numerous small, plain, functional items—typescripts, pamphlets, booklets, newspapers—put out in small print runs, often by desktop publishing. These have a limited circulation, easily disappear and do not make an impression on the market, yet much can be learnt from this casual, fragile literature. It is also witness to how print is used—to commemorate the opening of a meeting-house or a family reunion. Print is also engaged to proclaim the importance of the language, to urge speaking of it—Māori words, songs, quotations, appear on calendars, posters, clothing, advertising.</p>
            <p>A comprehensive survey of 20th-century printing might also confirm a change in publishers' attitudes to Māori literature. Previously wary of the small readership, there has been specific promotion from university presses and the publishing houses of Penguin, Reed in particular (who have long
                     <figure xml:id="GriBo038"><graphic url="GriBo038.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="GriBo038-g"/><head>The building in the centre foreground is Wellington's first library, established in <date when="1841">1841</date> as the 'Port Nicholson Exchange and General Library', and run on a subscription basis with Dr F.J. Knox as librarian. Settler publican Dicky Barrett sold the building which had been his first house (and possibly grog-shop) on the corner of what is now Molesworth Street and Lambton Quay to the library Committee for £30. The library did not prosper and was wound up in <date when="1842-04">April 1842</date>, with the collection handed over to its successor, the 'Port Nicholson Mechanics' Institute, Public School and Library'. This illustration is a detail from <name key="name-208188" type="person">Charles Heaphy</name>'s watercolour <hi rend="i">Part of Lambton Harbour, in Port Nicholson, New Zealand, <date when="1841-04-11">11 April 1841</date></hi>.(Making New Zealand Collection, Alexander Turnbull Library, Wellington, NZ, reference number F-115-1/4-MNZ)</head><figDesc>black and white print</figDesc></figure>supported it), and <name key="name-200229" type="organisation">Huia Publishers</name> who have it as a special brief. Whether from goodwill or sufficient market, this fact along with Māori concern for their own style of product has brought many better-looking, prominent books. There is still, however, a hidden literature in libraries and archives—books that are out of print, articles in defunct journals, manuscripts. Much could be done with a programme of reprints.</p>
            <p>New initiatives in publishing brought attention back to concerns which translators of the Bible faced last century about the orthography and standards for print. The Māori Language Commission has played a key role in specifying conventions for marking of long vowels, word breaks, spelling, hyphenation in names. This work, which predicts a future for publishing in the language, has been done to encourage use of Māori in print, for teaching purposes, and in concert with editors of pioneering projects such as the Māori volumes of the <hi rend="i">Dictionary of New Zealand Biography</hi>. The need for this is indicated too by the standard of public notices in Māori; these often show a lack of familiarity with written conventions, a tendency to write the language as it is spoken. The Commission has communicated its recommendations for printed modern Māori in booklets, pamphlets, and its Māori newsletter. It has contributed significantly to the quality and quantity of printed Māori by translation of all kinds of public documents, newspaper advertisements, job descriptions, notices. This proliferation of public documents in Māori is perhaps a consequence of the <date when="1987">1987</date> Act which made Māori an official language of New Zealand.</p>
            <p>If Māori sometimes seem uninterested in, even averse to, literature, it may be because some books about them have been antithetical to their reality or produced without acknowledgement of their contributions or without their authority. Michael King registers opinion on this in 'Some Maori attitudes to documents' (<date when="1978">1978</date>). There is of course no way in which literature can be entirely trusted, but for Māori it has raised the issue, in respect of traditional knowledge at least, of intellectual property rights. The literature of the later 20th century is much more theirs, produced essentially for themselves or in cooperation with Pākehā. Nevertheless a history of 20th-century Māori publishing would need to canvass Māori opinion as to their preferences for its use.</p>
            <p>Although this brief survey suggests a limited, highly selective, even predominantly scholars' use of print by Māori for literature in Māori and English, it is not sufficient an investigation to attribute reasons for this. Further research might assess how the enduring oral traditions, colonisation, and cultural custom have determined Māori use of the utilities of literacy. If there had not been the experience of colonisation, it may have been that Māori would not have chosen to use print as a primary technology, as some oral societies new to print have done. But language loss is evidently one reason for the paucity of literature in Māori. Print demands sophistication with written language, if not from the writer then at least from editors and publishers. That sophistication is acquired when language is used as a first language and there is schooling in it. One overriding aspect of almost two centuries of Māori use of writing, print and publishing has been the continuing decline in the number of people who speak Māori as a first language. Moreover, Māori has only relatively recently been taught in schools and universities, the very places which prepare people to publish. In view of this the fact that there is so much printing in Māori is remarkable. Print cannot do what speech can, keep the language alive, and that is an imperative for many Māori. Print meantime plays a role towards that and, in addition, maintains the language as a revered object of study for future scholars of Māori and of the history of humanity.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div type="section" xml:id="_div2-N1097E" decls="#_div2-N1097E-bibl">
          <head>New Zealand English</head>
          <p>Like other national and regional forms of English, the New Zealand variety is most distinctive in its oral rather than in its written and printed realisations. New Zealanders, just as Australians, South Africans and so on, are recognised above all by their speech, by features of accent inevitably present in every spoken New Zealand utterance.</p>
          <p>The written form of English around the world is more uniform (apart from spelling variants) than the spoken form and has changed little since standard written English was established by 15th- and 16th-century printers and subsequently enshrined in the earliest English grammars and dictionaries.</p>
          <p>A New Zealand scientific paper, company report or love poem, for example, may well contain no linguistic markers at all of its New Zealand origin or authorship. This is because the grammar of English (especially formal English) in New Zealand, including spelling, is virtually indistinguishable from that of British English. Such differences as do exist are matters of relative frequency of certain forms and constructions—greater preference in New Zealand for singular verbs with collective nouns like 'committee', for example—and are revealed only by detailed sociolinguistic analysis.</p>
          <p>Thus no separate grammar of New Zealand English has yet been written, since grammars of British English have hitherto been considered adequate to describe (and prescribe) New Zealand usage also. This state of affairs was for the greater part of this century encouraged by educators and authorities (such as Professor <name key="name-209547" type="person">Arnold Wall</name>) who were highly critical of any deviation in New Zealand from British English linguistic models.</p>
          <p>Where New Zealand English in print does differ from its equivalent elsewhere the major indicators of that difference are lexical, not grammatical. Lexis or vocabulary is the other level besides accent at which New Zealand English is distinctive, in both words and meanings. There are many words found only in New Zealand English ('marae', 'morepork'), while other words ('mainland', 'mufti') have acquired individual meanings here which are either additional to or substitutions for those used in general English. New Zealand words and meanings may or may not have specific reference to New Zealand itself ('mānuka' versus 'mocker' = 'clothes', 'gear'). Also, many are shared with Australian English ('mob' (of sheep etc.), 'mullock'), largely as a consequence of the common colonial experience of the two countries.</p>
          <p>Unlike accent features which pervade all spoken discourse, lexical features are occasional, sporadic, and very much a product of subject and purpose. If the writing in question deals with specifically New Zealand themes and topics, the use of New Zealandisms is natural enough. We will expect vocabulary drawn from te reo Māori in writing on Māori subjects, New Zealand agricultural terms in farming publications, words relating to our distinctive social institutions and practices in political journalism, and so on. Proper names also play a significant part in identifying writing that originates in this country.</p>
          <p>Literary artists wishing to represent the unselfconscious, colloquial speech of New Zealanders in print must also rely largely on lexical features. Critics sometimes claim to detect New Zealand 'accents' in novels and other fiction, but with occasional exceptions (usually comic and satiric) what is reproduced on the page—indeed all that can satisfactorily be reproduced—is New Zealand vocabulary and idiom. Slang often acquires a printed form in this way. The accent may be projected onto the text by the reader, but it is rarely indicated overtly.</p>
          <p>Most New Zealand words and usages, like most new elements in all vocabularies everywhere, are initially coined or borrowed in the spoken language and only subsequently set down in writing. The earliest examples of this process here are traceable to the first English speakers to visit Aotearoa and their encounters with an unfamiliar natural environment and indigenous culture. Words borrowed from Māori, various compounds for flora and fauna, etc., first acquire a printed form in the works associated with Cook's voyages. More appear in the early 19th-century accounts of Savage, Nicholas and all subsequent travellers and colonists whose observations about this faraway land were written down and set before a fascinated British readership.</p>
          <p>This New Zealand vocabulary was not at first part of New Zealand English, since that did not yet exist. It circulated at first (ephemerally) in <name key="name-005976" type="place">Britain</name>, but its longer-term survival was to be as part of a written New Zealand English that eventually developed (alongside a spoken New Zealand English) in the decades following <date when="1840">1840</date>. The rapid development of a range of printed materials for a steadily growing colonial readership and use gave New Zealandisms, old and new, a permanent home. Some terms had (and have) a limited lifespan, but no word once printed is ever lost from the language entirely, and shortlived expressions are often significant markers of a particular historical era ('swaggie', 'six o'clock swill', 'Rogernomics').</p>
          <p>By the end of the 19th century, the English vocabulary in Australia and New Zealand had assumed a sufficiently different character from that in <name key="name-005976" type="place">Britain</name> or <name key="name-002804" type="place">North America</name> to prompt the first lexicographical accounts of its distinctive usages. The Australian <name key="name-120940" type="person">Edward Morris</name>'s <hi rend="i">Austral English: A Dictionary of Australasian Words, Phrases and Usages</hi> (<date when="1898">1898</date>), using dated citations in the style of the <hi rend="i">Oxford English Dictionary</hi>, was the first work to record at least some of the Māori words and other New Zealand forms found in 18th- and 19th-century publications. Also in <date when="1898">1898</date>, a supplement of 700 Australian and New Zealand words prepared by <name key="name-120768" type="person">Joshua Lake</name> was published in an Australasian edition of the massive <hi rend="i">Webster's International Dictionary</hi>. After this initial flourish, Australasian lexicography virtually ground to a halt for nearly two-thirds of the 20th century. Dictionaries compiled in England, especially those of the Oxford 'family' including the <hi rend="i">Concise and Pocket Oxfords</hi> (first editions 1911 and 1924 respectively) became standard reference works in New Zealand also, though they contained almost no Australasian usage. The educational climate in particular did not encourage recognition of linguistic difference in New Zealand, though at least one school dictionary in the 1930s had a short supplement of Australian and New Zealand vocabulary.</p>
          <p>One or two substantial specialist accounts of the local vocabulary also appeared, for example 'A sheep station glossary' by L.G.D. Acland (<date when="1933">1933</date>, reprinted in <hi rend="i">The Early Canterbury Runs</hi>, <date when="1951">1951</date>), and Andersen's 'Maori words incorporated into the English language' (<hi rend="i">Journal of the Polynesian Society</hi>, <date when="1946">1946</date>). <name key="name-121070" type="person">Eric Partridge</name> also gave some space to New Zealand expressions in his <hi rend="i">Slang Today and Yesterday</hi> (3rd ed. <date when="1950">1950</date>).</p>
          <p>Colloquialism and slang were felt to be the main (and therefore somewhat disreputable) way in which New Zealand usage was distinctive from English elsewhere, a view evidently reflected in the title of <name key="name-120251" type="person">Sidney Baker</name>'s <hi rend="i">New Zealand Slang: A Dictionary of Colloquialisms</hi> (<date when="1941">1941</date>). This valuable study of New Zealand words is neither a dictionary in the alphabetical manner, nor confined to slang and colloquialism.</p>
          <p>Australasian supplements to British dictionaries reappeared in the 1960s, one appended to the local edition of the <hi rend="i">Collins Contemporary Dictionary</hi> (<date when="1965">1965</date>), and another (ed. <name key="name-005215" type="person">Robert Burchfield</name>) to the 5th edition of the <hi rend="i">Pocket Oxford Dictionary</hi> (<date when="1969">1969</date>). Attitudes were changing, and the weakening of ties with <name key="name-005976" type="place">Britain</name> was to have linguistic as well as other repercussions. New Zealand English became more 'respectable' and general English dictionaries catering for New Zealanders' needs became possible. The <hi rend="i">Heinemann New Zealand Dictionary</hi>, ed. <name key="name-035992" type="person">Harry Orsman</name> (<date when="1979">1979</date>, 2nd ed. <date when="1989">1989</date>), was a landmark publication, the first work to integrate New Zealandisms with the main body of English words to create a general purpose New Zealand dictionary.</p>
          <p>This was followed by a New Zealand edition of the <hi rend="i">New Collins Concise English Dictionary</hi>, and the <hi rend="i">Collins New Zealand Compact English Dictionary</hi> (both editions by Ian Gordon, 1982 and 1985), and by Burchfield's <hi rend="i">New Zealand Pocket Oxford Dictionary</hi> (<date when="1986">1986</date>, 2nd ed. Deverson, <date when="1997">1997</date>). In recent years New Zealand dictionaries have come thick and fast, including New Zealand adaptations of some Oxford school dictionaries, and popular collections of slang, notably those of <name key="name-035762" type="person">David McGill</name> (1988 and 1989).</p>
          <p>A further lexicographical landmark was the first substantial publication consisting solely of New Zealand usage, Elizabeth and <name key="name-035992" type="person">Harry Orsman</name>'s <hi rend="i">New Zealand Dictionary</hi> (<date when="1994">1994</date>, 2nd ed. <date when="1995">1995</date>). This contains a concise selection of the rich materials assiduously compiled by <name key="name-035992" type="person">Harry Orsman</name> over more than 40 years. It has since been followed by Orsman's major work, the historical <hi rend="i">Dictionary of New Zealand English</hi> (<date when="1997">1997</date>), a work of almost 8,000 headwords supported by some 47,000 quotations drawn from a reading of over 4,000 printed sources. The dictionary itself, and the much larger body of material it derives from (less than a third of Orsman's total collection of citations is used), will provide an immensely valuable research base for future lexicographers and historians of New Zealand English. Without Orsman's efforts New Zealand lexicography would be a flimsy thing indeed (see his '"The Dictionary of New Zealand English": a beginning and (almost) an end', <date when="1995">1995</date>).</p>
          <p>Aside from lexicography, most of the published work on New Zealand English to date has centred on pronunciation rather than printed uses, but notable general accounts include J.A.W. Bennett's article, 'English as it is spoken in New Zealand' (<date when="1943">1943</date>), George Turner's <hi rend="i">The English Language in Australia and New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1966">1966</date>), and <name key="name-120262" type="person">Laurie Bauer</name>'s chapter on 'English in New Zealand' in vol.5 of <hi rend="i">The Cambridge History of the English Language</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>).</p>
          <p>Since the early 1980s there has been a rapid growth in teaching and research activity in the field of New Zealand English in the country's universities, particularly those of the four main centres. New Zealand English has become the subject of intense scrutiny in the context of a world wide surge of interest in all varieties of English. A periodical devoted exclusively to New Zealand English studies, the <hi rend="i">New Zealand English Journal</hi> (formerly <hi rend="i">Newsletter</hi>), published annually by the Department of English at the University of Canterbury since <date when="1987">1987</date>, includes regular bibliographies of published work in the subject.</p>
          <p>New Zealand is unusual among English-speaking countries in making its own form of the language a topic for study in schools; textbooks written by <name key="name-120588" type="person">Elizabeth Gordon</name> and <name key="name-120590" type="person">Tony Deverson</name> (<hi rend="i">New Zealand English</hi>, <date when="1985">1985</date>, <hi rend="i">Finding a New Zealand Voice</hi>, <date when="1989">1989</date>, <hi rend="i">New Zealand English and English in New Zealand</hi>, <date when="1997">1997</date>) have provided resources for the teaching of New Zealand English in the senior secondary school curriculum.</p>
          <p>Corpus studies are a further element in the New Zealand English research picture. Victoria University is home to the one-million-word Wellington Corpus of Written New Zealand English, completed in <date when="1993">1993</date> under the direction of <name key="name-120262" type="person">Laurie Bauer</name>, as well as a spoken corpus of the same size. The written corpus, based for the most part on the year <date when="1986">1986</date>, offers a substantial and consolidated insight into contemporary New Zealand English in print. It is of inestimable value to those investigating the lexical and grammatical features of our variety of English as it nears the end of the 20th century.</p>
        </div>
      </div>
      <div type="chapter" xml:id="_div1-N10A39" decls="#_div1-N10A39-bibl">
        <head>Printing and Production</head>
        <div type="intro" xml:id="_div2-N10A45">
          <p>This section deals with printing and production in New Zealand between <date when="1830">1830</date> and the present day. After a brief general introduction, the subject is treated under four main divisions:</p>
          <list>
            <item><hi rend="b">Technology</hi>: the technology of printing, considered in terms of technical processes, equipment and materials</item>
            <item><hi rend="b">Trade</hi>: the people whose skills created printed products of all kinds for the use of New Zealand society</item>
            <item><hi rend="b">Economics and government regulation</hi>: the economics of printing and the impact of legislation and other government intervention</item>
            <item><hi rend="b">Private printing</hi>: non-commercial and hobby printing</item>
          </list>
          <p>Under these broad headings will be found a number of particular topics as the subject requires.</p>
          <p>Some overlap with the section on publishing is inevitable, since some firms have carried out both printing (in all departments, including binding) and publishing, and often other functions as well, such as bookselling and stationery trading. Histories of newspapers and periodicals are to some extent also relevant to this section, because they include the histories of their production processes; moreover, the firms which have produced them have in most cases been involved concurrently in general and jobbing printing.</p>
          <p>The printing industry has always been subject to changes in technology and in ownership, yet up to a couple of decades ago the structural organisation of the print materials production industry remained relatively stable. However, from the 1970s onward the pace of change has hugely accelerated. Computerisation and the introduction of new categories of copying machines have not only brought major changes in the ways print materials can be produced, they have also made possible radical organisational changes. In the 1990s, while there are still some printing firms, especially in provincial towns, that continue to operate in terms of long-established modes of organisation, much of the kinds of work traditionally carried out by the printing industry is dispersed to typing/word processing businesses, copy centres using sophisticated photocopiers and laser print copiers, and stationery supply stores, operating as chains or buying associations. Moreover, for relatively small runs, many organisations that previously provided business for printers can now carry out 'desktop' print production in-house, using their own computers, scanners, high quality printers, and copiers. Any individual with access to such resources, and sufficient funds, can embark upon self-publishing. Some material is published electronically only, to be downloaded by individual users.</p>
          <p>Accordingly, the historiography of print materials production can be envisaged as, for the period up to the 1970s, largely a matter of identifying and describing relatively slow-changing technologies, and patterns of organisation of the printing and related trades, according particular attention to their initial establishment. While it has to recognise a period of substantial change within the period 1890 to 1914, with the introduction of hot-metal typesetting, photo-engraving, rotary presses for newspapers, offset presses, and electric power, together with major growth in worker and employer organisations, it should also stress the continuities throughout this period, and the decades of relative stability thereafter. Since about <date when="1970">1970</date>, however, it has to accommodate accelerated technological change and structural diversification, and to acknowledge that these processes will doubtless continue to proliferate. It needs also to comprehend the recent consolidation of ownership of larger scale enterprises, and the opening up of the country, since the mid 1980s, to takeovers by overseas-based corporations.</p>
          <p>The New Zealand printing industry has always had to accommodate the pressures of competition from larger scale overseas enterprises. Before about <date when="1938">1938</date>, the trade for books, specifically, within this country was heavily dominated by British publishers, so that relatively few were printed locally, and those mainly in niche areas (school books and readers, cookery, gardening, local histories, directories, official publications, and so forth). Helen M. Oliver in <hi rend="i">Printing and Publishing in New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1976">1976</date>) notes that, for the period prior to <date when="1967">1967</date>, many New Zealand published books were printed in Australia because of the favourable exchange rate, and some were printed much further afield. In the last couple of decades, computerised technology, and the increasing globalisation, in diverse ways, of production, markets, and ownership of capital resources, have generated new kinds of pressures and complexities affecting the printing industry. Even when the composition process is carried out in New Zealand, presswork and binding may take place in Malaysia, <name key="name-020943" type="place">Singapore</name> or Hong Kong. In this kind of situation, the local work is generally done by trade typesetters rather than by printing firms.</p>
          <p>Shifts in the economics of print material production are thus of major importance, and involve not only factors within New Zealand but also exchange rates, relative wage and paper costs, the level of sophistication of offshore production facilities, international or bilateral trade agreements, and the policies of other governments.</p>
          <p>Historically, since <date when="1900">1900</date>, the printing industry has been strongly affected by four major upheavals: the ongoing impact of the industrial relations and working conditions legislation of the earlier years of the 1890-1911 Liberal Government, principally the Industrial Conciliation and Arbitration Act <date when="1894">1894</date>; World War I, with its shortages and challenges; the Depression of 1929-35; and World War II.</p>
        </div>
        <div type="section" xml:id="_div2-N10A96">
          <head>General studies</head>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div2-N10A96-1">
            <p>The technology of printing had to be imported into New Zealand, accompanied by the skilled operators. The central processes were, and are, composition (once involving literally the setting of type, but now, in the new technology, better described as keyboarding) and presswork (the multiplying of copies by means of machines, ever more sophisticated). Equipment and skills came directly from <name key="name-008008" type="place">Europe</name>, the birthplace of printing four centuries earlier, in particular from Great Britain, the colonial master, and also indirectly by way of Australia, the nearest colonial neighbour, and later on from <name key="name-002804" type="place">North America</name>. The nature and extent of these importations into New Zealand have yet to be studied in any extensive and systematic way.</p>
            <p>Of the relatively few scholarly studies of New Zealand print production, the majority have been directed to the 1840s and 1850s. For later periods, such historical studies, and overviews of contemporary situations, as have appeared, have mostly originated from within the trade itself.</p>
            <p>A.G. Bagnall's <hi rend="i">A Reference List of Books and other Publications associated with the New Zealand Centennial 1840-1940</hi> (<date when="1942">1942</date>) identifies a significant number of historical surveys published about <date when="1940">1940</date> which have some relevance to this topic. They include special centennial numbers or supplements of many newspapers, local histories that would include information about newspaper and other printing, and, outstandingly, <hi rend="i">A History of Printing in New Zealand <date from="1830" to="1940">1830 -1940</date></hi>, ed. <name key="name-120205" type="person">R.A. McKay</name> (<date when="1940">1940</date>).</p>
            <p>This <hi rend="i">History</hi> contains 13 cogent essays, including two by the editor himself, and concludes with two lighter hearted pieces, and valuable biographies of some of the more prominent individuals of the trade, with details of the firms they were associated with. Andersen's essays on 'Early printing in New Zealand' and 'Maori printers and translators' remain useful, with later studies filling in further details. They are based upon Colenso's <hi rend="i">Fifty Years Ago in New Zealand</hi>, with additional material from the papers by T.M. Hocken ('The beginnings of literature in New Zealand: Part II') and <name key="name-120667" type="person">Henry Hill</name> ('Early printing in New Zealand') in the <hi rend="i">Transactions of the New Zealand Institute</hi>. These sources retain some independent interest: Hill's paper, for example, includes a useful commentary upon Colenso's 'Day and Waste book' (now held in the <name key="name-000507" type="organisation">Turnbull Library</name>).</p>
            <p><name key="name-120205" type="person">McKay</name> himself contributed 'Cavalcade of printing' and 'Process-engraving', and compiled the later, more anecdotal pieces. <name key="name-120935" type="person">Tom L. Mills</name> wrote about newspapers in 'The press: an historical survey', <name key="name-207375" type="person">Kenneth McLean Baxter</name> about 'The printing trade union' and <name key="name-120401" type="person">E.W. Clarkson</name> and <name key="name-120402" type="person">L.J. Berry</name> about 'Organisations of employers'. <name key="name-121275" type="person">H.J. Tubbs</name> contributed an essay of 'Stationery manufacture', <name key="name-209368" type="person">W.B. Sutch</name> an 'Economic survey', with accompanying graphs and tables of statistics, and Andersen a piece on 'The Maori alphabet', as well as collaborating with <name key="name-120397" type="person">A.B. Clark</name> on 'Our craftsmen go overseas, Great War 1914-18'. <name key="name-208832" type="person">Sir Apirana Ngata</name> wrote about 'The Maori and printed matter', and there is an essay compiled 'from official sources' on the 'Government Printing Office'.</p>
            <p>While most of these essays are relatively limited in the detail they provide, they remain sound introductions to their respective areas, and are often at their most valuable where the writers, a distinguished group, were working from firsthand knowledge. <name key="name-120205" type="person">McKay</name> himself merits respect as a man who had experience in all aspects of printing, in trade union leadership, and briefly in operating as a master printer himself, and who had devoted himself in the late 1930s to the study of the history of New Zealand printing—a true scholar-craftsman. The volume itself is elegantly produced by the standards of the time, and through its plates, most of which are unrelated to the text, served as a showcase for the skills of contemporary colour printers.</p>
            <p><name key="name-120877" type="person">Fiona Macmillan</name>, in her <date when="1969">1969</date> booklet <hi rend="i">New Zealand</hi> for the 'Spread of Printing' series, made a noble effort at a survey, accurate as far as it goes but severely limited by the insufficiency of material to draw on. In <date when="1950">1950</date> the Federation of Master Printers of New Zealand included <hi rend="i">Early Printing in New Zealand</hi> in their series of booklets on the printing industry; this concentrated on the technology rather than the people. Most recently, <name key="name-121337" type="person">Tolla Williment</name>'s <hi rend="i">150 years of Printing in New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1985">1985</date>) is the first attempt by a single author to survey the field in its entirety, and it is a tolerable popular introduction with a slight bias towards the mission printing of the early years which was to be expected in view of its sponsorship by the Bible Society.</p>
            <p>Regional studies are scarce. <name key="name-121202" type="person">Albert A. Smith</name>'s <hi rend="i">Printing in Canterbury</hi> (<date when="1953">1953</date>) is the only published work to attempt a complete chronological coverage, and for Otago, there is an unpublished typescript, 'Printing in <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> and Otago, 1847-1937' by <name key="name-111521" type="person">Joseph Longhurst Gregory</name> (died <date when="1959">1959</date>), revised by <name key="name-111522" type="person">R.V.S. Perry</name> (<date when="1969">1969</date>), lodged in the Hocken Library. For Wellington, there are potted histories of firms in the Wellington province in the <hi rend="i">Centenary 1862-1962</hi> publication of the Wellington branch of the Printing and Related Trades Union (<date when="1962">1962</date>). Hocken's notes in <hi rend="i">Contributions to the Early History of New Zealand (Otago Settlement)</hi> (<date when="1898">1898</date>) are the only substantial contribution to any general regional history, with the chronological restriction inevitable in the character of the work which contains it. Other early regional histories often include notes on the newspaper history of the region—an almost inevitable result of their compilation by journalists—but these are often not reliable.</p>
            <p>Recent more systematic scholarship is best represented by the theses of <name key="name-120334" type="person">Patricia Burns</name> ('The foundation of the New Zealand press', PhD, <date when="1957">1957</date>) and <name key="name-120767" type="person">Lishi Kwasitsu</name> (published as <hi rend="i">Printing and the Book Trade in Early Nelson</hi>, <date when="1996">1996</date>) and the work of <name key="name-120385" type="person">K.A. Coleridge</name> who has published several papers on the early Wellington trade. 'Printing and publishing in Wellington' (<date when="1986">1986</date>) and 'Thriving on impressions' in the <date when="1990">1990</date> essay collection <hi rend="i">The Making of Wellington 1800-1914</hi> (eds. Hamer and Nicholls) cover different angles of what is the same general ground. The first of these was reprinted in <hi rend="i">Early Printing in New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1989">1989</date>), together with a more general survey paper by <name key="name-120380" type="person">Roderick Cave</name> and K.A. Coleridge, 'For Gospel and wool trade' (<date when="1985">1985</date>).</p>
            <p>Sources for historical studies are widely scattered. The primary documents are the products of the presses themselves, catalogued principally in the <hi rend="i">New Zealand National Bibliography to <date when="1960">1960</date></hi> ed. <name key="name-207317" type="person">A.G. Bagnall</name>, the <hi rend="i">New Zealand National Bibliography</hi> (from <date when="1966">1966</date>) and its online companion the New Zealand Bibliographic Network. The publications between 1961 and 1966 were catalogued in the 'Current national bibliography' (issued with <hi rend="i">Index to New Zealand Periodicals</hi>). The more significant serial publications and journal articles for the earlier years were included by Hocken in his <hi rend="i">Bibliography of the Literature relating to New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1909">1909</date>), the most substantial of earlier attempts at a national bibliography. There is a nearly complete listing of New Zealand newspapers in <name key="name-121548" type="person">D. Ross Harvey</name>'s <hi rend="i">Union List of Newspapers Preserved in Libraries</hi> (<date when="1987">1987</date>), and this is the only up-to-date and comprehensive guide, incorporating the locations of surviving copies.</p>
            <p>As a newspaper press was usually the first, and often the only, printing firm in any settlement, the newspaper history will be a significant source of local information on printing. Guy Scholefield's <hi rend="i">Newspapers in New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1958">1958</date>) is the only general survey of newspaper history, extending to the late 1940s. It outlines the history of the people and firms that produced these newspapers, as well as jobbing and general printing, and occasionally includes details about their equipment. It can be corrected on many points of detail, especially for some early titles with convoluted publishing histories, but provides a good general survey concentrating on the ownership and editorial history.</p>
            <p>Individual newspapers, usually in the main cities, and their owners have been the subject of several theses, most of which concentrate on the editorial history and the political relationships; and historical accounts of some newspapers have appeared in the journals published by local historical societies, and even more frequently in the newspaper itself if it has survived. Most local history journals have been indexed in <hi rend="i">Index to New Zealand Periodicals</hi> (1941-86), and more recently in <hi rend="i">Index New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1987">1987</date>- ). The terms used are quite broad, and in the earlier title local history was often merely given a general reference such as 'Wanganui-History' for the entire periodical, so that the complete run must be searched. One separately published survey of local newspapers worthy of emulation is <name key="name-120728" type="person">R.F. Johncock</name>'s <hi rend="i">Brief History of the Press: Napier and Hastings Newspapers</hi> (<date when="1991">1991</date>), which includes a section on the technology with illustrations which make it very useful. <name key="name-200170" type="person">Frank Fyfe</name> of Greytown was working (until his death in <date when="1997-06">June 1997</date>) on a book-length study of the history of the newspapers of the Wairarapa for the period 1874 to 1938, which was to include information about their presses and other equipment.</p>
            <p>Many newspaper firms, and other printing companies, have produced historical publications at the times of their own centennials, which provide useful information not only about themselves, but also about predecessor firms, and often about their relations with other firms in the same city. A notable example is Coulls Somerville Wilkie's history of its own development (probably by <name key="name-111523" type="person">T.C. Coull</name>), which includes much information about <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> printing in the 19th century; this was published in successive issues of its house journal <hi rend="i">Invicta News</hi>, in 1945-47, but the typescript version, in the company archives in the Hocken Library, is more inclusive.</p>
            <p>A valuable overview of printing technologies at a certain period was provided by <name key="name-120709" type="person">George R. Hutcheson</name>'s <hi rend="i">H.B. &amp; J.'s Handbook</hi> (<date when="1938">1938</date>). Oliver (<date when="1976">1976</date>) offered an overview for the early 1970s directed to production statistics, and economic issues. Oliver stressed the 'splintered' nature of the New Zealand printing industry, with an already relatively small market divided up between geographically dispersed printing firms.</p>
            <p>An annual overview of the general state of the printing industry was traditionally provided in presidential addresses to the conference of the national Master Printers' Federation. Between 1935 and 1951 these were published in its journal <hi rend="i">Printing Prestige</hi>. Brief reports on printing and publishing can be found in the annual editions of the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Official Yearbook</hi>, usually within the articles headed 'Publishing', and valuable statistics for printing and associated industries in the 'Manufacturing' section.</p>
            <p>The work of print material production in this country extends well beyond what can be found in the bibliographies mentioned above. Even for books and pamphlets, there are some categories of items of a modest nature for which Hocken, Bagnall and others would have included, at most, only the earliest printings. A good deal of the 'bread and butter' book work that has kept New Zealand printing houses busy was excluded by Bagnall, such as reprints of school books and cookery books. The latter deficiency is covered by <name key="name-036075" type="person">Hugh Price</name>'s excellent bibliography <hi rend="i">School Books Published in New Zealand to <date when="1960">1960</date></hi> (<date when="1992">1992</date>), covering the entire educational field. It is complemented by Ian McLaren's <hi rend="i">Whitcombe's Story Books: A Trans-Tasman Survey</hi> (<date when="1984">1984</date>), a scholarly study of a quite important area of printing and publishing. It is estimated that between 1908 and 1962 over 12 million copies were published of these supplementary readers, the majority of them produced in New Zealand by Whitcombe &amp; Tombs's own printing works (its <name key="name-001298" type="place">Melbourne</name> and Sydney branches contracted out to local printers).</p>
            <p>There is, unfortunately, no complete listing of serial titles published in New Zealand, let alone a proper bibliography. Hocken (<date when="1909">1909</date>) lists the more important early titles, and others have been catalogued on the New Zealand Bibliographic Network, as new titles were added to the current National Bibliography. Current titles are recorded in the <hi rend="i">Index to New Zealand Periodicals</hi> and <hi rend="i">Index New Zealand</hi>. However, these recent sources can only be used to identify titles already known of through other sources.</p>
            <p>For non-book work, there are such sampling works as <name key="name-120520" type="person">Ellen Ellis</name>'s <hi rend="i">The New Zealand Poster Book 1830-1940</hi> (<date when="1977">1977</date>) and <name key="name-120633" type="person">R.P. Hargreaves</name> and <name key="name-120637" type="person">T.J. Hearn</name>'s <hi rend="i">New Zealand in the Mid-Victorian Era: An Album of Contemporary Engravings</hi> (<date when="1977">1977</date>). However, many of these were not printed in New Zealand, as is true of most items listed in the comprehensive catalogue, E.M. and <name key="name-120518" type="person">D.C. Ellis</name>'s <hi rend="i">Early Prints of New Zealand 1642-1875</hi> (<date when="1978">1978</date>). On the other hand, <hi rend="i">The Postage Stamps of New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1938">1938</date>- ), published by the Royal Philatelic Society, deals with issues that have been printed by the Government Printer, as well as with those contracted out to overseas specialists. There are the files of newspapers, and most notably their Christmas supplements, which for some decades were lavishly illustrated (often, also, containing loose colour plates), as showcases for the capabilities of their process departments. Typical of these are the <date when="1936">1936</date> issues of the <hi rend="i">Auckland Star's Brett's Christmas Annual</hi>, the Christchurch Press's <hi rend="i">New Zealand Illustrated</hi>, the <hi rend="i">Otago Daily Times &amp; Otago Witness Christmas Annual</hi>, and, for the weeklies, the <hi rend="i">Weekly News Christmas Number</hi> and the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Free Lance Annual</hi>. There are also the files of magazines. From the 1950s onward, such journals as <hi rend="i">Printers'</hi>
                  <figure xml:id="GriBo050"><graphic url="GriBo050.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="GriBo050-g"/><head>The interior of the George Davis Printing Works, <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name> (<date when="1901">1901</date>), photographed by Steffano Francis Webb (<date when="1880">1880</date>?-<date when="1967">1967</date>). The presence of women is a topic for further interesting research; for example, as late as the 1960s it was not possible for young women to be taken on as hand-typesetting apprentices in the Government Printing Office. Women were, however, often employed in binderies, though not as tradespeople. (Steffano Webb Collection, Alexander Turnbull Library, Wellington, NZ, reference number G-3941-1/1-)</head><figDesc>Black and white photograph</figDesc></figure> <hi rend="i">News</hi>, <hi rend="i">The New Zealand Printer</hi> and <hi rend="i">Graphix</hi> have exemplified in their illustrations the processes they documented. There are collections of ephemera, such as the collections of printed music, and of theatre programmes, in the Turnbull, Hocken and Auckland Public Libraries.</p>
            <p>The records of individual printing or publishing houses (they were often the same institution in the period before about <date when="1960">1960</date>) have survived only by chance in individual cases, when the enterprise no longer exists. A 'Printing Record Book' for 1941 to 1956 from Whitcombe &amp; Tombs (of <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name>) is held in photocopy by the <name key="name-000507" type="organisation">Turnbull Library</name>, which also holds records of the Wellington printing firm, Harry H. Tombs Ltd (<date from="1910" to="1957">1910-57</date>), and important documents from the printing houses of <name key="name-207684" type="person">William Colenso</name> and his successor <name key="name-200514" type="person">John Telford</name>. In National Archives of New Zealand are the major group of records for the Government Printing Office in its various historical incarnations as the Government Printing and Stationery Department, the Government Printing Department, the Printing Office, and, finally, Government Print. These are important not only for the history of government printing and publishing, but also for the historical series of details relating to technical developments in printing presses, typefaces and other aspects of equipment.</p>
            <p>Some production records of Whitcombe &amp; Tombs from the early 1920s, held by Whitcoulls Publishers Ltd, <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name>, about <date when="1984">1984</date>, are listed in Appendix 3 of McLaren (<date when="1984">1984</date>); although chiefly publishing records they include material relevant for printing. Selected records of Coulls Somerville Wilkie are in the Hocken Library. Some records of H.<name type="person">L. Young</name> are in the Manawatu Museum. Certain records of Watson &amp; Eyre, and the Manawatu Times, <name key="name-021386" type="place">Palmerston North</name>, and of the Raetihi Printing Co., are presently held by Massey University's <name key="name-120080" type="organisation">English Department</name>, but will go to the Manawatu Museum. Some records of the Wanganui Herald are in the Whanganui Regional Museum Archives. Surviving records of the Wanganui Chronicle are in Wanganui Newspapers Ltd's strong room. Records of Hawkes Bay Newspapers Ltd are preserved by the company in microfilm. Selected records of <name key="name-208567" type="person">John McIndoe</name> Ltd (<name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name>) in the Hocken Library, and of the <name key="name-200396" type="organisation">Pegasus Press</name> (<name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name>) in the Canterbury Museum, are concerned with publishing only. The Turnbull has some records of the Black Light and Standard Presses. These are examples only; a proper census remains to be done.</p>
            <p>Harvey, in his paper 'Towards a bibliography of New Zealand newspapers' (1989a), notes some of the most useful sources for newspaper history. The 19th-century journals <hi rend="i">New Zealand Press News and Typographical Circular</hi> (1876-79) and the <hi rend="i">Colonial Printers' Register</hi> (1879-81) published by <name key="name-200193" type="person">George Griffin</name> were primarily trade union journals but provide some information on technical developments and ownership concerns. The <hi rend="i">Australasian Typographical Journal</hi> (1870-1916) was principally Australian in coverage but did include some New Zealand items. Much more significant for its coverage was R. Coupland Harding's <hi rend="i">Typo</hi> (1887-97) which was intended for the industry as a whole, employers as well as workmen, and produced a valuable commentary on all aspects of developments in the trade. The Wai-te-ata Press edition of <hi rend="i">Selections from Typo</hi> (<date when="1982">1982</date>) prints all the passages specific to the New Zealand trade, including some of the advertisements which contain useful information on equipment sources and agencies. More recently, a trade journal of importance has been the <hi rend="i">Printers' News</hi> (<date when="1943">1943</date>- ) of the Master Printers' Federation, succeeding their <hi rend="i">Printing Prestige</hi>.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N10BEE">
            <head>Historical collections, exhibitions, museums, and awards</head>
            <p>An outstanding collection of typesetting machines, presses and other equipment, most of it in working order, is at the Printers' Workshop, Ferrymead Historic Park, in <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name>. The Bedplate Press Printing Museum Society at Silverstream, Hutt Valley, Wellington, is well-organised, and hopes that its museum will in time become the National Printing Museum. There is a significant collection at the Museum of Transport and Technology, at Western Springs in <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name>, in their 'Printshop' display. Local provincial museums, as for example the Manawatu Museum, <name key="name-021386" type="place">Palmerston North</name>, have smaller but good collections of old printing equipment, even if not all manage to provide significant documentation. The 'bibliographical presses' at Otago University in <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> (the Bibliography Room), Victoria University of Wellington (the <name key="name-200547" type="organisation">Wai-te-ata Press</name>, established by D.F. McKenzie in <date when="1962">1962</date> and revived in <date when="1995">1995</date> under the aegis of the Faculty of Arts, through a Research Fellowship), and the <name key="name-200225" type="organisation">Holloway Press</name>, at the Tamaki Campus of the University of <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name>, all own and use historical materials to demonstrate the traditional techniques.</p>
            <p>Exhibitions have included 'The Printer's Art: An Exhibition of Printing', which opened in Wellington on <date when="1937-03-25">25 March 1937</date>, and travelled to three other centres. It included over 650 items, mainly posters, loaned by the British Federation of Master Printers (<hi rend="i">Printing Prestige</hi>, 7 (<date when="1937-09">September 1937</date>): pp.5-10). In <date when="1940-11">November 1940</date>, 'quintennial celebration of printing' exhibitions, public lectures, etc., in honour of Gutenberg, and his successors, took place in the four main centres (<hi rend="i">Printing Prestige</hi>, 16 (<date when="1940-12">December 1940</date>): pp.13-15). An exhibition mounted in <date when="1956">1956</date> by the <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name> public libraries is remembered by its printed catalogue, <hi rend="i">Printed in Auckland: Book Production and Design Past and Present</hi>. In <date when="1990-01">January 1990</date>, an 'Art of the Book' exhibition, in the New Zealand Academy of Fine Arts Gallery, Wellington, had a valuable catalogue, <hi rend="i">Art of the Book</hi>, compiled by <name key="name-200175" type="person">Rowan Gibbs</name>, which was published by the <name key="name-200044" type="organisation">Book Arts Society</name>, typeset by <name key="name-200128" type="person">John Denny</name> (Pūriri Press) and printed and bound by <name key="name-200280" type="person">Alan Loney</name>. In 1996-97, 'Making an Impression: A History of Government Printing' has been on display at the National Archives, Wellington, accompanied by a video showing workers and machines in action, and a brochure with a potted history of the Government Printing Office.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div type="section" xml:id="_div2-N10C17">
          <head>Technology</head>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div2-N10C17-1">
            <p>The technology of printing has been entirely imported and all significant changes have been introduced from the European or North American places of invention. Detailed information about the techniques can be found in the printers' manuals of England or <name key="name-008197" type="place">America</name>; a number of these have been made available since the 1960s, and much of the relevant material is summarised in <name key="name-120568" type="person">Philip Gaskell</name>'s compendium <hi rend="i">A New Introduction to Bibliography</hi> (<date when="1972">1972</date>) which has a useful section of 'Reference Bibliography', covering the various technical aspects divided by period. The earliest printing in New Zealand used many of the techniques of the wooden press era (pre-<date when="1800">1800</date>), and there was then a transition to the technology current in England. Conditions in <name key="name-002804" type="place">North America</name> were often closer to the New Zealand situation than those in <name key="name-005976" type="place">Britain</name>, and works such as R.G. Silver's <hi rend="i">The American Printer 1787-1825</hi> (<date when="1967">1967</date>) are worth consulting for general background.</p>
            <p>Technical innovations can be traced through the contemporary trade journals. The most common sources were British journals such as the <hi rend="i">British Printer</hi> (London, <date when="1888">1888</date>- ) and the <name key="name-006454" type="place">Chicago</name> publication <hi rend="i">Inland Printer</hi>, although other sources were also available. Individual manufacturers of machinery and other equipment would advertise in the local trade journals, and the Australian firms of printers' brokers could supply trade literature. Later in the 19th century, several New Zealand firms added the function of printers' broker to their other areas of activity; their identity must be discovered through their advertisements in the New Zealand or Australian trade journals such as <hi rend="i">Typo</hi> or, at a later date, <hi rend="i">Printers' News</hi>, the journal of the Master Printers' Federation.</p>
            <p>In the 20th century, on the whole, New Zealand print production processes have exhibited an accelerated pace of technological change, keeping not far behind developments in the larger, more heavily industrialised countries. Even so, older technologies persisted for a long time in niche areas, as in the continuing use of hand-set type for advertisements or posters, and of manual presses for proofing (see, for an example, William Cameron, <hi rend="i">Centenary of a Press</hi>, <date when="1963">1963</date>).</p>
            <p>Hardware (typesetting machines, presses, guillotines, bindery presses, etc.) and new skills have still had to be imported. Type and ink have also been imported extensively, although local manufacturers, such as the ink-making firm Morrison &amp; Morrison (ceased <date when="1994">1994</date>), have taken increasing shares of the market. For a long time, all printing papers had to be imported, but since the 1950s New Zealand has become more than self-sufficient in the manufacture of newsprint and of most kinds of uncoated printing papers.</p>
            <p>Agencies for overseas suppliers, new migrants, travelling New Zealanders, overseas trade journals such as those already mentioned, and <hi rend="i">Penrose's Pictorial Annual</hi>, and advertisements in their own journals, have kept New Zealand printers in touch with overseas developments and induced them to invest in new plant. A representative collection of text resources which had been acquired and consulted by printers is documented in the <name key="name-200163" type="organisation">Ferrymead Printing Society</name>'s <hi rend="i">Catalogue of Printing Technical Books</hi> (<date when="1993">1993</date>), which includes operating manuals for machines, catalogues for type and equipment, guides to typography and costing, and trade magazines, mainly from <name key="name-005976" type="place">Britain</name> or the USA. A noteworthy example of a migrant who introduced important innovations was <name key="name-208585" type="person">Arthur McKee</name>, who brought a linotype machine with him when he immigrated in <date when="1890">1890</date>, introduced new photo-engraving techniques, and was the first printer in the southern hemisphere to run a press with an electric motor (see <name key="name-111524" type="person">R.F. McKee</name>'s article in the <hi rend="i">Dictionary of New Zealand Biography</hi>, vol.3).</p>
            <p>The <hi rend="i">New Zealand Patent Office Journal</hi> (<date when="1912">1912</date>- ) contains a record of all patents, trade marks and designs registered in New Zealand. These include many overseas developments as well as New Zealand registrations; in both categories there are a number of innovations relevant to printing technology. Before the <hi rend="i">Journal</hi> was established the annual report of the Patent Office (<hi rend="i">AJHR</hi> H.1, <date when="1885">1885</date>, and subsequent years) included lists with the same information. The Patent Office records, both in the current material held in the Office (in Lower Hutt) and the non-current records deposited in National Archives, contain the fuller specifications of the patents registered.</p>
            <p>Probably the most notable of local inventors was <name key="name-111525" type="person">Frederick W. Sears</name>, who pioneered a process for photo-lithography, in the first years of this century; his article on 'alzinography' in <hi rend="i">Penrose's Pictorial Annual</hi> (1908-09) describes his process, and the contribution of a <name key="name-006454" type="place">Chicago</name> lawyer and engineer, Ira Washington Rubel, who invented the offset printing press that made it work (see also <name key="name-120205" type="person">McKay</name>, <date when="1940">1940</date>, p.109). W.H. Thomas in <hi rend="i">The Inky Way</hi> (<date when="1960">1960</date>; see pp.89-90) writes of E. Richards' invention of a remarkably durable plate for offset printing, utilised by Thomas in <hi rend="i">New Zealand Pictorial News</hi>.</p>
            <p>There has been only one general survey of developments in the technology of printing in New Zealand, the work of <name key="name-120205" type="person">McKay</name>, 'Cavalcade of printing' (1940b). The 19th-century industrial exhibitions included sections on the printing industry and accounts in the exhibition reports and catalogues can be very useful, even when the descriptions are very brief. The first of these exhibitions, the New Zealand Exhibition held in <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> in <date when="1865">1865</date>, is the most useful of these reports with the commentary in <hi rend="i">Reports and Awards of the Jurors</hi> (under class VIII: Printing and allied machinery, and class XXVIII: Paper, stationery, printing and bookbinding) being very rewarding. The New Zealand Industrial Exhibition in Wellington in <date when="1885">1885</date> also provides some useful commentary in its <hi rend="i">Official Record</hi>, as does the <hi rend="i">Official Catalogue</hi> of the New Zealand and South Seas Exhibition in <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name>, 1889-90. Other exhibition catalogues and handbooks provide much less detail.</p>
            <p>Given the broad division between composition and presswork, within the composition or 'pre-press' area, right through to about <date when="1970">1970</date>, there was a sharp distinction between typesetting and graphic processes, such as lithography or photo-engraving. From the 1970s onward, with the development of computerised composition, this polarity has become less clear cut. In terms of personnel, there was a correspondingly clear separation of 'printing' workers from lithographers and process engravers. Larger printing works usually had their own process departments; but smaller firms specialised in one trade or in another. Now, in the 1990s, most of the larger firms have the capacity to carry out four-colour graphic work; but even so, there is a discernible category of firms that specialise in high-quality graphics. Among the local journals, <hi rend="i">Printers' News</hi> serves the mainstream, whereas the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Printer</hi> and <hi rend="i">Graphix</hi> have been directed towards the specialists (<hi rend="i">Graphix</hi> has included a particular interest in the printing of packaging). <hi rend="i">Computype Briefs</hi> (10 issues, 1989-91) also appealed to graphics specialists.</p>
            <p>A crucial dimension of technology is the skills of work people. An unsigned article, 'The printing and publishing industry of the dominion: an analysis', in <hi rend="i">Printing Prestige</hi>, 1 (<date when="1935-10">October 1935</date>) noted that printing and publishing was then 'easily the largest secondary industry in the country', and provided the highest percentage of added value, 278%, through the skilled use of its technology. Adequate levels of training of apprentices in the various crafts was thus always a major concern. In more prosperous times, the retention of skilled tradesmen could present serious difficulties for provincial printing companies, as for example, for the <name key="name-200210" type="organisation">Hawera Star Co</name>., which sometimes had to import tradesmen from England to replace those who left for the main centres (see <hi rend="i">One Hundred Today: The Hawera Star 1880-1980</hi>, <date when="1980-04-10">10 April 1980</date>, p.86).</p>
            <p>The most drastic technological innovations in the 'modern' era in printing have been in typesetting processes. The first major transformation was the progressive, but never complete, displacement, from about <date when="1890">1890</date> onwards, of hand-setting by the introduction of Linotype, Monotype and other hot-metal machines, notably Intertype and Ludlow. Whereas previously big companies had had large numbers of hand-compositors working long hours, the operators of these machines could get through work more quickly. But substantial, and extended, craft skills were still required; and increased volumes of work brought about net gains in employment levels. The second 'revolution' has been the introduction of computer typesetting from the 1970s onward. <name key="name-120670" type="person">Roberta Hill</name> and <name key="name-120671" type="person">Bob Gidlow</name> in <hi rend="i">From Hot Type to Cold Metal</hi> (<date when="1988">1988</date>) indicate that it has been more devastating, leaving less and less room for the exercise of the skills of the printing craftsman or woman. Graphic process work has also been transformed, now that images can be directly scanned, and integrated into layouts; again, the new technology has displaced the highly skilled craftspeople.</p>
            <p>Advances in printing press technology have been more frequent, and step-by-step. The skills required have changed, and the work of operators become less laborious. The introduction of steam, gas and eventually electric power obviated the need for muscle power, but manual feeding of paper for general printing persisted much longer. The introduction of automatic feeding enabled presses to work much faster.</p>
            <p>Technological processes available at a particular period have been outlined in Hutcheson (<date when="1938">1938</date>), in <name key="name-120205" type="person">McKay</name> (<date when="1940">1940</date>), in the Federation of Master Printers' brochure, <hi rend="i">The Printing Industry in New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1969">1969</date>), in the brochure entitled simply <hi rend="i">Unity Press Ltd, Auckland</hi>, in Oliver (<date when="1976">1976</date>), and in Hill and Gidlow (<date when="1988">1988</date>).</p>
            <p>Individual newspaper histories, usually published as special supplements to the newspaper in question, have customarily included descriptions of the currently used technology and sometimes a survey of the past technology. An excellent example of the genre is the <hi rend="i">Otago Daily Times <date from="1861" to="1961">1861-1961</date>: First Hundred Years</hi>, in which commentary on the paper's history is combined with notes on the advertisers, most of whom are suppliers of paper, ink and printing machinery. The Christchurch paper, <hi rend="i">The Press</hi>, is unusual for publishing a separate hardback book, <name key="name-121045" type="person">R.B. O'Neill</name>'s <hi rend="i">The Press 1861-1961</hi>, for its centenary.</p>
            <p>The isolated examples of jobbing printers issuing publicity booklets, such as H.I. Jones &amp; Son Ltd's <hi rend="i">Jubilee Souvenir 1860-1910</hi>, may include photographs and commentary to provide some technical information. Newspaper advertising supplements when a printing firm has opened new premises may also provide significant technical information on current equipment; the identification of these supplements will be difficult without systematic scanning of newspaper pages, since they are seldom covered by indexing sources.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N10CF6">
            <head>Type and materials</head>
            <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N10CF6-1">
              <p>This section covers typography (in the sense of design), type, equipment, and materials—ink and paper.</p>
            </div>
            <div type="section" xml:id="_div4-N10D06">
              <head>Typography</head>
              <p>The term has two senses, page and book design, and the nature of typefaces. In the broader sense (which includes the choice of type), apart from the influence of R. Coupland Harding, this country's printers have generally followed fashions originating overseas.</p>
              <p>As <name key="name-207379" type="person">J.C. Beaglehole</name> noted, in 'Book production in New Zealand' (<date when="1948">1948</date>), from late last century up to about <date when="1938">1938</date> the quality of book and print material production suffered a 'big slump'. This general mediocrity could be linked to the smallness of the New Zealand book market, and the dominance over it for a long time by overseas publishers, so that only the more modest kinds of books tended to be printed within this country. There were however honourable exceptions, including some of the works printed by the Brett Publishing Co. in <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name>, and by <name key="name-209478" type="person">Harry H. Tombs</name> in Wellington, such as his edition of 
                        <name key="name-207731" type="person">James Cowan</name> and Sir Māui Pōmare's <hi rend="i">Legends of the Maori</hi> (<date when="1935">1935</date>), described in the Fine Arts (NZ) brochure <hi rend="i">A Romance of Book Production</hi> (<date when="1929">1929</date>).</p>
              <p>Beaglehole accorded credit for the recovery in typographical quality to the publishing policies of the New Zealand Council for Educational Research (for which he had himself been the designer), and of the Department of Internal Affairs in relation to the publications associated with the <date when="1940">1940</date> Centennial, and to the rhetoric and examples provided by Robert S. Lowry in <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name>, and by the Caxton Press group in <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name>.</p>
              <p>It is widely acknowledged that Lowry (see <hi rend="i">Printed in Auckland</hi> (<date when="1956">1956</date>) and Glover, 'Typography: <name key="name-121667" type="person">Bob Lowry</name>'s books', in <hi rend="i">Book</hi> no.8 (<date when="1946">1946</date>)), and <name key="name-208049" type="person">Denis Glover</name>, <name key="name-207415" type="person">Leo Bensemann</name>, <name key="name-200134" type="person">Dennis Donovan</name> and others at the Caxton Press, despite the relatively small scale of their operations, did much to bring about an extensive raising of consciousness in this country about the importance of good design, and of using harmonious, elegant typefaces. Glover's 'Some notes on typography', first published in <hi rend="i">Yearbook of the Arts in New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1949">1949</date>), amount to a statement of faith. <name key="name-200280" type="person">Alan Loney</name>'s '"Something of moment": Caxton Press typography in the 1950s' (<hi rend="i">Landfall</hi>, <date when="1993">1993</date>) traces much of the Caxton group's inspiration back to the new British book arts culture propounded by Stanley Morison, Eric Gill and Bruce Rogers. Their lead was picked up by other relatively modest sized high quality presses, such as <name key="name-200587" type="person">Albion Wright</name>'s <name key="name-200396" type="organisation">Pegasus Press</name>, <name key="name-200179" type="person">Robert Gormack</name>'s Nag's Head Press and <name key="name-200280" type="person">Alan Loney</name>'s <name key="name-200211" type="organisation">Hawk Press</name>, in <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name>, and <name key="name-121580" type="person">Ronald Holloway</name>'s <name key="name-200195" type="organisation">Griffin Press</name> in <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name>. Here, the dividing line between the commercial and the hobby or private press is blurred to near invisibility.</p>
              <p>Other recent book designers and typographers are worthy of investigation, among them <name key="name-121075" type="person">Janet Paul</name>, originally of the publishers Blackwood &amp; <name key="name-121075" type="person">Janet Paul</name>, and subsequently freelance, and <name key="name-200320" type="person">Lindsay Missen</name>.</p>
              <p>That many of the more straightforwardly commercial printers developed an active interest in the aesthetics and finer points of their craft is evidenced by some of the books and periodicals passed on from them to printing libraries such as the <name key="name-200163" type="organisation">Ferrymead Printing Society</name>'s in <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name>. The printer and journalist <name key="name-120935" type="person">Tom L. Mills</name>, of Wellington and Feilding (<date from="1865" to="1955">1865-1955</date>), is mentioned by <name key="name-120205" type="person">McKay</name> (<date when="1940">1940</date>, p.239) as a prolific writer of newsletters, local correspondent for British, American and Australian trade journals, and contributor of articles to many other periodicals.</p>
              <p>General studies of the use of type in New Zealand book design have been few, but most have provided excellent indications of what should be done. Harding's comments in <hi rend="i">Typo</hi> on the new publications which came to his attention are always interesting, though brief; most are reprinted in <hi rend="i">Selections from Typo</hi>. <name key="name-121048" type="person">J.E. Traue</name> discusses certain examples of Harding's own typography in '<name key="name-208156" type="person">Robert Coupland Harding</name>'s library catalogues <date from="1880" to="1889">1880-89</date>' in the <hi rend="i">Turnbull Library Record</hi> of <date when="1992">1992</date>. There is one general survey, McCormick's excellent but brief sketch 'Pattern of culture' (<date when="1950">1950</date>). As always with this author, this is an exemplary piece of work. Some very specific pieces are reviews: Beaglehole's 'A few harsh words on Areopagitica as printed' (<hi rend="i">Book</hi> no.4, <date when="1941">1941</date>) is a stringent analysis of the failure of the Caxton edition to present an historically valid typographic version of the Milton text. He provided a much more general, very brief, survey in his 'Book production in New Zealand' (<date when="1948">1948</date>), and his 'A small bouquet for the <name key="name-036691" type="organisation">Education Department</name>' (<date when="1951">1951</date>) acknowledges the typographic achievement of the School Publications Branch of the Department.</p>
              <p>Beaglehole's own work as a typographer or book designer was surveyed in a knowledgeable and expert way by <name key="name-121075" type="person">Janet Paul</name> in a lecture at the Stout Research Centre in <date when="1991">1991</date>; this is to be published by the <name key="name-200044" type="organisation">Book Arts Society</name> in <date when="1997">1997</date>. Her <date when="1977">1977</date> article on ' <hi rend="i">The Turnbull Library Record</hi> 1940-76' includes a discussion of the typography.</p>
              <p>Under 'Typography' may be included style manuals. Survivors include those issued by the Otago Daily Times and Witness Newspaper Co. Ltd (<date when="1927">1927</date>), the <hi rend="i">Dominion</hi> (<date when="1938">1938</date>), Wilson &amp; Horton Ltd (<date when="1952">1952</date>), the <hi rend="i">Evening Post</hi> (<date when="1955">1955</date>), the <hi rend="i">Timaru Herald</hi> (<date when="1957">1957</date>), the NZ Printing and Stationery Department's <hi rend="i">Government Printing Office Style Book</hi> (<date when="1958">1958</date>; previously issued in separate parts, <date from="1954" to="1958">1954-58</date>), the most recent edition of which is <hi rend="i">The Style Book</hi> (revised and expanded by D. Wallace and J. Hughes, <date when="1995">1995</date>), and <hi rend="i">Write, Edit, Print</hi> (AGPS and Lincoln University Press <date when="1997">1997</date>). The Ferrymead library has three style books for the <hi rend="i">Christchurch Star</hi> (<date when="1970">1970</date>, <date when="1983">1983</date>, n.d.).</p>
              <p>The only studies of typefaces used in New Zealand are the introduction by <name key="name-120907" type="person">Keith Maslen</name> to the specimen of Matthews Baxter &amp; Co. of <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name>, reproduced in his <hi rend="i">Victorian Typefaces in <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name></hi>, and the brief article by Coleridge, 'Ornamental and display types by commercial printers in colonial New Zealand' (<date when="1996">1996</date>). The early series of articles by Harding, 'Design in typography', in his journal <hi rend="i">Typo</hi> (which are not included in the <hi rend="i">Selections from Typo</hi>), and his contributions to the Chicago-based <hi rend="i">Inland Printer</hi> (c.1894-1905) are general studies with no specific New Zealand reference, but they are important because they provide the context for subsequent developments in New Zealand and for Harding's own work. D.F. McKenzie discusses the ideas in these articles in '<name key="name-208156" type="person">Robert Coupland Harding</name> on design in typography' in <hi rend="i">An Index of Civilisation</hi> (<date when="1993">1993</date>).</p>
              <p>Type specimens are the most important source material for the history of typography. The first creative act of the printer has always been to build his (occasionally her) stock of types, by selecting from the range of competing designs. The choice is normally made from type specimens, issued since almost the earliest days of printing, formerly by type-founders selling their wares in the form of finished cold metal types or as matrices—a few such firms still operate—and recently by computer software companies such as Adobe Systems Inc. Type specimens from the original supplier, whether in the form of books, brochures, or single sheets, are invaluable sources for the identification of typefaces in local use, as well as for tracing the sources of supply. Few copies of early type founders' specimen books exist outside the major production centres in <name key="name-008008" type="place">Europe</name> and <name key="name-002804" type="place">North America</name>, where St Bride's Printing Library in London has the best publicly accessible collection.</p>
              <p>The Lyon &amp; Blair <hi rend="i">Specimens of Printing Types . . . manufactured by Stephenson, Blake &amp; Co.</hi> (probably c.<date when="1885">1885</date>) is the nearest to a type founder's catalogue produced in 19th-century New Zealand; Lyon &amp; Blair were agents for Stephenson Blake from about <date when="1875">1875</date>. The specimen books issued by printers, such as the Matthews, Baxter specimen reprinted in <hi rend="i">Victorian Typefaces</hi>, and the <date when="1878">1878</date> <hi rend="i">Specimens of Type, Borders &amp;c</hi> used in Lyttelton Prison, seldom if ever identify the designer or foundry, as Coupland Harding complained. Harding's own <hi rend="i">Catalogue of Printing Types, Machinery and Materials</hi> which was printed in <date when="1897">1897</date> is, apparently, a remarkable exception. Unfortunately it seems to survive only as a single copy held in private hands.</p>
              <p>In the 20th century, specimens of typefaces from overseas suppliers have often been distributed, if not printed, by New Zealand agents. Examples are the specimens of Mouldtype faces issued perhaps since the 1930s by Morrison &amp; Morrison (later Morrison Printing Inks &amp; Machinery). A significant Wellington agent, <name key="name-200115" type="person">Alex Cowan</name> &amp; Sons Ltd, issued <hi rend="i">Specimens of Printing Types, Borders, &amp;c.</hi>, kept in stock (undated, c.<date when="1910">1910</date>). The country of supply is significant. In <date when="1881">1881</date>, <name key="name-200193" type="person">George Griffin</name>, the <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> proprietor of the <hi rend="i">Colonial Printers' Register</hi>, lamented that the British were neglecting the colonial market, 'which in the matter of ornamental and jobbing type, is almost monopolised by the Americans' (vol.2, p.132, <date when="1881-06-30">30 June 1881</date>). Comparative studies, for instance with Australia, are needed.</p>
              <p>New Zealand has not had an originator of type designs (<hi rend="i">pace</hi> Harding), but in the 20th century, local foundries have been established to cast type suitable for hand-setting using overseas-supplied matrices, by firms such as Express Typesetters in <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name>; thus it became much easier to replace worn fonts, recycling the metal. Firms with their own typesetting machines have required ingots of metal, sets of matrices, and catalogues of faces.</p>
              <p>The Ferrymead Printing Society's library catalogue lists a substantial collection of specimen books, from founders such as Stephenson Blake (UK, c.<date when="1880">1880</date>, <date when="1963">1963</date>), Berthold Type Foundry (<name key="name-006973" type="place">Berlin</name>), American Type Founders Co. (<date when="1912">1912</date>, n.d.), and also from the American suppliers of typesetting machines, Mergenthaler Linotype Co., Intertype Corporation, Harris-Intertype Corporation, Ludlow Typograph Co., Lanston Monotype Corporation, and Monotype Corporation. Other repositories have representative examples from these and other firms.</p>
              <p>Printers' types and the way they use them may be seen in whatever issues from their press. However, individual printers have often chosen to display their wares and skills by designing and printing their own type specimens. These were sometimes prepared for trade exhibitions, as for instance the Fergusson and Mitchell works exhibited at the <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> exhibitions of 1865 and 1889-90. Most were produced for distribution to potential customers. Specimens have frequently been issued by newspaper printers, such as the <hi rend="i">Otago Daily Times</hi>, for the use of advertisers in their newspaper, or for customers of their jobbing department. Examples of specimens from other than newspaper printers include much sought after pieces from the Caxton Press, <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name>, in the days of <name key="name-208049" type="person">Denis Glover</name> and <name key="name-207415" type="person">Leo Bensemann</name>, such as <hi rend="i">Meet Some Nice Types</hi> (<date when="1956">1956</date>). The Government Printing Office's <hi rend="i">New Type for Every Job</hi> (<date when="1952">1952</date>) was attractively 'set up and designed by William Sinclair, typographer'. The Ferrymead library includes specimens from firms such as <hi rend="i">The Press</hi>, the <hi rend="i">Christchurch Star</hi>, Bascands (<name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name>), Coulls Somerville Wilkie Ltd, and Whitcombe's/Whitcoulls. The Turnbull Library also has copies of some of these, and of others from other firms. The Caxton Press issued two specimen books 'of faces commonly in use' (<date when="1940">1940</date>; <date when="1948">1948</date>; new ed. <date when="1956">1956</date>, (expanded) <date when="1979">1979</date>).</p>
              <p>How many printers' specimens have yet to be collected—or may be lost forever—is suggested by Harding's comments on 'Trade Lists and Samples' in the issue of <hi rend="i">Typo</hi> for <date when="1890-10">October 1890</date> (p.123): 'We have been shown a little book of 24 pages, issued by Fergusson and Mitchell, of <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name>, and advertising the branches of work undertaken by that firm. Each page is different in design, and some recent novelties in type are displayed. It is the work of Mr J. McIndoe, and contains the best typographical designing that we have seen done in New Zealand . . .'</p>
              <p>The display advertising of individual printers will usually form a partial showcase of their selection of jobbing types. These pages do not, of course, name the types in any way. Coupland Harding preserved a collection of leaflets, which are now held in the <name key="name-000507" type="organisation">Turnbull Library</name> ('Collection of leaflets', 1874-87). In the case of other printers one must go to the advertisement pages of the almanacs and directories that they published (listed in Don Hansen's <hi rend="i">The Directory Directory</hi>, <date when="1994">1994</date>) and the occasional special publication such as the Wellington Typographical Union's <hi rend="i">Patriotic Souvenir <date when="1914">1914</date></hi>, which offers pages from a variety of firms with some anecdotes and brief accounts of printing.</p>
              <p>With the advent of machine casting in the 20th century, and the greater control of designs which accompanied a changed attitude to type design, the specimen books produced by printing firms were far more likely to identify the types precisely so that printers, or specialist typesetters, would automatically name the fonts they had available, and a printers' broker would name the designs they were offering for sale. This tendency was reinforced by the ease with which printers could obtain specimens and other sale literature directly from the original manufacturers, wherever they were located, even if they could not import the actual fonts, because of import restrictions. This was also true for the prospective customer, if interested, so that an advertising executive, for example, could have specimens from type designers in <name key="name-008197" type="place">America</name>, <name key="name-005976" type="place">Britain</name>, <name key="name-024930" type="place">Netherlands</name>, <name key="name-008556" type="place">Germany</name>, <name key="name-008009" type="place">France</name>, Sweden, <name key="name-035423" type="place">Switzerland</name>, <name key="name-026913" type="place">Hungary</name>, and <name key="name-007594" type="place">Spain</name>, even if no New Zealand printer ever bought type from any of them.</p>
              <p>The introduction of computer controlled phototypesetting, and the other technical advances of the 1970s and 1980s, made the identification of typefaces even more relevant, and a large printer such as the Government Printing Office would automatically itemise the designs and type sizes available, as in their looseleaf <hi rend="i">Gold Book</hi> specimen book of <date when="1984">1984</date>.</p>
            </div>
            <div type="section" xml:id="_div4-N10E13">
              <head>
                <hi rend="i">Presses and other machinery</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The machinery for all aspects of printing—the presses, the composing machines, and other more specialised equipment—has all been imported, usually having been manufactured in <name key="name-008008" type="place">Europe</name> (including Great Britain) or <name key="name-002804" type="place">North America</name>, though a number of Australian firms began to manufacture copies of European designs, with or without authorisation, from the mid 19th century. The standard sources for investigating the history of this machinery are indicated in Gaskell (<date when="1972">1972</date>), and <name key="name-120938" type="person">James Moran</name>'s specialist work <hi rend="i">Printing Presses</hi> (<date when="1973">1973</date>).</p>
              <p>
                <figure xml:id="GriBo061">
                  <graphic url="GriBo061.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="GriBo061-g"/>
                  <head>'Mr Testar instructs an apprentice in the art of embossing at the Government Printing Office, Wellington', a <date when="1949-09">September 1949</date> photograph taken by National Publicity Studios photographer W. Wilson. The Government Printing Office was a major provider of apprenticeships; there were 45 in 1880 and 96 in <date when="1966">1966</date>, including 12 bookbinding apprentices. In <date when="1988">1988</date>, the last full year of operation before it was sold (after 125 years of service to the government), there were 27 apprentices, 3 of whom were in bookbinding.(National Archives: National Publicity Studios Photographic Collection [Alexander Turnbull Library, Wellington, NZ, reference number F-30163-1/2- (A14,082)])</head>
                  <figDesc>Black and white photograph
                           </figDesc>
                </figure></p>
              <p>There have been no general surveys of the development of printing machinery as such in New Zealand, although most general accounts of the technology treat the introduction of new presses in some detail, and newspaper histories, such as the <hi rend="i">Otago Daily Times celebrates 125 years 1861-1986</hi>, usually place considerable stress on this aspect of their history.</p>
              <p>Some useful articles deal with particular aspects of the technology, or the sources of equipment. Kwasitsu's 'The production of the Nelson Examiner' (<date when="1986">1986</date>) covers the printing presses, as well as all the other features of the newspaper technology. There are also a group of articles on individual surviving, or historic, presses, beginning with William Cameron's <hi rend="i">New Zealand's First Printing Press</hi> (<date when="1959">1959</date>) on the press used by <name key="name-209706" type="person">William Yate</name> in <date when="1830">1830</date>. Other articles on particular presses are:
              <list>
                <item>William Cameron, <hi rend="i">Centenary of a Press</hi> (<date when="1963">1963</date>)</item>
                <item>Ruth M. Ross, 'Bishop Pompallier's press in New Zealand' (<date when="1973">1973</date>)</item>
                <item>M. Fitzgerald, 'A press from Paihia in the National Museum' (<date when="1974">1974</date>)</item>
                <item>Roderick Cave, 'A common press in New Zealand' (<date when="1984">1984</date>)</item>
                <item>Roderick Cave, 'An uncommon press in Canterbury Museum' (<date when="1993">1993</date>)</item>
              </list></p>
              <p><name key="name-120549" type="person">John Fletcher</name>'s article 'From the <name key="name-030978" type="place">Waikato</name> to Vienna and back' (<date when="1984">1984</date>), discusses the fate of the printing press gifted by the Austrian Emperor and used to print the Kingite newspaper <hi rend="i">Te Hokioi</hi>, as well as recounting the experiences of the two Māori men who were taught to print in Vienna.</p>
              <p>In the early 1960s, Cameron of Auckland University's English Department conducted a census that located about 70 19th-century hand-presses; but this needs updating. Until relatively recently, several such presses remained in commercial use as proofing presses, examples being the Albion described by Cameron in <date when="1963">1963</date>, and the Imperial press used by Watson &amp; Eyre, <name key="name-021386" type="place">Palmerston North</name>, now in Massey University's Bibliography Room. Others may be in the possession of members of the Association of Handcraft Printers.</p>
              <p>The Pompallier building at Russell is one historical museum with good documentation on the equipment on display, and the New Zealand Historic Places Trust's explanatory leaflet <hi rend="i">Pompallier: l'Imprimerie Mariste</hi> (1994c) has an excellent brief description of the equipment, just as the leaflet <hi rend="i">Pompallier: Composition</hi> (1994a) gives information on the techniques involved in printing.</p>
              <p>The best surviving archives relating to acquisition (and disposal) of mechanical hardware are those of the Government Printing Office. The archives of printing and newspaper companies, such as those listed above, may have some information. Otherwise the details for particular firms must be gleaned from newspaper histories, such as that by R.B. O'Neill (<date when="1963">1963</date>), and centennial issues, also from local histories such as <name key="name-120923" type="person">Paul Melody</name>'s <hi rend="i">They Called it Marton</hi> (<date when="1979">1979</date>), and autobiographies such as Kay Holloway's <hi rend="i">Meet Me at the Press</hi> (<date when="1994">1994</date>), about the <name key="name-200195" type="organisation">Griffin Press</name> which, for much of its life, she operated with her husband Ronald.</p>
              <p>For the 20th century, details of the increasingly sophisticated presses becoming available can be found in articles and advertisements in trade journals, originated both overseas and locally, and in newspapers' centennial supplements. <name key="name-120205" type="person">McKay</name> (1940b, pp.103-04) shows the machine press field still dominated, about <date when="1900">1900</date>, by different marks of Wharfedales, with newspaper printers shifting from double-feeders to quadruple-feeders. However, for the larger newspapers, increasingly fast and massive rotary presses were needed. The <hi rend="i">Otago Daily Times</hi> obtained a Hoe rotary press in <date when="1894">1894</date>. <hi rend="i">The Press</hi> got one in <date when="1909">1909</date>, from R. Hoe and Co., New York (O'Neill, <date when="1963">1963</date>, p.129). In <date when="1961">1961</date>, it was claimed eight out of ten daily newspapers were using Hoe-Crabtree rotary press plants, with 50 in use throughout the country (Morrison &amp; Morrison advert, <hi rend="i">Otago Daily Times</hi> centennial supplement). There has been a subsequent shift towards web offsets. For example, on <date when="1988-06-07">7 June 1988</date>, the <hi rend="i">Manawatu Evening Standard</hi> brought into operation its recently acquired Goss Urbanite offset, issuing a supplement, <hi rend="i">Press Time '88</hi>, to celebrate the event and review its previous presses.</p>
              <p>The first offsets had arrived in the country in <date when="1913">1913</date>, offering improved capabilities for colour printing. &gt;From <date when="1923">1923</date> onward, the vertical Miehles had started coming into use, and about a decade later, the Heidelbergs. Information about the increasingly sophisticated and specialised presses and processes becoming available appeared in advertisements and articles in British, American and Australian trade journals, and, since <date when="1935">1935</date>, in local journals also, <hi rend="i">Printing Prestige, Printers' News</hi> (from <date when="1946">1946</date>), and in the more recently started journals, <hi rend="i">The New Zealand Printer</hi> and <hi rend="i">Graphix</hi>. Nowadays, just as there are many kinds of printed products, from postage stamps to flexible packaging, bewilderingly many different kinds of presses have developed for printing them.</p>
              <p>The development of composing machines began from <date when="1822">1822</date> onward with various cold-metal devices, but none seem to have reached New Zealand. The 1880s saw the development of the first hot-metal machine, the Linotype, by Ottmar Mergenthaler of Baltimore, as 'its chief (though not its only progenitor)', which became viable in quantity when conjoined with the Benton punch-cutter in <date when="1889">1889</date>, with 'large-scale series production' beginning in <date when="1890">1890</date> (Gaskell, <date when="1972">1972</date>, pp.274-76).</p>
              <p>Despite <name key="name-120205" type="person">McKay</name>'s statement (1940b, pp.107-08) that Linotypes were first brought into the country in <date when="1897">1897</date>, for the <hi rend="i">Auckland Star</hi>, the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Herald</hi>, <hi rend="i">The Press</hi>, <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name>, and the <hi rend="i">Otago Daily Times</hi>, the <hi rend="i">DNZB</hi> article on <name key="name-208585" type="person">Arthur McKee</name> states that he brought one with him when he immigrated in <date when="1890">1890</date> (he established the firm of McKee and Gamble, and as one of the three directors of the Cyclopedia Company, formed to produce the volumes of the <hi rend="i">Cyclopedia of New Zealand</hi>, 1897-1908, carried out the engraving, stereotyping and machine work for its first volume). Harding records in <hi rend="i">Typo</hi>, <date when="1890-09-27">27 September 1890</date>, a report in the Tauranga-based <hi rend="i">Bay of Plenty Times</hi> of <date when="1890-09-22">22 September 1890</date> about its bringing into use of an efficient typesetting machine, operated by a woman (<hi rend="i">Selections from Typo</hi>, p.106). Clearly there is room here for further enquiries.</p>
              <p><name key="name-018379" type="person">W.A. Glue</name>'s <hi rend="i">History of the Government Printing Office</hi> (<date when="1966">1966</date>) notes that in spite of its very heavy workload this establishment moved more cautiously, installing two Linotypes and two of the recently perfected Monotype machines in <date when="1903">1903</date>. The Monotypes proved the more suitable for its needs, and in the next year it bought more. Generally, however, <name key="name-018379" type="person">Glue</name> does not go into much explicit detail about machinery acquisitions, and recourse must be had to the archives themselves, or to annual reports in <hi rend="i">AJHR</hi> (many records were lost in the <date when="1890">1890</date> fire, but annual reports survive for the earlier decades; for some reason they were not submitted for the period 1893-1915).</p>
              <p>The New Zealand Provincial Press Ltd's <hi rend="i">The Provincial Market</hi> (c.<date when="1974">1974</date>) includes brief 'mechanical data' and the 'printing method' for each newspaper dealt with.</p>
              <p>Again, the printers' journals mentioned above provide useful sources for the introduction of computerised typesetting. Hill and Gidlow (<date when="1988">1988</date>) examine the technological changes involved, and the impact upon the workforce of the <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name> <hi rend="i">Star</hi> newspaper. The teletypesetting machine represented an intermediate stage, with operators taking in advertisements by telephone and typing them into a device that produced a punched paper ribbon. Photo-typesetting is discussed by J.<name key="name-120605" type="person">G. Gregory</name> and I.M. Calhaem in articles in <hi rend="i">An Editorial Processing Centre for New Zealand Journals</hi> (<date when="1979">1979</date>). In the 1990s, camera-ready copy can be produced by anyone with access to a computer and a good quality desktop printer; and if only a small number of copies are required, these can be photocopied, so that some of the traditional work of the commercial printer is gone. Full-colour reproduction can be done with a laser print copier.</p>
              <p>Advertisements in the journals, and in newspapers' centennial supplements, identify the main suppliers of printing hardware and other requirements, either as agents or as manufacturers. Companies such as <name key="name-200115" type="person">Alex Cowan</name> &amp; Sons, A.M. Satterthwaite &amp; Co. Ltd, Printing Inks &amp; Machinery Ltd (<name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name>), Morrison &amp; Morrison, with its major plant in <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name> (see Tait, <date when="1961">1961</date>), and T.S. Wilson &amp; Gollin Ltd, themselves merit investigation. In recent years, the ubiquitous liquidations, mergers and takeovers among companies have changed the names and owners of many participants; Morrison &amp; Morrison, as an example, has been displaced by Manders Coatings &amp; Inks, the New Zealand subsidiary of a British firm.</p>
            </div>
            <div type="section" xml:id="_div4-N10F16">
              <head>
                <hi rend="i">Graphic reproduction techniques</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The only significant general survey of graphic reproduction techniques is <name key="name-120205" type="person">McKay</name>'s 'Process-engraving' (1940c). There are occasional articles in the art history literature which deal with individual artists and touch on the technical details of reproduction, but the article by R.P. Hargreaves, 'The first New Zealand lithographs' (<date when="1982">1982</date>) is rare for focusing on the commercial application of the techniques. Bruce Sampson's <hi rend="i">Early New Zealand Botanical Art</hi> (<date when="1985">1985</date>) provides the printing historian with a useful survey which includes some description of the technical processes used for those works which were printed in New Zealand, and some information on the technicians who actually did the work. There is one separate study of an early technician. <name key="name-121219" type="person">Marcel Stanley</name>'s brief compilation on <hi rend="i"><name key="name-207730" type="person">Alfred Ernest Cousins</name></hi>, an engraver and die-sinker who prepared the dies for many of New Zealand's postage stamps in the 1890s, reproduces various relevant documents as a brochure for the <date when="1980">1980</date> New Zealand International Stamp Exhibition.</p>
              <p>There are a few articles and papers relating to the technical aspects of graphic reproduction. In <date when="1871">1871</date>, <name key="name-209537" type="person">Julius Vogel</name> reported for the Government Printing Department on 'photo-zincography', the technique of photolithography on zinc plates (<hi rend="i">Information obtained . . ., AJHR</hi> G.27, <date when="1871">1871</date>), with particular reference to its possible application to the production of maps. It gives an excellent summary of the technical details, with an estimated price list of the materials required. Five years later, a further report (<hi rend="i">Photolithographic Branch . . . Papers relating to the saving effected by the . . ., AJHR</hi> H.22, <date when="1876">1876</date>), summarised the savings which resulted from the introduction of photolithography; it also includes technical details along with the costings. By this time, photolithography was becoming a standard, although specialised, branch of printing techniques and thereafter there are few references to it, except in technical manuals.</p>
              <p>The 20th century has witnessed the introduction of increasingly sophisticated reproduction processes. <name key="name-120205" type="person">McKay</name> provides an overview up to <date when="1940">1940</date> (1940c, pp.118-126). The British publication <hi rend="i">Penrose's Pictorial Annual</hi> was a vital source of information for any serious printer about new developments. The various trade journals, and especially <hi rend="i">The New Zealand Printer</hi>, <hi rend="i">Graphix</hi> and <hi rend="i">Computype Briefs</hi>, are useful on the importation of more recent technical innovations in graphic fields.</p>
              <p>For some decades the Government Printing Office took the lead in introducing new, improved machinery and processes. Glue (<date when="1966">1966</date>) indicates that by <date when="1890">1890</date>, in addition to the composition room and pressroom, its other branches included lithographic, and photolithographic—to which was later added photo-engraving, as half-tone processes were introduced later in this decade. There were also those for stereotype and electrotype work, stamp printing, and binding, and the stationery store. Relatively few commercial companies would have been as fully integrated.</p>
              <p>In the past, the engraver, the etcher, and the lithographer, who drew designs directly upon the stone, were very much artists in their own right, as well as skilled craftspeople. From about <date when="1960">1960</date>, the development of devices such as the Klischograph for reproducing images directly as zinc or polymer blocks greatly speeded up illustration processes, by eliminating the intermediate artist. As a partial response, in the 1960s the Committee on Standards of Graphic Reproduction issued five booklets, compiled by R.H. Colson, J.A. O'Dea and W.A. O'Neill, to advocate improved 'standards' in using contemporary processes.</p>
              <p>Attention may be extended here to professional originators of graphic material: book illustrators such as <name key="name-200403" type="person">Stuart Peterson</name> and <name key="name-208280" type="person">Edith Howes</name> (see P.A. Lawlor, 'The New Zealand book illustrator', <date when="1936">1936</date>), <name key="name-207415" type="person">Leo Bensemann</name> at Caxton, <name key="name-200058" type="person">Robert Brett</name> at Caxton and Pegasus, and <name key="name-207656" type="person">Russell Clark</name>, to cartoonists such as Minhinnick and <name key="name-208499" type="person">David Low</name>, and to designers of pictorial dust-jackets, one of the roles of <name key="name-200251" type="person">Felix Kelly</name> (later, of London's Lilliput). <name key="name-200175" type="person">Rowan Gibbs</name> of Smith's Bookshop Ltd, Wellington, is establishing a valuable resource of New Zealand illustrated books, taking the view that sometimes their illustrations, dust-jackets or stamped covers are their only distinguished feature.</p>
            </div>
            <div type="section" xml:id="_div4-N10F63">
              <head>
                <hi rend="i">Paper</hi>
              </head>
              <p>The artefacts themselves are the primary source of evidence for the study of paper used by the printing industry. However, the necessary analytical methods would not, even under the most liberal conditions, provide information on the sources of supply, price, or other relevant factors. For these, secondary sources must be used.</p>
              <p>Most printing and writing papers used in New Zealand have been imported. Early experiments in making paper from flax fibre failed in commercial application because of the toughness of the fibre and the difficulty of eliminating the gum. The first commercial paper mills in New Zealand began at Woodhaugh, on the outskirts of <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name>, in <date when="1876-05">May 1876</date>, and two months later at Mataura in Southland. Both mills concentrated on making wrapping papers, using rope, rags and other recycled materials, although some rough printing papers were made at various times, particularly during World War I. The Mataura plant continued in operation, as New Zealand Paper Mills, and became a 'white' (good quality printing paper) mill after <date when="1960">1960</date>.</p>
              <p>North Island mills were established after World War II, beginning production by NZ Forest Products at Kinleith in <date when="1954">1954</date>, and at <name key="name-024787" type="place">Kawerau</name> by Tasman Pulp and Paper in <date when="1955">1955</date>. These use pulp from the pinus radiata plantations of the region, as well as imported pulp, and produce newsprint and other basic printing papers. By <date when="1985">1985</date>, <hi rend="i">Tasman 30</hi> reports, Tasman had developed a substantial export market in newsprint and kraft pulp.</p>
              <p>The costs and availability of papers have generally been critical parameters for the industry. There were major price increases during World War I, with serious shortages, and in World War II controls were imposed, removed after the war but reimposed in <date when="1945-12">December 1945</date> until worldwide supplies had recovered.</p>
              <p>Throughout its history the vast majority of printing papers used in New Zealand have been imported. While official statistics will provide raw figures for volume and value, and possibly for countries of origin, only a study of individual invoices could supply enough detail to be of use in specific cases. The records of individual firms might preserve these invoices, but few such records survive.</p>
              <p>Trade advertisements of individual wholesaling commercial stationers may provide hints. These advertisements are particularly likely to appear in trade journals, such as the Master Printers' Federation's <hi rend="i">Printers' News</hi>, or in the centennial supplements of newspapers. Large overseas suppliers such as John Dickinson and Bowaters had their own agencies, but other suppliers were represented by agents such as Gordon &amp; Gotch, or B.J. Ball. They were linked in the NZ Paper Merchants' Association.</p>
              <p>Directories can provide information about the wholesale stationers, and the <hi rend="i">Cyclopedia of New Zealand</hi> is the most comprehensive example of this type of information source; others are mentioned elsewhere (see 'Owners and firms' below).</p>
              <p>The Federation of Master Printers included a small pamphlet <hi rend="i">The Story of Paper</hi> in their information series in 1950-51, and this describes the general history of paper manufacture. <name key="name-120210" type="person">John H. Angus</name>'s <hi rend="i">Papermaking Pioneers</hi> (<date when="1976">1976</date>) includes a survey of attempts at the manufacture of paper in New Zealand, as part of the scene-setting for its full account of the New Zealand Paper Mills plant at Mataura, and it also touches on the North Island mills established after World War II. The modern wood-pulp industry is a separate area of study, with a significant international literature on the technical and economic aspects which extend well beyond the qualities related to printing. An initial study on the technical feasibility of the industry in New Zealand was made in <date when="1928">1928</date>, reported to Parliament as <hi rend="i">Pulp and paper making (report on investigations into suitability of selected New Zealand-grown woods for) (AJHR</hi> C.3A, <date when="1928">1928</date>). Subsequent developments in the New Zealand pulp and paper industry can be pursued through the technical and business literature indexed in <hi rend="i">Index to New Zealand Periodicals</hi> and <hi rend="i">Index New Zealand</hi>, and the even more specific business index and database <hi rend="i">Newzindex</hi>.</p>
              <p>The Industries Development Commission's <hi rend="i">Report no.6: Book Production Inquiry</hi> (<date when="1978">1978</date>) and <hi rend="i">Report no.7: Tariff Inquiry, Certain Paper and Paperboard of Tariff Heading 48.01</hi> (<date when="1979">1979</date>) include valuable information about the impact of tariffs on imported papers in imposing higher costs upon local printers, hence disadvantaging them in relation to overseas printing companies exporting to the New Zealand market, which were able to buy paper duty-free. Printers protested; but New Zealand paper making companies welcomed the degree of protection afforded by these tariffs.</p>
            </div>
            <div type="section" xml:id="_div4-N10FC8">
              <head>Binding</head>
              <p>The most significant source of evidence for bookbinding practices in 19th-century New Zealand are the books which survive in their original bindings. Sometimes these copies may contain the label of the binder, permitting some assessment of the skills of those firms. Techniques were imported, as were the materials and equipment, and Gaskell (<date when="1972">1972</date>) can be referred to for some basic references on the techniques available in the 19th century. The Historic Places Trust leaflets on Pompallier at Russell include an excellent account, <hi rend="i">Pompallier: l'Atelier de Reliure</hi> (1994b), of the equipment and methods used in that French-influenced workshop.</p>
              <p>The 19th-century industrial exhibitions included sections displaying bookbinding work done in New Zealand, and there is some slight commentary on these examples in the reports; the most useful of these reports is in the <hi rend="i">Official Record</hi> of the New Zealand Industrial Exhibition held in Wellington in <date when="1885">1885</date>.</p>
              <p>These sources do not distinguish between custom binding (by individual order) and edition binding. The distinction became important once New Zealand publications were issued in edition sizes greater than the 400 or 500 copies which were the maximum for most of the 19th century. Even by the late 1890s, the <hi rend="i">Cyclopedia of New Zealand</hi> and other directories normally subsumed bookbinding under the printers or manufacturing stationers by whom the binders were normally employed, and the same is true of discussions in the trade literature. Colenso (<date when="1888">1888</date>) records his work not only as a printer but as New Zealand's first binder.</p>
              <p>Case, or 'hardback', binding remains inevitably relatively labour intensive, and accordingly costly, except where wages are very low. The Industries Development Commission's <hi rend="i">Report no.6: Book Production Inquiry</hi> (<date when="1978">1978</date>) and Oliver's study (<date when="1976">1976</date>) offer statistics indicating that by <date when="1976">1976</date>/77 the ratio of 'hardbound' to 'softbound' books printed in New Zealand was roughly one to three, the reverse of the usual overseas situation.</p>
              <p>These figures, and the IDC's accompanying graphs, represented a state of decline not only for New Zealand printers of hardbacks, but also for binders, which has doubtless continued. The introduction of 'perfect binding' provided an efficient means of binding paperbacks; but Wilson &amp; Horton's reported experience in <date when="1976">1976</date> of under-utilisation of its new perfect binding machine was probably typical (see IDC report, p.25). An article by Cyril Fisher, 'Trade binders are scarce in New Zealand', in <hi rend="i">The New Zealand Printer</hi> (<date when="1984-10">October 1984</date>, p.32) states that most printing firms were doing their own binding, and the only trade binder currently in Wellington was Express Trade Binders, founded in <date when="1958">1958</date>. A subsequent article, 'Service must be no.1' (<date when="1987-02">February 1987</date>, pp.42-43) deals with the <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name> bookbinding and book-finishing firm S.I. McHarg Ltd.</p>
              <p>While conditions have remained difficult for edition binding, a number of small firms and individuals continue with custom binding, working for private customers and for libraries. <name key="name-200519" type="person">Bill Tito</name> in Akatarawa, a repair binder, has been the subject of a Radio New Zealand Spectrum documentary (National Radio, <date when="1996-12-29">29 December 1996</date>) as well as being profiled in local newspapers. Wills Bookbinding and Printing in <name key="name-021386" type="place">Palmerston North</name>, like other similar firms in university cities, is kept quite busy in certain months with graduate students' theses, as well as the regular binding of serials for local libraries. Fine and designer binding is a specialist area which is only now being studied in New Zealand, in association with work on artists' books. <name key="name-200301" type="person">Edgar Mansfield</name> is the most distinguished New Zealand exponent of this art, but Margery Blackman has studied the <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> binder <name key="name-200245" type="person">Eleanor Joachim</name> (active 1904-14) and others will undoubtedly be identified as research continues. <name key="name-120369" type="person">Beth Carrick</name>'s <hi rend="i">New Zealand Guide to Art and Craft</hi> (<date when="1996">1996</date>) includes a list of craft bookbinders.</p>
            </div>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N11007">
            <head>Stationery manufacture and supply</head>
            <p>The earliest representatives of the 'booktrade' were stationers, and the conjunction of the sale of writing materials and commercial office appliances with the sale of books has always been common in New Zealand. In the 19th century it was only in the largest towns of England that the sale of books had been separated from that of stationery, and, in New Zealand, many of the larger printing firms in the larger towns sold books and were engaged in the manufacture of some forms of commercial stationery such as account books. Nevertheless, even in the largest manufacturing stationers a high proportion of the stationery for sale had been imported.</p>
            <p>The 19th-century industrial exhibitions, most notably the <date when="1885">1885</date> New Zealand Industrial Exhibition in Wellington, included displays of commercial stationery (which included copying presses, pens, ink and rubber stamps), and the <hi rend="i">Official Record</hi> of that exhibition comments on significant contributions. The evidence to the <date when="1895">1895</date> <name key="name-200508" type="organisation">Tariff Commission</name> (<hi rend="i">AJHR</hi> H.2, <date when="1895">1895</date>) makes it plain how significant the impact of imported materials and finished goods were on the manufacturing trade.</p>
            <p>H.J. Tubbs contributed a brief survey of the firms, 'Stationery manufacturing', to <name key="name-120205" type="person">McKay</name> (<date when="1940">1940</date>). Apart from this, the history of the trade must, as so often, be followed through the trade journals and occasional advertising supplements in newspapers, even though, in many respects, the stationery and printing industries have now converged in the computer industry.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div type="section" xml:id="_div2-N11029">
          <head>The trade</head>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N11035">
            <head>Men and women of the trade</head>
            <p>The initial task of identifying who was engaged in the trade in any given locality must be pursued through general sources. Jury lists, electoral rolls and directories are standard tools in family history and these can, sometimes painfully, be scanned for those with the relevant occupations. Directories are among the most useful sources for those in business (as distinct from employees) and there is an excellent bibliography by Hansen, <hi rend="i">The Directory Directory</hi> (<date when="1994">1994</date>), which indicates the categories of information supplied in each title, as well as library holdings. The six-volume <hi rend="i">Cyclopedia of New Zealand</hi> (<date from="1897" to="1908">1897-1908</date>) contains articles, locality by locality, on the businesses and prominent residents, and newspapers and printing firms are well covered in the set. All identifiable entries were extracted and reproduced separately, in alphabetical order, as <hi rend="i">Printing, Bookselling and their Allied Trades in New Zealand c.<date when="1900">1900</date></hi>, in <date when="1980">1980</date>, and this will be a convenient starting point for many searches.</p>
            <p>Once individuals have been identified the pursuit of this specific biography will take the researcher into the area of family history, particularly for those who did not have prominent public careers. Family history is an area which receives much attention from libraries and archives, and there are a number of research guides: the most comprehensive is <name key="name-120323" type="person">Anne Bromell</name>'s <hi rend="i">Tracing Family History in New Zealand</hi> (rev. ed. <date when="1996">1996</date>). Many families have had a formal family history prepared, which may provide the desired information on the printer member. However, family historians seldom have an active understanding of the character of the occupations of family members and either ignore them, or get significant details wrong. This is unfortunate, because such histories are often the only extensive account of an individual's life. An otherwise useful example is <name key="name-121294" type="person">Melva G. Vincent</name>'s <hi rend="i">The Vincent Printers</hi> (<date when="1980">1980</date>) which compresses two substantial typescript accounts of William E. Vincent, an early Wellington printer, and his descendants in New England, <name key="name-110004" type="place">New South Wales</name>. Although accurate on most technical details (such as makes of printing presses), there are substantive errors in, for example, the account of <name key="name-209534" type="person">William Vincent</name>'s London apprenticeship. In contrast, however, the modest account by <name key="name-121142" type="person">Struan Robertson</name>, <hi rend="i">The Life and Times of <name key="name-121129" type="person">Samuel Revans</name></hi> (<date when="1989">1989</date>), is reliable at all points where it has been tested, and the collective account prepared by <name key="name-120603" type="person">Edgar Gregory</name> and <name key="name-120604" type="person">Nevill Wilson</name>, <hi rend="i">Gregorys-Camerons, Printers to Dunedin</hi>, of two connected families is enlightening in its coverage of printing history as well as the family links.</p>
            <p>Some other early printers have been the subject of formal biographies. The most substantial of these is the biography <hi rend="i"><name key="name-207684" type="person">William Colenso</name></hi>, by A.G. Bagnall and G.C. Petersen (<date when="1948">1948</date>). Colenso's career was so varied, and the time of his active involvement in printing is so well-documented in his own account (<date when="1888">1888</date>) that it is not remarkable that almost no new significant detail is added, except as already reported by Hill (<date when="1901">1901</date>). For the historian of printing this is disappointing, but the whole work is rightly regarded as an excellent biography.</p>
            <p><name key="name-120747" type="person">Peter Kennett</name>'s <hi rend="i">Unsung Hero</hi> (<date when="1991">1991</date>) on <name key="name-209029" type="person">Barzillai Quaife</name>, first newspaper editor in the Bay of Islands, is a work of considerable interest, dealing primarily with Quaife's political struggles. It draws usefully upon Quaife's own, quite rare, publication <hi rend="i">The Vindicator</hi> (<date when="1865">1865</date>) which records his problems, both technical and political, in some detail.</p>
            <p>Other biographies of political figures who came from a background in the printing industry have usually treated their early careers very superficially, if at all. Some attention may be paid to the journalism, and possibly to the economic aspects of their newspaper involvement, but even this will normally
                     <figure xml:id="GriBo071"><graphic url="GriBo071.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="GriBo071-g"/><head>A carving, possibly in plaster, made especially for the <date when="1906">1906</date> Christmas issue of the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Graphic and Ladies Journal</hi> and signed J. E. Ward (photographer unknown). It was reproduced as a full-page (tabloid size) half-tone photograph with the caption 'With Maoriland's best wishes for Christmas and the coming year', as the first page of the 38-page pictorial section. While Christmas issues were largely pictorial, the regular issues of up to 64 pages were mainly text and advertisements, catering for the whole family, including children's pages. (Auckland Star Collection, Alexander Turnbull Library, Wellington, NZ, reference number F-3160-1/1-)</head><figDesc>Black and white photograph
                        </figDesc></figure>be subordinated to the political career. The recent political biography of <name key="name-207328" type="person">John Ballance</name> by T. McIvor, <hi rend="i">The Rainmaker</hi> (<date when="1989">1989</date>), is a welcome exception which even incorporates some paragraphs on the technical side of newspaper management.</p>
            <p>Those printers, newspaper proprietors, and similar figures, who were elected to the House of Representatives or appointed to the Legislative Council at any stage in their careers, will have received a parliamentary tribute after their deaths. Some of these tributes are very brief, such as that for <name key="name-208324" type="person">Joseph Ivess</name>, in the <hi rend="i">Parliamentary Debates</hi> on <date when="1919-09-11">11 September 1919</date> (vol.184, pp.428-29), but others could be quite lengthy, with contributions by members other than party leaders, such as that for <name key="name-209090" type="person">John Rigg</name> on <date when="1944-02-23">23 February 1944</date> (vol.264, pp.9-11 in the Legislative Council, and pp.19-22 in the House of Representatives). Tributes can be located by means of the Sessional Indexes to the <hi rend="i">Debates</hi>, under the name of the deceased member.</p>
            <p>Summary biographical information for some members of the trade can be found in standard biographical sources such as <hi rend="i">Who's Who in New Zealand</hi> (1st ed. <date when="1908">1908</date>, 12th (most recent) ed. <date when="1991">1991</date>) and the <hi rend="i">Dictionary of New Zealand Biography</hi> (<date when="1990">1990</date>- ). The biographical database on individuals nominated for the <hi rend="i">Dictionary</hi> is preserved in the office of the Dictionary secretariat, in the Department of Internal Affairs, whether or not the individuals are included in the published volumes. The database is available for consultation by researchers on application to the office. A larger representation of the Otago trade will be covered in <hi rend="i">Southern People</hi>, to be published by Dunedin City Council in <date when="1998">1998</date>. The earlier <hi rend="i">Dictionary of New Zealand Biography</hi> compiled by Guy Scholefield in <date when="1940">1940</date> includes a number of individuals not covered in the more recent work but the standard of the essays is very variable and many entries are very brief.</p>
            <p>Short articles on individuals may appear in many locations. <name key="name-120205" type="person">McKay</name> (<date when="1940">1940</date>) includes 'Men of the industry', with brief biographical notes on a range of men, and the various trade journals have always printed obituary notices. Coleridge has published an essay, '<name key="name-200079" type="person">Edward Catchpool</name>', in <hi rend="i">An Index of Civilisation</hi> (<date when="1993">1993</date>), on the printer and publisher of Wellington's short-lived newspaper <hi rend="i">The New Zealand Colonist</hi>, and Harvey has published on <name key="name-208324" type="person">Joseph Ivess</name> in the <hi rend="i">Turnbull Library Record</hi> (<date when="1988">1988</date>). Two printing-related essays in family history deal with J.H. Claridge, appearing in <hi rend="i">Historical Journal Auckland-Waikato</hi> (<date when="1975-04">April 1975</date>) by J.C. Claridge, and by <name key="name-120735" type="person">Stella Jones</name> in <hi rend="i">Auckland-Waikato Historical Journal</hi> (<date when="1980-04">April 1980</date>). These are most useful. <name key="name-200170" type="person">Frank Fyfe</name> of Greytown included material on Sam Revans (<hi rend="i">Revans: Father of the Press</hi>, with <name key="name-120563" type="person">Adam Fyfe</name>, and <hi rend="i">Gullible Sam</hi>, together with two collections of Revans's letters, <hi rend="i">Letters from Woodside</hi>, and <hi rend="i">Letters from Huangarua</hi>) and on <name key="name-200549" type="person">Richard Wakelin</name> (<hi rend="i">Wakelin: Father of Journalism</hi>) in the series of booklets on Wairarapa history that he published from Wakelin House and <name key="name-200063" type="organisation">Broadoak Press</name>. These all need to be checked for factual accuracy.</p>
            <p>Other biographical material must be sought through such sources as newspaper obituaries, and the occasional local history. The newspaper trade has always followed the custom of writing up their own people, and every newspaper centennial issue will include an article on the founders, on some of the editorial staff, and sometimes also on the printers. <hi rend="i">The Greymouth Evening Star: Centennial Supplement</hi> (<date when="1966">1966</date>) is a good example of this. Journalists' memoirs may occasionally discuss printers as well as journalists; most of Lawlor's accounts of journalists have no references to printers, but his <hi rend="i">Pat Lawlor's Wellington</hi> (<date when="1976">1976</date>) does include a chapter 'The Blundell Brothers'.</p>
            <p>In-house journals such as Coulls Somerville Wilkie's <hi rend="i">Invicta News</hi>, or the Government Printing Office's <hi rend="i">Print</hi> (1949-50), provide some information about printing employees. So also do trade union publications, such as <hi rend="i">Imprint</hi>, and those for special anniversaries. Trade journals such as <hi rend="i">Printing Prestige</hi> and <hi rend="i">Printers' News</hi> sometimes include short articles about notable people who have retired or died. For the Government Printing Office, the volume presented to <name key="name-120899" type="person">Marcus Marks</name> on his retirement in <date when="1922">1922</date> includes the signatures of all its employees at that time, in their respective departments.</p>
            <p>Where names are known, there are volumes of newspaper clippings, 'New Zealand Biographies,' and 'New Zealand Obituaries', in the Alexander Turnbull Library, recently made more widely available in a microfiche edition. In the Canterbury Museum, <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name>, there is the George Randall McDonald Biographical Dictionary.</p>
            <p>Printing trades workers went overseas in the armed forces in both world wars, and those who died often received obituaries. Some of them wrote and printed newsletters, miscellanies, and official items, both on troopships and in the countries they were based in. A.B. Clark and J.C. Andersen's article in <name key="name-120205" type="person">McKay</name> (<date when="1940">1940</date>) on the troopship publications in World War I is noticed above. For World War II, information about the producers of publications in the 2NZEF in North Africa and Italy, such as <hi rend="i">Kiwi News</hi>, and in the 3rd Division in the <name key="name-008892" type="place">Pacific</name>, can be sought in official war histories, and in autobiographies and biographies.</p>
            <p>Finally, printers who did not become journalists have occasionally prepared their memoirs. J.H. Claridge prepared and printed two collections of anecdotes, <hi rend="i">Odd Notes</hi> (<date when="1928">1928</date>) and <hi rend="i">75 Years in New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1938">1938</date>?) which include some personal experiences. <name key="name-120899" type="person">Marcus Marks</name>, the New Zealand Government Printer from 1916 to 1922, published <hi rend="i">Memories (Mainly Merry)</hi> in <date when="1934">1934</date>. This contains almost no technical information on his working career but has interesting anecdotes of his life as an apprentice and as a journeyman. The family of the Wellington printer <name key="name-121309" type="person">Lemuel Watkins</name> published privately in <date when="1992">1992</date> his <hi rend="i">Mellowed Memories</hi> which describes his career as a printer in considerable, sometimes technical, detail. As a source for printing history rather than biographical detail it is the best work discussed here.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N11144">
            <head>Owners and firms</head>
            <p>One can usefully divide printing enterprises into categories. First there was the Government Printing Office, now GP Print, absorbed within the <name key="name-200565" type="organisation">Whitcoulls Group</name>, and owned by US Office Products, but for over a century a producer of every kind of official publication.</p>
            <p>There are the institutional presses, such as at the universities, several of which have their own printing plants; for example, the Otago University printery, and Massey University's printery, which provides study materials for over 600 extramural courses.</p>
            <p>The commercial printing firms, large and small, can be subdivided into those mainly concerned with producing newspapers, and those devoted to general and jobbing printing. None of them have been exclusively committed to book printing. Some have been specialist enterprises devoted to lithography, photo-engraving, etc., and nowadays to colour graphics.</p>
            <p>There has been, since the 1930s, a distinct group of small to medium sized 'literary' presses, such as Caxton, Pegasus and Griffin, operating commercially but for much of their lives committed to literary publications and periodicals. Printeries 'with a cause' have included religion-based enterprises such as the printing establishment of the <name key="name-200180" type="organisation">Gospel Publishing House</name>, <name key="name-021386" type="place">Palmerston North</name>. Finally there is an array of private presses and hobby printers, although some of these seek at least to break even, as with the <name key="name-200225" type="organisation">Holloway Press</name>, at Auckland University's Tamaki campus.</p>
            <p>The printing industry has always been so structured that it is fairly easy for an individual to move from employee to owner and back again. At certain times the capital outlay necessary to establish even a small printing firm has been substantial relative to the worker's opportunities to accumulate capital, but technical innovations have also meant that second hand equipment would be readily available at a reasonable price. Because many firms are very small, with only two or three employees, there is also likely to be a great deal of uniformity of outlook between the owners and the workers on many issues.</p>
            <p>There have been few histories of firms apart from newspapers, which have always marked their own jubilees or centennials with special supplements. The <hi rend="i">Jubilee Souvenir 1860-1910</hi> of H.I. Jones &amp; Son of <name key="name-008123" type="place">Wanganui</name> is a rare example of an historical booklet produced by a firm which did not publish a newspaper. Glue (<date when="1966">1966</date>) is the only substantial institutional history apart, again, from the newspapers.</p>
            <p>Directories supply the readiest means of identifying printing firms, particularly those with a separate classified trade section. These may not list all printers in any particular town, as small firms are particularly vulnerable to being overlooked by canvassers or to collapsing before they can be recorded. The newspaper and printer registrations at the High Court (formerly the Supreme Court) should in theory provide a more complete coverage, with the registrations under the Printers and Newspapers Registration Act <date when="1868">1868</date> requiring information on the number of presses owned, as well as the names and addresses of the printers. The <date when="1868">1868</date> Act has now been replaced by the Newspapers and Printers Act <date when="1955">1955</date> which does not require the registration of printing presses, only the ownership of newspapers. Since <date when="1979">1979</date>, changes in ownership of the larger firms, and other developments, can be traced through the business index <hi rend="i">Newzindex</hi>, which is available online as well as in paper.</p>
            <p>The Master Printers' Federation has published its own journal, <hi rend="i">Printing Prestige</hi>, from 1935 to 1951, followed by <hi rend="i">Printers' News</hi>, since <date when="1953">1953</date>, when it was taken over from the Auckland Master Printers' Association which founded it in <date when="1943">1943</date>. These will be the basic source of information for the history of the Federation; a special issue in <date when="1957">1957</date> provided a history of the Federation. Clarkson and Berry contributed a brief survey to <name key="name-120205" type="person">McKay</name> (<date when="1940">1940</date>), and in <date when="1989">1989</date> A.E.J. Arts published <hi rend="i">History of the Canterbury Master Printers</hi>, the only substantial regional history. The federal body has now become the Printing Industries Association of New Zealand; as is usual with trade organisations, the records of the individual branches normally remain with the surviving bodies.</p>
            <p><name key="name-120462" type="person">Patrick Day</name>'s <hi rend="i">The Making of the New Zealand Press</hi> (<date when="1990">1990</date>) contains potted biographies of men associated with running newspapers in the early period, some of them printers.</p>
            <p>For the earlier period, for provincial firms, often their own printed letterheads for invoices provide details of changing proprietors, and of services offered. More recently, for firms, there are simply the relevant sections in commercial portions of telephone books, which may include display entries showing the various services provided.</p>
            <p><name key="name-200175" type="person">Rowan Gibbs</name>, Smith's Bookshop Ltd, has compiled two looseleaf manuscript indexes of pre-<date when="1890">1890</date> printers from imprints of books in Volume 1 of Bagnall's <hi rend="i">National Bibliography</hi> by name and by place.</p>
            <p>Some firms such as Coulls Somerville Wilkie are relatively well-documented, with records in the Hocken Library, its history in <hi rend="i">Invicta News</hi> (and in a more extended form in typescript in the Hocken Library), and a profile in Tait (<date when="1961">1961</date>). Whitcombe &amp; Tombs produced a prospectus on the merger of the two firms, first as Printing and Packaging Corporation, then as Whitcoulls.</p>
            <p><name key="name-208049" type="person">Denis Glover</name>'s <hi rend="i">Hot Water Sailor</hi> (<date when="1962">1962</date>) has an entertaining account of his launching of the Caxton Press, with John Drew and others. <name key="name-120795" type="person">Peter Low</name>'s <hi rend="i">Printing by the Avon</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>) recounts the history of this small, high quality printing and publishing firm. <name key="name-200179" type="person">Robert Gormack</name>'s <hi rend="i">The Nag's Head Press</hi> (<date when="1992">1992</date>) deals with his own small semi-commercial press, including a list of publications.</p>
            <p>Such business information resources as <hi rend="i">Datex</hi> investment service, the <hi rend="i">NZ Company Register</hi>, and the Nielsen <hi rend="i">Media Directory</hi> disclose the massive extent to which most of the more substantial New Zealand printing, newspaper, publishing, bookselling and paper making companies have recently been taken over by overseas corporations: the <name key="name-200565" type="organisation">Whitcoulls Group</name> (including what had been the Government Printing Office, GP Print Ltd), by US Office Products (Blue Star), <name key="name-200239" type="organisation">Independent Newspapers Ltd</name> by Rupert Murdoch's <name key="name-200362" type="organisation">News Corporation Ltd</name>, Wilson &amp; Horton by Dr Tony O'Reilly's Dublin-based Independent News; and so it goes on. <hi rend="i">Datex</hi> especially provides much information about the makeup and recent history of the larger New Zealand companies.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N111C7">
            <head>Trade unions and trade conditions</head>
            <p>The primary sources for information about conditions within the trade can be found in the records of the trade unions, on the one hand, and of the <name key="name-024793" type="organisation">Labour Department</name> on the other.</p>
            <p>Although a number of specialised unions for occupations such as the letterpress machinists, bookbinders, lithographers, and paper-cutters were in existence at different times, with varying combinations in different regions, these nearly all came into existence after the Industrial Conciliation and Arbitration Act <date when="1894">1894</date>, and all were preceded by the various Typographical Associations which began with the Wellington Typographical Association in <date when="1862">1862</date> and were gradually combined into the New Zealand Printing and Related Trades Union. In <date when="1995">1995</date>, this combined with the New Zealand Journalists and Graphic Process Union to form the New Zealand Printing, Packaging and Media Union which has now become a division of the New Zealand Engineers' Union (since <date when="1996">1996</date>). The combined records of the successive unions have been deposited in the Victoria University of Wellington Library Labour Archives collection. The records of the <name key="name-200380" type="organisation">Otago Typographical Association</name>, and the Otago Branch of the Printing Union, are divided between the Dunedin Public Library and the Hocken Library of Otago University. Peter Franks is writing a history of the printing unions. <name key="name-121092" type="person">Vivienne Porzsolt</name>'s typescript study, 'New Zealand printing unions in the 1920s and 1930s' (<date when="1982">1982</date>) is in the <name key="name-000507" type="organisation">Turnbull Library</name>'s manuscript section.</p>
            <p>Baxter contributed a brief historical survey to <name key="name-120205" type="person">McKay</name> (<date when="1940">1940</date>), and there are two centennial histories of individual branches. P.J. Stewart published <hi rend="i">Type of a Century</hi> in <date when="1974">1974</date>, recounting the history of printing in <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> and Otago from the workman's point of view, with a more systematic account of the <name key="name-200380" type="organisation">Otago Typographical Association</name> and its successors from <date when="1873">1873</date>. The Wellington Branch of the New Zealand Printing and Related Trades Union published <hi rend="i">Centenary <date from="1862" to="1962">1862-1962</date></hi> in <date when="1962">1962</date>, drawing upon the Wellington Typographical Union's <hi rend="i">Jubilee Souvenir <date from="1862" to="1912">1862-1912</date></hi> for the earliest years. The <hi rend="i">Jubilee Souvenir</hi> seems to have drawn heavily on oral histories, but it also made use of such union records as existed.</p>
            <p>Separate publications of the various unions, such as rulebooks and annual reports, made be found as individual items in library collections. The union records contain most of these publications, although many of the small local unions left no significant records.</p>
            <p>Complementing the union records are those of the Department of Labour. Such records as survive are held in the National Archives, although a substantial amount of the material of interest is in the files damaged in the Hope Gibbons Building fire of <date when="1952">1952</date>. The files which may be relevant are those dealing with the Factories Act (L/NA/1), the Industrial Conciliation and Arbitration Act (L/NA/3), and Apprenticeship and Awards (L/NA/4). The annual reports of the Department, from its first in <date when="1893">1893</date> (<hi rend="i">AJHR</hi> H.10, <date when="1893">1893</date>) publish statistical material on wage rates and employment levels, and occasionally include some brief information on conditions and accidents.</p>
            <p>A much more substantial source of information on conditions in the trade would be in the arguments presented to the Arbitration Court during award applications. The awards themselves, printed in the 'Book of Awards', correctly <hi rend="i">Awards, Recommendations, Agreements etc.</hi> (<date when="1894">1894</date>/<date from="1900" to="1936">1900-1936</date>), and succeeding titles, do not always give information on specific points relating to conditions. When the award defines what is and what is not covered it often specifies particular aspects of the work; however much of the necessary detail will have been presented in evidence, spelled out by the union in its application and refuted by the employers as they can. It will sometimes be recorded in newspaper reports, but must usually be sought in the records of the Court (not always preserved), or more fruitfully, in the records of the union or of the employers. In the case of the first major claim before the Court in <date when="1912">1912</date>, the unions (a recently federated association) printed their full argument, the New Zealand Federated Typographical Association's <hi rend="i">Dominion Award Dispute</hi>, giving considerable detail on the impact of the new typesetting technology. In <date when="1922">1922</date> they published the <hi rend="i">Case for Typographers</hi>, in another significant dispute, with an analysis of the employers' figures and arguments. These are the exception. The union journal <hi rend="i">Imprint</hi> (beginning in <date when="1923-10">October 1923</date>) regularly published summaries of the union case before the Court, and the Wellington Branch's short-lived <hi rend="i">Printers' Mallet</hi> (1966-68), likewise reported current developments in industrial relations. The new union journal, <hi rend="i">The Printed Word</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>- ), follows this tradition.</p>
            <p>Modern occupational illnesses differ from those of the past: in place of lead poisoning, burns from lead squirts or acid splashes, and respiratory troubles from acid vapours for photo-engravers, <hi rend="i">Imprint</hi> was concerned with occupational overuse syndrome (OOS) for photo-typesetters, including effects on eyes and brains of overexposure to visual display terminals (vol.33 no.2 (<date when="1981-03">March 1981</date>) p.7), and <hi rend="i">The Printed Word</hi> (vol.1 no.<date when="1996-06-07">7, June 1996</date>, p.10) has an article 'Solvent-induced neurotoxicity—the new asbestos?' about neurological poisoning from toxic chemicals in processing machinery, especially when used within inadequately ventilated premises. For OOS, a more general example of many is an article by Christine Robertson in the <hi rend="i">Evening Standard</hi>, <name key="name-021386" type="place">Palmerston North</name>, <date when="1997-01-20">20 January 1997</date> (p.5), which deals with the suffering it causes, and the employers' obligations under the Health and Safety in Employment Act <date when="1992">1992</date>.</p>
            <p>For the period before the formal sources existed we must rely on informal accounts. The evidence given to the <name key="name-200505" type="organisation">Sweating Commission</name> of 1889-90 (<hi rend="i">AJHR</hi> H.5, <date when="1890">1890</date>) contains some extremely useful reports of the actual conditions experienced by men and women in some establishments, with some information also from management (notably <name key="name-200564" type="person">George Whitcombe</name> of Whitcombe &amp; Tombs). <hi rend="i">The Pope, the Prelate and the Printer</hi> (<date when="1892">1892</date>) reports in detail the trial when <name key="name-120528" type="person">Joseph Evison</name>, manager of the <hi rend="i">Catholic Times</hi>, sued officials of the <name key="name-200561" type="organisation">Wellington Typographical Society</name> for libel for describing his management practices as 'sweating'; the resulting pamphlet gives much useful detail about the trade conditions of the time.</p>
            <p>For the earlier years a few sources, chiefly with anecdotes, are available. In <date when="1886">1886</date> the publishers of the <hi rend="i">Otago Daily Times</hi> issued a collection of 'newspaper reports and correspondence' on the 'strike of compositors' very recently concluded. There are few disputes in the newspaper trade which have been as clearly and impartially documented. Harvey's 'Editors and compositors: contemporary accounts of the nineteenth century New Zealand press' (<date when="1990">1990</date>) surveys some of the documentary sources which provide information. Through the <name key="name-200147" type="organisation">Elibank Press</name>, Harvey has also published <hi rend="i">Trials of the Colonial Printer</hi> (<date when="1985">1985</date>) which brings together anecdotes to illustrate the conditions under which the printers worked. <name key="name-120205" type="person">McKay</name>'s 'Tales of the trade' (1940d) also brings together a collection of anecdotes gathered by interviews (<name key="name-120205" type="person">McKay</name>'s extensive collection of unpublished materials was destroyed by fire in the late 1950s).</p>
            <p>The <date when="1885">1885</date> <hi rend="i">Government Printing Committee Report</hi> (<hi rend="i">AJHR</hi> I.5, <date when="1885">1885</date>) includes a detailed commentary on the conditions in the Government Printing Office, as well as comments on the work-flow and the possible benefits of contracting work out. This is the only analysis of conditions in any printing establishment to give such detail.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div type="section" xml:id="_div2-N1125D">
          <head>Economics</head>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div2-N1125D-1">
            <p>There is one recent survey of the economics of the New Zealand printing industry, prepared by Oliver for the New Zealand Institute of Economic Research in <date when="1976">1976</date>. W.B. Sutch contributed an 'Economic survey' to <name key="name-120205" type="person">McKay</name> (<date when="1940">1940</date>).</p>
            <p>The article 'The printing and publishing industry of the Dominion: an analysis', in <hi rend="i">Printing Prestige</hi> (vol.<date when="1935-10-01">1, Oct. 1935</date>, pp.7-13) was a serious attempt to explore master printers' costs at the end of the Depression, to persuade them to charge high enough to cover their true costs, and not to undercut each other, either by intention or simply by poor cost-finding. Several articles in <hi rend="i">Printing Prestige</hi>, and subsequent Federation of Master Printers publications (1954-62) were devoted to improving printers' cost finding, as was J.B. Hindin's <hi rend="i">Simplified Cost Accounting Procedures for the Printing Trade</hi> (<date when="1958">1958</date>).</p>
            <p><name key="name-120807" type="person">Dennis McEldowney</name>'s chapter 'Publishing, patronage, literary magazines' in the <hi rend="i">Oxford History of New Zealand Literature in English</hi> (<date when="1991">1991</date>) covers the economics of production, and the sources for its study, as part of its discussion of publishing. Before these there are occasional documents with valuable though often scrappy information and there are some modern studies which seek to bring together and analyse the available information.</p>
            <p>The theses, now published, of <name key="name-121159" type="person">Rachel Salmond</name> (<hi rend="i">Government Printing in New Zealand, 1840 to 1843</hi>, published <date when="1995">1995</date>) and Kwasitsu (<date when="1996">1996</date>) provide some costings and similar information. Kwasitsu published 'An estimate of Charles Elliott's revenue from the Nelson Examiner' in <date when="1985">1985</date>, using the data from his thesis. Cave in 'Advertising, circulation and profitability' (<date when="1990">1990</date>), tries to bring together information from studies of newspaper advertising and the available material on newspaper circulation. Harvey in 'Formula for success' in <hi rend="i">An Index of Civilisation</hi> (1993b) surveys the sources of data on the financial success of 19th-century newspapers, and in a separate but companion article, 'Economic aspects of 19th-century New Zealand newspapers' (1993a), presents most of the available data in tabulated form.</p>
            <p>The data used in these articles is largely drawn from the newspapers themselves, and various manuscript sources specific to individual newspapers. Examples are the letters of Sam Revans to H.S. Chapman, and of Chapman to his father in London, as background to the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Gazette and Wellington Spectator</hi>, and the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Colonist</hi> Trustees' Minutes, all in the Turnbull Library Manuscripts section. The <hi rend="i">Colonist</hi> Trustees' Minutes were also used by Coleridge in a discussion of the <hi rend="i">Colonist</hi> in her paper '<name key="name-200079" type="person">Edward Catchpool</name>' (<date when="1993">1993</date>), together with Catchpool's own ledger, also in the <name key="name-000507" type="organisation">Turnbull Library</name>.</p>
            <p>Coleridge has also published a substantial statistical study of the advertising in Wellington newspapers to <date when="1859">1859</date>, <hi rend="i">Building a Paper Economy</hi> (<date when="1991">1991</date>), with a more discursive and theoretical discussion of the same data in 'Newspaper advertising in a pioneer colony' (<date when="1995">1995</date>), and a shorter study, 'Booktrade advertisements in Wellington newspapers 1840-1859' (<date when="1994">1994</date>) on a special aspect of this material.</p>
            <p>Some newspaper histories devote some space to the economics of the industry, although it is usually in the form of generalisations. An interesting exception is the <name key="name-021386" type="place">Palmerston North</name> <hi rend="i">Centennial Issue Evening Standard</hi> (<date when="1980">1980</date>) which includes a detailed analysis of the costings made at the time of one transfer of ownership. Similar documents may exist in the records of individual companies, more particularly of the conglomerates such as <name key="name-200239" type="organisation">Independent Newspapers Ltd</name>, but have not been made public. Correspondingly the survival of the <date when="1924-07">July 1924</date> <hi rend="i">Dominion Tariff no.5</hi>, issued by the New Zealand Master Printers' Association (to update an original of <date when="1920">1920</date>) is an invaluable document, providing job-by-job prices itemised in precise detail.</p>
            <p>The best source for figures of actual costs involved in purchases of equipment and materials, and outlay on labour costs are in the reports on government printing. The initial costs, in the 1840s, are itemised in official documents printed in Salmond's thesis (cited above). A portion of these, with inventories and costings, were printed as part of the <hi rend="i">Copies or extracts of any correspondence relative to the New Zealand estimates</hi> in the (Great Britain) <hi rend="i">House of Commons Sessional Papers</hi> (<date when="1843">1843</date>, no.134, pp.55-59).</p>
            <p>The next important group of documents appear in the New Zealand Parliamentary papers, beginning in <date when="1858">1858</date> with the 'Report of the Printing Committee' (<hi rend="i">AJHR</hi> F.3, <date when="1858">1858</date>), with detailed costings and estimates of the printing costs. At the time, the recommendation was that an office need not be established. In <date when="1862">1862</date> the 'Report of the Board of Enquiry' (<hi rend="i">AJHR</hi> D.7, <date when="1862">1862</date>) recommended that a Printing Office should be established, and analysed the factors to be considered although it gives few detailed figures. The first <hi rend="i">Report</hi> of the Government Printing Department appeared in <date when="1868">1868</date> (<hi rend="i">AJHR</hi> D.11, <date when="1868">1868</date>) and gave useful information on the technical developments and problems, but also figures on printing volumes, expenditure on materials, wages, and so forth, which provide a regular series of figures throughout the history of the Printing Office (the 'shoulder number' has varied over the years). The <date when="1885">1885</date> <hi rend="i">Government Printing Committee Report</hi> (<hi rend="i">AJHR</hi> I.5, <date when="1885">1885</date>) includes, in the minutes of evidence, an analysis of the reasons why printing
                  <figure xml:id="GriBo080"><graphic url="GriBo080.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="GriBo080-g"/><head>Staff at the <hi rend="i">Northlander</hi> newspaper office ca.<date when="1925">1925</date>, with Colonel <name key="name-207393" type="person">Allen Bell</name> identified on the right. Photograph taken by Arthur Northwood. The <hi rend="i">Northlander</hi> was a weekly paper established by Bell, possibly to support his (successful) election campaign, and published in Kaitaia from 13 March 1922 to 21 July 1933. An essay on the interesting Colonel Bell, termed 'farmer, soldier, land agent, newspaper editor, politician' appears in Volume 3 of the <hi rend="i">Dictionary of New Zealand Biography</hi>.(Northwood Collection, Alexander Turnbull Library, Wellington, NZ, reference number G-6332-1/1-)</head><figDesc>Black and white photograph
                     </figDesc></figure>by outside contracts would be more expensive.</p>
            <p>The economic position of the industry as a whole was among the topics addressed by the <name key="name-200508" type="organisation">Tariff Commission</name> of <date when="1895">1895</date>. The <hi rend="i">Tariff Commission Report</hi> and minutes of evidence (<hi rend="i">AJHR</hi> H.2, <date when="1895">1895</date>) includes some very useful detail on what was imported (such as matrices of advertising matter, printing blocks and printed sheets of letterheads and invoices) and its relationship with the manufacturing capabilities of the New Zealand industry. The evidence is almost entirely general in form, not including figures of costs and volumes, but does provide some very useful documentation of the industry's problems. The later Commissions, in 1927 and 1934, also received evidence on the impact of preferential tariffs on the industry, but no evidence was printed in the reports.</p>
            <p>In the 19th century the <hi rend="i">AJHR</hi> periodically printed various government returns with statistical or financial data. One such relevant for printing history is the <hi rend="i">Return Showing Amounts Paid to Newspapers for Advertising and Printing</hi>, the earliest of which appears in <date when="1872">1872</date> (<hi rend="i">AJHR</hi> G.22, <date when="1872">1872</date>). Equivalent reports in later years might appear with different titles and different shoulder numbers. The individual Provincial Councils (1853-75) might from time to time ask for similar returns, which would be printed in the relevant Provincial Council proceedings.</p>
            <p>The Industries Development Commission Inquiry in <date when="1976">1976</date> involved substantial efforts by different sectors of the book production industry to make clear the difficulties they were being subjected to by current conditions, and to appeal for shifts in government policy settings, or for subsidies comparable to those currently being paid by the Australian Government to its own book-printers. The submissions, reprinted in the report (<date when="1978">1978</date>), contain much of value. The actual result of the inquiry was, however, as <name key="name-036075" type="person">Hugh Price</name> (<date when="1982">1982</date>) noted, that nothing happened at all.</p>
            <p>Significant developments in technology and in the financial environments can be followed in the business press. Within New Zealand this is indexed by <hi rend="i">Newzindex</hi>, available on paper since <date when="1979">1979</date>, and online since <date when="1987">1987</date>.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N11334">
            <head>Government regulation</head>
            <p>There has been no general survey of government regulation and control of the printing industry in New Zealand. Censorship, since the earliest years, has been a matter of controlling content rather than access to the means of reproduction, and the historical surveys have naturally taken the same direction. There have been some studies of the conflicts of the first years, including Kennett's <hi rend="i">Unsung Hero</hi> (<date when="1991">1991</date>), G.M. Meiklejohn's <hi rend="i">Early Conflicts of Press and Government</hi> (<date when="1953">1953</date>), and Salmond's 'Continuing conflict of press and government' (<date when="1990">1990</date>), and her thesis (<date when="1995">1995</date>).</p>
            <p>The only significant legislation to control the printing industry in New Zealand has been the Printers and Newspapers Registration Act <date when="1868">1868</date>; this laid down the requirement that all newspapers be registered, together with the names of the owners and the printers, that printing presses should be registered, and the printer's name and address should be on all printed documents. With minor amendments these provisions remained until the Newspapers and Printers Act <date when="1955">1955</date>, which dropped the requirement that presses be registered. These registrations are held at the High Court (originally Supreme Court) registries throughout the country, where they should provide a source of information on the ownership of presses.</p>
            <p>Day's <hi rend="i">The Making of the New Zealand Press</hi> (<date when="1990">1990</date>) is the only significant study of the relation between the newspaper industry and the government operated telegraph service, since access to the press agency telegrams was a significant economic asset. The political involvement of the newspaper owners is the principal theme of Day's book, but he also considers the effect of government engagement and political influence in the production cycle. Harvey's article 'The power of the press in colonial New Zealand' (<date when="1996">1996</date>) argues for greater scepticism about the newspaper industry's claims to political influence.</p>
            <p>Government regulation of working conditions, under the Factories Act, and under the Industrial Conciliation and Arbitration Act, are most usefully considered under 'Trade conditions' (above), and the effects of economic controls (such as customs tariffs) under 'Economics' (also above).</p>
            <p>One should consider here the <date when="1931-05">May 1931</date> reduction of wage rates in the public service, with its impact upon the Government Printing Office, and the <date when="1936">1936</date> Wages Act, which brought about the restoration of previous wage levels, at the end of the Great Depression. The regulation of paper use at the beginning of World War II acted as an indirect form of censorship, as for example in the forcing of the closure of the left-of-centre periodical <hi rend="i">Tomorrow</hi>, through denying it supplies of paper.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div type="section" xml:id="_div2-N11366" decls="#_div2-N11366-bibl">
          <head>Private printing</head>
          <p>The notion of a private press is at best ambiguous, and the vagaries of categorical definition are no less evident here in New Zealand. By chance the most comprehensive book on the general subject is by an author who lived and worked for a time as Professor of Librarianship at Victoria University of Wellington during the 1980s. In <hi rend="i">Private Presses</hi> (2nd ed. <date when="1983">1983</date>) Cave acknowledges the difficulties of defining a subject where 'waywardness and eccentricity are in the traditions of the material'. As a broad generalisation, he suggests that a private press is an unofficial press that runs not for profit, but to produce works of some aesthetic merit for a restricted audience. The distinction he makes, that the same press prints the material as publishes it, had until the 1980s little relevance in New Zealand, where most publishers had their own printing arm. Enthusiasm for printing is clearly a prerequisite and most presses are informed by a strong craft ethic. The anachronism that is the hand press has also increasingly come to be associated with the reprinting of rare or obscure texts.</p>
          <p>Aside from half a chapter in Cave's book (pp.284-91), there is little in the way of general reference material concerning private presses in New Zealand. <name key="name-200189" type="person">Eugene Grayland</name> notes in <hi rend="i">Private Presses: Their Contributions to Literature and Typography</hi> (<date when="1947">1947</date>) their role in 'developing our native literature', but offers little extra detail. Lawlor also devotes chapter 2, part 2 of his book of reminiscences <hi rend="i">Books and Bookmen</hi> (<date when="1954">1954</date>) to private presses. <name key="name-121063" type="person">Philip Parr</name>, in 'History of hobby printing in Australasia' (<date when="1980">1980</date>), provides a brief survey of the completely 'not-for-profit' group of presses in both Australia and New Zealand. In <hi rend="i">Vinculum 8</hi> Parr offers the following definition of 'Private Printing in New Zealand': 'There is a PRIVATE PRESS when the operator runs it:—for his own enjoyment, being in full control of every choice, with persistent effort to improve techniques, without seeking financial gain (although he may sell some items to help cover costs)'.</p>
          <p>Specific presses singled out by Cave were the early Caxton Press, Nag's Head Press, <name key="name-200547" type="organisation">Wai-te-ata Press</name>, <name key="name-200189" type="person">Eugene Grayland</name>'s <name key="name-200100" type="organisation">Colenso Press</name>, <name key="name-200223" type="person">Noel Hoggard</name>'s <name key="name-200202" type="organisation">Handcraft Press</name> and <name key="name-200211" type="organisation">Hawk Press</name>. To this list, Lawlor added Lowry's <name key="name-200535" type="organisation">Unicorn Press</name>, <name key="name-121580" type="person">Ron Holloway</name>'s <name key="name-200195" type="organisation">Griffin Press</name>, and the Pelorus and Pegasus Presses. The last named of these seems hard to reconcile with most accepted definitions of private press, although Pegasus was clearly well regarded for the standard of its press work. The flamboyant Geoffrey Count Potocki de Montalk also operated a number of private presses, but mostly abroad—see his <hi rend="i">Myself as Printer</hi>, (<date when="1970">1970</date>). <name key="name-121304" type="person">Noel Waite</name>'s PhD thesis 'Adventure and art: literature publishing in <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name> 1934-95' (<date when="1997">1997</date>) provides histories and checklists of the Caxton, Pegasus, Nag's Head, Hawk and Hazard Presses, as well as providing a wider infrastructural context. Waite also has a brief checklist for the <name key="name-123715" type="organisation">Arbor Press</name>. The remarkable duo behind the Caxton Press, <name key="name-208049" type="person">Denis Glover</name> and <name key="name-207415" type="person">Leo Bensemann</name>, accounted for a number of small presses. Bensemann's <name key="name-200230" type="organisation">Huntsbury Press</name> occupied his retirement, while Glover in Wellington had a series of presses: Catspaw, Mermaid and Capricorn.</p>
          <p>Two books that appeared on the occasion of the Auckland Festival are useful guides to the activities of the <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name> presses of the 1950s: <hi rend="i">Writing in Auckland</hi> by J.<name type="person">C. Reid</name>, an exhibition arranged by the Auckland Public Libraries (<date when="1955">1955</date>), and <hi rend="i">Printed in Auckland</hi> (<date when="1956">1956</date>). An article in the latter entitled 'Some Auckland presses of today' describes how <name key="name-121580" type="person">Ron Holloway</name>'s <name key="name-200195" type="organisation">Griffin Press</name> merged with Lowry's Unicorn in <date when="1938">1938</date>, and Lowry went on to establish <name key="name-200397" type="organisation">Pelorus Press</name> (<date when="1947">1947</date>) and later the <name key="name-200406" type="organisation">Pilgrim Press</name>. Although these presses were more commercial in nature, A.R.D. Fairburn's <hi rend="i">The Sky is a Limpet</hi> (<date when="1939">1939</date>) and <hi rend="i">How to Ride a Bicycle in Seventeen Lovely Colours</hi> (<date when="1946">1946</date>) can fairly be labelled private press offerings.</p>
          <p><name key="name-200223" type="person">Noel Hoggard</name> (1912-75) was a most dogged and prolific private press operator with his <name key="name-200202" type="organisation">Handcraft Press</name>. His hand-set publications, which were generally of a literary nature, included <hi rend="i">The Maorilander</hi>, <hi rend="i">Spilt Ink</hi> (<date when="1932">1932</date>), <hi rend="i">New Triad</hi> (<date when="1937">1937</date>), and <hi rend="i">Arena</hi> (1946-75) which ran to 81 issues. <name key="name-120624" type="person">Stephen Hamilton</name>'s PhD thesis 'New Zealand English language periodicals of literary interest active 1920s-60s' (<date when="1996">1996</date>) details the contents of these journals. In the first ten years of his press Hoggard also published 40 books of poetry and essays, and introduced three local newspapers.</p>
          <p>In the 1960s several 'bibliographical' presses were established by those wishing, among other things, to teach the methods of textual transmission in the medium of print as practised in the handpress era. Although these presses were attached to institutions of learning, they were run by enthusiasts, whose productions went beyond the call of duty. The first of these was W.J. Cameron, who in <date when="1960">1960</date> issued a series of bibliographical pamphlets printed by students on the Albion handpress in the Department of English, University of <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name>. Next, in <date when="1961">1961</date>, came the Bibliography Room, since <date when="1966">1966</date> located in the University of Otago Library, founded by David Esplin and <name key="name-120907" type="person">Keith Maslen</name>. In the late 1960s and 1970s, Maslen printed works by a number of New Zealand poets, including <name key="name-207374" type="person">James K. Baxter</name>'s <hi rend="i">The Lion Skin</hi>(<date when="1967">1967</date>) and <hi rend="i"><name key="name-202306" type="work">Jerusalem Sonnets</name></hi>(<date when="1971">1971</date>). The most distinguished and productive of these presses was <name key="name-200547" type="organisation">Wai-te-ata Press</name> under D.F. McKenzie, one-time professor of English at Victoria University of Wellington. <hi rend="i">The Wai-te-ata Press 1962-92</hi> (<date when="1992">1992</date>) provides a comprehensive checklist of that press's activities. Massey University also has a Bibliography Room. Many other educational institutions from time to time have had what might be called hobby presses.</p>
          <p>The 1970s saw a return to private presses by a generation that felt excluded from mainstream publications. This coincided with the availability of relatively cheap hand presses which were no longer required with the increasing move to offset printing. These offered the possibility of publication with full control over production at an affordable price. It also accorded with a renewal of interest in craft values. Notable amongst these were <name key="name-200322" type="person">Bruce Mitcalfe</name>'s idiosyncratic <name key="name-200112" type="organisation">Coromandel Press</name> and <name key="name-200280" type="person">Alan Loney</name>'s <name key="name-200211" type="organisation">Hawk Press</name>. From about <date when="1975">1975</date> until the early 1990s under the imprint of Hawk Press <name key="name-200280" type="person">Alan Loney</name> printed a series of works, mainly by contemporary New Zealand poets, distinguished by the high quality of design and workmanship. Later, in the 1980s, came <name key="name-200248" type="person">Warwick Jordan</name>'s <name key="name-200204" type="organisation">Hard Echo Press</name>. The latter achieved the feat of hand-setting an entire novel, Mike Johnson's <hi rend="i">Lear</hi> (<date when="1986">1986</date>).</p>
          <p><name key="name-200269" type="person">Walter Lemm</name> (<name key="name-200235" type="organisation">Imp Press</name>, <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name>) founded the Association of Handcraft Printers in <date when="1973">1973</date>, and both are still going strong. The list of members of <date when="1995-05">May 1995</date> names 73 private (as opposed to institutional) New Zealand members and their presses. The biennial <hi rend="i">Vinculum</hi>, made up of leaves contributed by members as a showcase of their work, reached no.46 in <date when="1996-12">December 1996</date>. The Association's quarterly newsletter includes news of members' doings. A catalogue of the books belonging to the library of the Association of Handcraft Printers as of <date when="1993-07">July 1993</date> was issued in <date when="1993">1993</date> by the Librarian, <name key="name-200128" type="person">John Denny</name>, from his <name key="name-200436" type="organisation">Puriri Press</name>, <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name>. Noteworthy members, not elsewhere mentioned in this brief survey, include Charles Alldritt, <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name>; the Brebners, whose john allison/homeprint presses were run first from the Manawatu Museum and then from their home in Feilding; <name key="name-200191" type="person">Bruce Grenville</name>, <name key="name-200475" type="organisation">Sedang Press</name>, <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name>; <name key="name-200256" type="person">Tony King</name>, <name key="name-123714" type="organisation">Ark Press</name>, Wellington; <name key="name-200386" type="person">Phil Parr</name>, joint founder/patron, <name key="name-200014" type="organisation">Aspect Press</name>, <name key="name-021302" type="place">Levin</name>; Sydney J. Shep and <name key="name-200231" type="person">Timothy Hurd</name>, <name key="name-200483" type="organisation">Silent Isle Press</name> (Dr Shep also currently manages the <name key="name-200547" type="organisation">Wai-te-ata Press</name>); and Mark K. Venables, <name key="name-200330" type="organisation">Mt St John Press</name>, <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name>. Robert S. (Bob) Gormack, at the Nag's Head Press, <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name>, has long been noted for his impeccable printing and the special flavour of his writing, which may be exemplified by <hi rend="i">The Centennial History of Barnego Flat</hi> (general editor, E. Dadds [<name key="name-200179" type="person">Robert Gormack</name>], Part 1, <date when="1964">1964</date>). For further information see Gormack (<date when="1992">1992</date>). The Ferrymead Printing Society at the Ferrymead Print Shop, <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name>, also deserves particular mention.</p>
          <p>A resurgence in the book arts in the 1980s has seen an increase in small presses committed to high quality, but also willing to be experimental. Notable amongst these were Tara McLeod's <name key="name-200395" type="organisation">Pear Tree Press</name>, <name key="name-200128" type="person">John Denny</name>'s <name key="name-200436" type="organisation">Puriri Press</name>, and <name key="name-200280" type="person">Alan Loney</name>'s latest efforts at the Black Light and the Holloway Presses—the latter using materials transferred from the <name key="name-200195" type="organisation">Griffin Press</name>, when in <date when="1994">1994</date> the <name key="name-200225" type="organisation">Holloway Press</name> was established on the Tamaki Campus of the University of <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name>. The long-lived <name key="name-200195" type="organisation">Griffin Press</name> of Ronald and Kay Holloway features in the latter's autobiography (<date when="1994">1994</date>). In <date when="1989">1989</date>, <name key="name-200280" type="person">Alan Loney</name> founded the <name key="name-200044" type="organisation">Book Arts Society</name>, which the following year published a limited edition, designed, printed and bound by <name key="name-200280" type="person">Alan Loney</name> at <name key="name-200040" type="organisation">Black Light Press</name>, of <hi rend="i">Art of the Book</hi> (<date when="1990">1990</date>). The catalogue was compiled by <name key="name-200175" type="person">Rowan Gibbs</name>. The Society also issues a newsletter.</p>
          <p>It has to be admitted that the work of private printers is variable in quality. The typographical renaissance of the late 1940s in New Zealand owed more to printers, such as <name key="name-208049" type="person">Denis Glover</name> and others at the Caxton Press, who made their bread and butter by commercial printing, but took pains to produce some work to the highest possible artistic standard, regardless of the financial return. Their example may serve to underline the point that where such achievements are concerned the dividing line between commercial and private printers can be hard to draw.</p>
        </div>
      </div>
      <div type="chapter" xml:id="_div1-N113F7">
        <head>Publishing</head>
        <div type="intro" xml:id="_div2-N11403">
          <p>In this guide, 'publishing' encompasses the factors which influence the decision to produce a work at a particular time, and the editorial activities which are required to produce a work. <name key="name-120807" type="person">Dennis McEldowney</name>'s overview of publishing in New Zealand expands the definition:

                  <quote><p>. . . how the works . . . came to be published, in books and periodicals and . . . the electronic media. . . . how patrons, mainly the State, came to assist both writers and publishers. . . . Printing, as the mechanical multiplication of copies, is but one step in the process of publishing, which selects and edits the text before it is printed and sells or otherwise distributes it after.(<name key="name-120807" type="person">McEldowney</name>, <date when="1991">1991</date>, p.545)</p></quote>
          </p>
          <p>To this definition should be added the question of financial responsibility, for the publishers' financial risk is normally a central issue which shapes all aspects of the publishing process. Printing and distribution are covered elsewhere in this guide: note, however, that there is inevitably some overlap between these sections and this chapter.</p>
          <p>This guide, as the Introduction indicates, 'may be regarded as a report on the state of research' into print culture in New Zealand. Readers will quickly discern this to be the case for this chapter, especially as they note the large number of references to areas and topics for further study, and the unevenness of coverage for aspects of the publishing field.</p>
          <p>This chapter is divided into four main sections: the process of publishing, the publishers, general and regional studies, and categories of publication.</p>
        </div>
        <div type="section" xml:id="_div2-N11426" decls="#_div2-N11426-bibl">
          <head>The process of publishing</head>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N11432">
            <p>Publishing, most simply put, is the issuing, usually for sale, of printed matter. As <name key="name-120807" type="person">Dennis McEldowney</name> describes it, the publisher 'selects and edits the text before it is printed and sells or otherwise distributes it after'. The publisher does not write the book, nor print it nor bind it, nor sell it to the reader, who is the publisher's ultimate customer. Without the publisher's presence these other activities would, however, be pointless. Even after excluding all of these activities, publishing encompasses a number of complex tasks. The publisher carries out the roles of financier, organiser, and go-between as part of the process by which the written work gets from its author to its reader. These tasks can be divided up according to the relationships the publisher forms with others who perform various actions on or around the author's manuscript, and with those who bring the published work to its eventual market. Some of the activities excluded from the following discussion are covered elsewhere in this guide.</p>
            <p>In order to 'prepare and issue (a book . . . etc.) for public sale' (as the <hi rend="i">Concise Oxford Dictionary</hi> defines 'publish'), there must first be a text. Whatever the impetus behind its genesis, a commissioned work or independently created, it has an author (or authors). Once the publisher has decided to publish a text, it becomes the object of attention of a number of the publisher's agents. These include all those people who work on the text or on the book which is to contain it: editor, designer, typesetter and printer. Formerly many of these people were employed within the office of the publisher, but increasingly they work independently of the publishing house, and are contracted to perform specific tasks. The publisher organises all of these: the preparation of the manuscript for printing, the production of the item by printers and binders, the provision of illustrations and covers, advertising and promotion, and the sale of the product to distributors and booksellers.</p>
            <p>Central to any consideration of the process of publishing is the fact that publishing is a business. All of the operations described above are financed by the publisher's capital. The publisher must spend most of this money before any return is received. The capital is advanced against a perceived market and therefore a return on its outlay: without a market for the published work, the publisher could not contemplate this financial risk. However, this discussion will concentrate on the editorial processes of publishing rather than the financial side, which remains to be written about in the New Zealand context. Some inkling of the issues may be gained from overseas publishers' accounts (e.g. <name key="name-200539" type="person">Stanley Unwin</name>'s <hi rend="i">The Truth about Publishing</hi>, <date when="1926">1926</date>) or surveys such as <name key="name-120532" type="person">John Feather</name>'s <hi rend="i">History of British Publishing</hi> (<date when="1988">1988</date>), which devotes considerable discussion to the topics of copyright ('the cornerstone of publishing in a free market economy') and the commercial imperatives of marketing.</p>
            <p>What defines the direction of a particular publisher's activity could be described as the result of the tensions between an individual publisher's personal inclinations and the forces of business reality. What makes New Zealand publishing distinctive in this context is probably the level of influence of individuals, and small and medium-sized firms which have often prevailed and had an effect disproportionate to their size as the multinational behemoths fragmented, disestablished, regrouped and refocused around and amongst them. This would not have happened to the same degree in a larger pond.</p>
            <p>Outlines from a New Zealand perspective of the process of publishing are to be found in some of the handbooks which have been produced for writers and editors, including:
                     <lb/>     Arnold Wall, <hi rend="i">A Reed Deskbook for Writers</hi> (<date when="1973">1973</date>)
                     <lb/>     Anna Rogers, <hi rend="i">Write and Be Published</hi> (<date when="1994">1994</date>)
                     <lb/>      <hi rend="i">First Edition</hi> (<date when="1993">1993</date>, rev. ed. <date when="1995">1995</date>)
                     <lb/>      <hi rend="i">Write, Edit, Print</hi> (<date when="1997">1997</date>)
                     <lb/>
                     <lb/></p>
            <p>Publishers' accounts of the process are to be found mainly in the autobiographical writings of those involved, including:</p>
            <lb/>
            <p><name key="name-207493" type="person">Charles Brasch</name>, <hi rend="i">Indirections</hi> (<date when="1980">1980</date>)
                     <lb/>     <name key="name-208049" type="person">Denis Glover</name>, <hi rend="i">Hot Water Sailor &amp; Landlubber Ho!</hi> (<date when="1981">1981</date>)
                     <lb/>     <name key="name-200312" type="person">Phoebe Meikle</name>, <hi rend="i">Accidental Life</hi> (<date when="1994">1994</date>)
                     <lb/>     <name key="name-120807" type="person">Dennis McEldowney</name>, <hi rend="i">Then and There</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>)
                     <lb/>     A.W. Reed, <hi rend="i">Books are My Business</hi> (<date when="1966">1966</date>)
                     <lb/>     <name key="name-200457" type="person">Ray Richards</name>, 'The man in the middle' (<date when="1974">1974</date>)</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N114B5">
            <head>Author and publisher</head>
            <p>The first publishing in New Zealand represents a primitive sort of commissioning process. The Church Missionary Society trained the printer 
                  <name key="name-207684" type="person">William Colenso</name> and sent him to New Zealand; the missionary <name key="name-209653" type="person">William Williams</name> was charged with preparing the copy for the first publications, Māori translations of Scripture. The few earlier publications created outside New Zealand but intended for circulation in New Zealand had similarly been generated or commissioned by their publishers. The New Zealand Company's propaganda exhorting settlement in the antipodean Brighter Britain was also a publishing programme entirely instigated by the publishing organisation.</p>
            <p>The pattern of publishing in the early years of European settlement was for an author to pay for the issue of a work, and most of these works were political and religious pamphlets. Despite the presence on the title page or elsewhere of a printer's or perhaps a bookseller's imprint, this was essentially self-publishing. <name key="name-120807" type="person">McEldowney</name> identifies the first memorable locally-published book as F.E. Maning's <hi rend="i">Old New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1863">1863</date>) issued in <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name> by Creighton and Scales, proprietors of the <hi rend="i">Southern Cross</hi> newspaper, who evidently already saw a New Zealand market for tales of the 'Good Old Times', as Maning's subtitle put it. A parallel edition was issued for another market by Smith, Elder in London.</p>
            <p>By the mid 19th century in <name key="name-005976" type="place">Britain</name> an author's contract with a publisher might involve the outright sale of the copyright, or a profit-sharing arrangement. The Copyright Act <date when="1843">1843</date> had strengthened authors' interests, and in <date when="1887">1887</date> the Berne Convention on Copyright gave both publishers and authors further protection. The author's contract determines the details of the commercial relationship between author and publisher, defines the responsibilities of both parties in particular areas, and is intended to protect both parties.</p>
            <p>If a work is commissioned, the publisher sets the parameters: the subject and its treatment, length, general style (in terms of the audience), inclusion of illustrations and other matter such as appendices, bibliography, and indexes. In any case author and publisher sign an agreement setting deadlines, the author's responsibilities (for instance, involvement in proofreading), the degree of editorial control to be exercised by the publisher, and the author's remuneration—royalty payments, advances against royalties, or a lump sum or other agreement. The contract also normally addresses the extent to which the author takes responsibility for defamation or breach of copyright, whether the author will offer an option on future work, and the conditions under which the contract may be terminated by either party.</p>
            <p>By the turn of the century Whitcombe &amp; Tombs had a standard printed agreement along these lines which they asked their authors to sign, offering a royalty of 10% or more on the retail price, and giving themselves a free hand to make most of the editorial decisions. This contract was still being used six decades later, although some authors struck out the latter clause. Authors' contracts now include clauses to cover new technological and cultural developments, such as motion picture rights and electronic publication options. These days a publisher may claim a greater degree of control than previously, but is also likely to be making a significantly larger investment in the marketing of a book. Most publishers offer a standard contract but are usually willing to negotiate terms. Standard author contracts are described by Anna Rogers (<date when="1994">1994</date>) and in <hi rend="i">First Edition</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>). The New Zealand Society of Authors provides its members with a minimum terms agreement and an annotated model contract. See also A.W. Reed's address to PEN, <hi rend="i">The Author Publisher Relationship</hi> (<date when="1946">1946</date>) and his section on contracts in <name key="name-405229" type="person">Stuart Perry</name>'s <hi rend="i">The New Zealand Writer's Handbook</hi> (1952a).</p>
            <p>An author may employ a literary agent to carry out contractual negotiations. The agent receives a percentage of the author's royalty. New Zealand's first formally constituted literary agency was <name key="name-200457" type="person">Ray Richards</name>, formerly of A.H. &amp; A.W. Reed, who set up his agency in <date when="1976">1976</date>. Although literary agents have not yet risen in New Zealand to the power and prominence they hold in Australia, the <name key="name-029547" type="place">United Kingdom</name> and the <name key="name-031090" type="place">United States</name>, a relatively small number of commercially successful and therefore sought-after authors have found it worth their while to employ the bargaining skills of a professional in their dealings with the larger New Zealand publishing houses, and an agent is a necessity for entrée to overseas publishing contracts. <hi rend="i">First Edition</hi> lists 11 of the New Zealand agencies of various kinds in <date when="1995">1995</date>, including publishing consultants and book packaging services, mostly established during the mid 1980s.</p>
            <p>Book packagers solicit manuscripts to fit concepts that are marketable to a publisher, usually as all-inclusive packages—commissioned, edited, designed, illustrated and sometimes even printed. The packager takes care of all dealings with the publisher, and the author's agreement (including royalties) is with the packager. Publishing consultants provide another kind of agency for both authors and publishers, offering assessment of manuscripts to publishers, assessing authors' drafts and assisting in bringing manuscripts to a publishable standard before they are offered to a publisher. To a degree these agencies have made redundant the role of the publisher's reader, potentially a position of considerable influence with the power to shape a list and determine the progress of an author's career (though in New Zealand probably not a significant force). In non-fiction publishing, the reader is usually a specialist outside the world of publishing. The rise of literary agents in New Zealand and their effect on the industry are discussed in articles by Jandene Dyson and Lesley Hanes in <hi rend="i">Endnotes</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>).</p>
            <p>In order to deal more effectively with such issues as contracts and remuneration, authors have formed themselves into societies to promote their common interests. Writers' organisations are described briefly in E.C. Simpson's <hi rend="i">A Survey of the Arts in New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1961">1961</date>) and in <hi rend="i">Art Facts</hi> (N. Scotts et al., <date when="1987">1987</date>).</p>
            <p>The short-lived Fellowship of New Zealand Writers, founded in <date when="1929">1929</date> by Pat Lawlor, <name key="name-207252" type="person">Johannes Andersen</name>, A.E. Currie and others is described by <name key="name-120256" type="person">Rachel Barrowman</name> in <hi rend="i">The Turnbull</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>). Some of the Fellowship's records are to be found in the papers of its founders at the Alexander Turnbull Library. Soon after, the New Zealand Centre of the international writers' organisation PEN was founded in <date when="1934">1934</date> by Lawlor, and was the organising force behind the first New Zealand Authors' Week in <date when="1936">1936</date>. The Authors' Week Committee produced occasional bulletins and a publication, <hi rend="i">Annals of New Zealand Literature</hi>, commemorating the Week itself, which was held during <date when="1936-03">March 1936</date>. Subsequent PEN publications for New Zealand have been <name key="name-208782" type="person">Alan Mulgan</name>'s <hi rend="i">Literature and Authorship in New Zealand</hi> (a lyrical overview which now smacks strongly of colonial cringe, published in London by Allen &amp; Unwin for PEN in <date when="1946">1946</date>) and Perry (1952a). Now the New Zealand Society of Authors, the organisation produces a regular bulletin (originally the <hi rend="i">PEN Gazette</hi> and now <hi rend="i">The New Zealand Author</hi>). Through energetic lobbying it was instrumental in the setting up of the <name key="name-200496" type="organisation">State Literary Fund</name> in <date when="1946">1946</date> and the Authors' Fund in <date when="1973">1973</date>, and continues to attempt to keep state agencies and other non-authors toeing the line.</p>
            <p>Other writers' societies include the New Zealand Women Writers' Society, formed in <date when="1932">1932</date> and initially chaired by the ubiquitous Pat (for Patrick) Lawlor, which produced a <hi rend="i">Bulletin</hi> from <date when="1951">1951</date> until its demise in <date when="1991">1991</date>. It is described by <name key="name-120521" type="person">Anne Else</name> in <hi rend="i">Women Together</hi> (<date when="1993">1993</date>) and its records are in the Alexander Turnbull Library. Two publications were produced to celebrate the Society's 50th jubilee in <date when="1982">1982</date>: <hi rend="i">Women Writers of NZ 1932-1982</hi> (a history and anthology by <name key="name-120651" type="person">Margaret Hayward</name> and <name key="name-120652" type="person">Joy Cowley</name>), and <hi rend="i">History of the New Zealand Women Writers' Society</hi> (by <name key="name-120556" type="person">Thelma France</name> et al., <date when="1984">1984</date>). Other organisations have been the Penwomen's Club, New Zealand (formed <date when="1925">1925</date>) and Ngā Puna Waihenga, the New Zealand Māori artists' and writers' society, founded in <date when="1973">1973</date>. The New Zealand Writer's Guild, most of whose members are radio and television scriptwriters, is lively and active.</p>
            <p>New Zealand's high per capita output of books suggests it has a correspondingly high population of authors. An indication of the numbers might be gained from an analysis of New Zealand Authors' Fund returns. The Fund, which compensates authors for sales lost through library lending, is described in an article by J.P. Sage in <hi rend="i">New Zealand Libraries</hi> (<date when="1987">1987</date>). In 1984-85, according to a survey by % identified themselves as full-time writers). In <name key="name-121336" type="person">Andrea Williamson</name>, 850 authors were registered with the Fund (although only about 20<date when="1995">1995</date> the Fund made payments to 1,332 authors for 4,844 titles. Those afflicted with the need to be published may attend the evening classes and short courses in creative writing which are a feature of university extension programmes and other adult educational institutions, for example the WEA. Polytechnics offer journalism studies, and Victoria University of Wellington's creative writing course, founded in <date when="1975">1975</date>, was the first of a number of tertiary courses and has produced some notably high profile writers. The effects of individual courses on writing styles, and the success or otherwise of their graduates in getting their work published, has yet to be studied. <name key="name-035801" type="person">Bill Manhire</name>'s course at Victoria is documented in <hi rend="i">Mutes and Earthquakes</hi> (<date when="1997">1997</date>).</p>
            <p>Aside from the work of the authors' societies such as PEN, practical guides for writers who want their work published have appeared from time to time, covering topics from manuscript preparation to publishers' contracts and proofreading. Changing times and conditions might be examined by a comparison of these over the decades. Daphne Double's <hi rend="i">New Zealand Writers' and Publishers' Yearbook</hi> did not reappear after its <date when="1969">1969</date> debut. Others include the works by <name key="name-209547" type="person">Arnold Wall</name> (<date when="1973">1973</date>), <name key="name-121148" type="person">Anna Rogers</name> (<date when="1994">1994</date>) and <name key="name-121067" type="person">John Parsons</name>'s <hi rend="i">New Zealand Writer's Handbook</hi> (first issued in <date when="1990">1990</date>, most recent edition <date when="1994">1994</date>). A more specialised guide is <name key="name-120863" type="person">Gavin McLean</name>'s <hi rend="i">Local History</hi> (<date when="1992">1992</date>).</p>
            <p>Authors' papers and their accounts of their dealings with publishers are also a rich source of information. Noel Hilliard contributed his views on 'Authorship in New Zealand' to the <date when="1973">1973</date> Book Council seminar, <hi rend="i">The Changing Shape of Books</hi> (<date when="1974">1974</date>). <name key="name-120575" type="person">Peter Gibbons</name> notes in his chapter on non-fiction in <hi rend="i">The Oxford History of New Zealand Literature in English</hi> that M.H. Holcroft's autobiographies offer much detail on the vicissitudes of authorship and its remuneration. Gibbons's thesis on J.C. Andersen (<date when="1992">1992</date>) offers a wealth of information relevant to scholarly publication in Andersen's era. Other biographical and autobiographical sources worth investigating for this topic are:</p>

            <listBibl>
              <bibl>Robin Dudding (ed.), <hi rend="i">Beginnings</hi> (<date when="1980">1980</date>)</bibl>
              <bibl>Frank Sargeson, <hi rend="i">Sargeson</hi> (<date when="1981">1981</date>)</bibl>
              <bibl>Denys Trussell, <hi rend="i">Fairburn</hi> (<date when="1984">1984</date>)</bibl>
              <bibl>Lynley Hood, <hi rend="i">Sylvia!</hi> (<date when="1988">1988</date>)</bibl>
              <bibl>Janet Frame, <hi rend="i">An Autobiography</hi> (<date when="1989">1989</date>)</bibl>
              <bibl>Ross Galbreath, <hi rend="i">Walter Buller</hi> (<date when="1989">1989</date>)</bibl>
              <bibl>Lauris Edmond, <hi rend="i">An Autobiography</hi> (<date when="1994">1994</date>)</bibl>
              <bibl>Michael King, <hi rend="i"><name key="name-209171" type="person">Frank Sargeson</name></hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>)</bibl>
              <bibl>Keith Ovenden, <hi rend="i">A Fighting Withdrawal</hi> [<name key="name-207789" type="person">Dan Davin</name>] (<date when="1996">1996</date>)</bibl>
              <bibl>Anthony Dreaver, <hi rend="i">An Eye for Country</hi> [Leslie Adkin] (<date when="1997">1997</date>)</bibl>
              <bibl>Ian Richards, <hi rend="i">To Bed at Noon</hi> [Maurice Duggan] (<date when="1997">1997</date>)</bibl>
            </listBibl>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N115C5">
            <head>Encouragement to publish</head>
            <p>Financial incentives to publishers to instigate the risky and expensive process involved in producing a book are sometimes difficult to separate from incentives to authors to produce a text in the first place. (Incentives and awards for writers are discussed in Chapter 5 in the section on 'Recognition and rewards of success'.) <name key="name-110358" type="person">McEldowney</name> asserts that—with some notable exceptions—until <date when="1960">1960</date> most publishing in New Zealand had not become fully independent, relying to some degree on assistance from other commercial activities or the sponsorship of booksellers, printers and institutions. For some types of publication, notably poetry and serious non-fiction, that remains the case, and the largest and most important source of financial assistance to publishing in New Zealand has always been government subsidy.</p>
            <p>A.G. Bagnall notes in his introduction to the <hi rend="i">New Zealand National Bibliography</hi>, vol.1 (<date when="1980">1980</date>), the existence of much government sponsored and supported publication in the records of the Colonial Secretary, a source he describes as 'frequently tapped but by no means exhausted'. He narrates in some detail one early instance of government assistance to publishing, involving the government as publisher as well as sponsor: <name key="name-209610" type="person">John White</name>'s <hi rend="i">Ancient History of the Maori</hi> (1887-90) was a mixed experience for all parties. T.F. Cheeseman's <hi rend="i">Manual of the New Zealand Flora</hi> (<date when="1906">1906</date>), <name key="name-208623" type="person">Robert McNab</name>'s <hi rend="i">Historical Records of New Zealand</hi> (<date from="1908" to="1914">1908-14</date>), T.M. Hocken's <hi rend="i">Bibliography</hi> (<date when="1909">1909</date>), <name key="name-207731" type="person">James Cowan</name>'s <hi rend="i">New Zealand Wars</hi> (<date from="1922" to="1923">1922-23</date>) and, from the 1920s, a whole raft of Dominion Museum Bulletins by <name key="name-207424" type="person">Elsdon Best</name> are further large scale, government-assisted publications. Major initiatives came with the programme of the first Labour government which took office in <date when="1935">1935</date>. These included a series of centennial surveys (published by the Department of Internal Affairs) and a small number of grants to other commemorative publishing projects. J.W. Heenan, Undersecretary for Internal Affairs, used a discretionary fund to assist some other publication projects. Discretion probably exacerbated the inevitable backbiting unleashed among the subsidised and unsubsidised, including those who disapproved in principle. These early efforts are described by <name key="name-120256" type="person">Rachel Barrowman</name> in 'Culture-organising' (<date when="1996">1996</date>). The centennial surveys are described in a research essay by A.J. Booker (<date when="1983">1983</date>) and in the autobiographical writings of their editor, E.H. McCormick (<hi rend="i">An Absurd Ambition</hi>, <date when="1996">1996</date>). Internal Affairs also set up a War History branch which embarked on a mammoth publication programme.</p>
            <p>Heenan eventually gave way to pressure from PEN and others to set up the <name key="name-200496" type="organisation">State Literary Fund</name> in <date when="1946">1946</date>. His reservations about the difficulty of creating an authority capable of keeping all parties happy in a world renowned for the number and vociferousness of what he described as its 'mutually intolerant cliques' were well founded and the Fund has a lively history. A rather desiccated summary of its early activities, including a useful list of grants, is <hi rend="i">The New Zealand Literary Fund, 1946-70</hi> (<date when="1970">1970</date>), and statistical information on grants from 1973 to 1986 appears in <hi rend="i">Art Facts</hi> (Scotts et al., <date when="1987">1987</date>). From the outset the Fund's primary purpose was to give 'grants towards publishing costs' and it restricted itself to publications judged to be of literary merit—largely fiction, poetry and literary periodicals—and excluding local histories, for which assistance was deemed to be available under the provisions of the Municipal Corporations and Counties Acts. Manuscripts were to be submitted to the Fund's Advisory Committee by publishers, not authors. O.St J. Vennell's <hi rend="i">Patronage and New Zealand Literature</hi> (<date when="1977">1977</date>) surveys attitudes to the Fund and makes some recommendations for its future resourcing and direction.</p>
            <p>By <date when="1985">1985</date>, the proportion of its grants which the Fund gave to publishers had fallen from 60% to 20%, a matter on which <name key="name-120815" type="person">Bridget Williams</name> animadverts in 'Publishing and the Literary Fund' (<date when="1986">1986</date>). In <date when="1988">1988</date> the Fund and its Advisory Committee joined the <name key="name-005891" type="person">Queen Elizabeth</name> II Arts Council, becoming the Council's Literature Programme and Literature Committee. It further metamorphosed in <date when="1995">1995</date> with the rebranding of the Council's funding body as Creative New Zealand. The Literature Committee simply disappeared, without warning to its members. In <date when="1993">1993</date> the Council published a <hi rend="i">Research Report on the Literature Programme's Publishers' Survey</hi>, noting that 25% of its funding was in grants to publishers, and analysing 25 publishers' responses. In <date when="1996">1996</date> grants to book publishing fell to $18,000 from the previous year's $50,000 and Creative New Zealand set up a Task Force for Language and Literature to review its policies. Some recent events are described by <name key="name-120909" type="person">Andrew Mason</name> in <hi rend="i">Quote Unquote</hi> (<date when="1996">1996</date>).</p>
            <p>The government also assists publishers through annual grants made by the Historical Branch of the Department of Internal Affairs towards the publication of historical works, countering one of the biases of the Literary Fund. The Historical Branch also co-publishes many of the departmental and other organisational histories commissioned through its agency. Another example of this kind of indirect government subsidy is the publication of the <hi rend="i">Dictionary of New Zealand Biography</hi> by the Department of Internal Affairs jointly with a commercial publisher (described in <date when="1995">1995</date> by <name key="name-120815" type="person">Bridget Williams</name>). The Māori Purposes Fund Board (and its predecessors) has made substantial contributions to the Polynesian Society and other publishers; centennial grants in <date when="1940">1940</date> and the sesquicentennial contributions of the <date when="1990">1990</date> Commission are other government sources of funding to assist publication. Details are to be found in agencies' reports in the <hi rend="i">Appendices to the Journals of the House of Representatives</hi>.</p>
            <p>Learned societies or institutions may also consider subsidising publication of books otherwise commercially unfeasible. Companies wanting to raise a monument to their history or to produce a gift for presentation may commission and fund publications to which they may offer a greater or lesser degree of editorial control. Substantial publications might appear in parts, in consecutive issues of journals such as the <hi rend="i">Transactions and Proceedings</hi> of the New Zealand Institute (later the Royal Society of New Zealand) or the <hi rend="i">Journal of the Polynesian Society</hi>, occasionally being reprinted as monographs. For many years this was the only way to get scholarly non-fiction published in New Zealand. Accounts are to be found in C.A. Fleming's <hi rend="i">Science, Settlers and Scholars</hi> (<date when="1987">1987</date>) and M.P.K. Sorrenson's <hi rend="i">Manifest Duty</hi> (<date when="1992">1992</date>). Māori-language publications have relied heavily on subsidy, from H.W. Williams's <hi rend="i">Dictionary</hi> (<date when="1917">1917</date>) and <hi rend="i">Bibliography</hi> (<date when="1924">1924</date>) to the <hi rend="i">Dictionary of New Zealand Biography</hi>'s Māori-language series, <hi rend="i">Ngā Tāngata Taumata Rau</hi> (<date when="1990">1990</date>- ). Funding options for small and independent publishers are discussed by <name key="name-121072" type="person">Janet Pascoe</name> in <hi rend="i">Endnotes</hi> (<date when="1996">1996</date>).</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N11658">
            <head>Restrictions to publishing</head>
            <p>Aside from the topic of censorship, little focus has been devoted to forces—apart from the market—which restrict the publisher's freedom of action. Factors discouraging publication may include emergency legislation, such as restrictions on paper or other supplies in wartime. Nancy M. Taylor discusses censorship for reasons of national security and other World War II issues in <hi rend="i">The Home Front</hi> (<date when="1986">1986</date>). Some grades of paper were not unduly restricted: some British publishers, for example <name key="name-200399" type="organisation">Penguin Books</name>, found it convenient to print some of their titles for the local market in New Zealand during wartime.</p>
            <p>Legal restrictions, including libel and defamation laws, and, recently, privacy legislation, may restrict the publisher's actions. A controversial or sensitive text will be subjected to legal opinion and the author's contract will set out the parties' responsibilities. General guidance for authors and publishers to the libel, defamation and privacy legislation is found in some detail in <hi rend="i">Write, Edit, Print</hi> (<date when="1997">1997</date>).</p>
            <p>In <hi rend="i">Censored</hi> (<date when="1989">1989</date>), <name key="name-120393" type="person">Paul Christoffel</name> gives a brief historical treatment of the issue, noting that censorship in application to publishing in New Zealand has largely related to imported material. Most publishers have practised self-censorship. Perry's <hi rend="i">The Indecent Publications Tribunal</hi> (<date when="1965">1965</date>) notes the lack of any New Zealand legal text on the topic of 'literary censorship on moral grounds' and describes New Zealand's experimental 'expert tribunal', listing its decisions from <date when="1963">1963</date>. There is no general study of the suppression of publications for political reasons. Taylor discusses wartime censorship in some detail, and <name key="name-120256" type="person">Rachel Barrowman</name> describes the case of the left-wing periodical <hi rend="i">Tomorrow in A Popular Vision</hi> (<date when="1991">1991</date>).</p>
            <p>The Copyright Act <date when="1994">1994</date> protects the holder's rights to the intellectual property contained in the creation of a literary work (in the broadest sense); the publisher's rights in the creation of an edition of a work are also protected. Plagiarism, if detected, may lead to legal proceedings and the destruction of the publication. The requirement that publishers must deposit three copies of each publication with the Legal Deposit Office of the National Library of New Zealand, although sometimes considered onerous, is unlikely in practice to affect the decision to publish. New Zealand is a signatory to the Berne Convention and is thus affected by any amendment to its provisions. Most recently the New Zealand book trade has been concerned about the effect of changes to the Convention allowing individual nations to determine their own policies on parallel importing. Australian legislation undermining publishers' traditional distribution monopolies was of particular concern. Submissions by book trade organisations on the Copyright Bill succeeded in having the status quo preserved for New Zealand in the <date when="1994">1994</date> Act. (A tacit agreement between publishers and booksellers enables a small number of books to evade restriction.)</p>
            <p>In <date when="1988">1988</date> the Book Publishers Association of New Zealand set up <name key="name-200111" type="organisation">Copyright Licensing Ltd</name> to negotiate licences for reprographic rights with educational institutions on behalf of publishers and authors, to collect fees locally and distribute income from overseas rights organisations to New Zealand rights holders. In <date when="1996">1996</date> the company collected over $700,000 and received over $100,000 from overseas reproduction rights organisations for distribution to local rights holders.</p>
            <p>Until the better-selling New Zealand authors could be persuaded that they might be equally well served by a local publisher as by their traditional London imprints, territorial rights were an issue affecting New Zealand writers rather than publishers. Publishers certainly did not expect their books to attain significant sales in other territories. For works for which an overseas market was conceivable, they might enter into a joint publishing arrangement with a British firm. Australasian or colonial rights might or might not be included, but from <date when="1947">1947</date> until the demise of the British Commonwealth Market Agreement in <date when="1976">1976</date>, the carving up of the global trade in English language books between <name key="name-005976" type="place">Britain</name> and <name key="name-002804" type="place">North America</name> meant that a book by a New Zealand author published by an American publisher might never appear in bookshops in this country, and the opening up of the market has in effect made little difference to book distribution. The key effect of the closed market on New Zealand publishing is probably overall a positive one: multinational publishers operating in New Zealand who were taking advantage of their territorial monopolies may have felt philanthropic inclinations—or more likely discerned a marketing opportunity—and set up local publishing operations which have been critical to the development of the industry, and to New Zealand literature.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N11691">
            <head>The publisher's tasks</head>
            <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N11691-1">
              <p>Following delivery of the manuscript, the publisher goes about the business of getting it into print. Costings are prepared and marketing decisions are also made at this point. Some of the steps in this process are briefly described in handbooks such as Rogers (<date when="1994">1994</date>) and in more detail in <hi rend="i">Write, Edit, Print</hi> (<date when="1997">1997</date>). Most of these activities are now contracted out to agents beyond the publishing house, although the editor is often on the publisher's permanent staff.</p>
            </div>
            <div type="section" xml:id="_div4-N116A6">
              <head>
                <hi rend="i">Editorial tasks</hi>
              </head>
              <p>Publishers generally have a critical input into the shaping of drafts before and after they agree to publish a manuscript. A reader or an editor will often, in consultation with an author, suggest and guide the recasting of a work and seek to find a mutually acceptable solution. The title 'editor' covers a range of activities, and a book will often have several editors. At the top of the pecking order is the commissioning editor, often designated Publisher, the one with the power to accept or decline. An important part of the role of this editor is to represent the publisher's interests to the author, and the author's interests to the publisher. There is an inevitable tension here, especially with small firms where the editor is in fact the publisher (though publishers may go to great lengths to nurture their stable of authors, in the small world of New Zealand publishing occasional allegations of unprofessionalism and broken, formerly warm friendships attest to the difficulties). In larger companies, the editor is often cast in the role of author's champion. The commissioning editor may 'structurally' edit the work, a time-consuming process which should ideally be carried out in close collaboration with the author; or may entrust the task to a more junior in-house, or increasingly a freelance, editor. ('Face to face—<name key="name-200457" type="person">Ray Richards</name> on Barry Crump' (<date when="1996">1996</date>) spills the beans on one of New Zealand's popular publishing successes.) Finally, every book requires the attention of a copy-editor.</p>
              <p>At the very least, the editor is responsible for ensuring that the manuscript which goes to typesetting is as correct in terms of factual detail (if that is appropriate), spelling and grammar as it is possible to make it within the constraints of time and budget allocated to the project; and ensuring consistency, or adapting the author's conventions to follow the publisher's house style, where the publisher considers this to be necessary or appropriate. A.H. &amp; A.W. Reed's house style takes up three pages of the <hi rend="i">Reed Deskbook for Writers</hi> (<date when="1973">1973</date>), compiled by Reed's editor Group Captain <name key="name-209547" type="person">Arnold Wall</name> (not to be confused with his father, Professor <name key="name-209547" type="person">Arnold Wall</name>), specifying styles for punctuation, abbreviations, dates, numbers, capitalisation, quotations, and so on. Many publishers consider that internal consistency of a manuscript is usually sufficient, but may invoke the conventions of a particular style manual for certain features or elements of a work, such as bibliographies or proper names. In the case of multi-author works (such as the present one), a style manual becomes a more central issue.</p>
              <p>Apart from in-house style sheets—often unpublished or semi-published, such as Auckland University Press's <hi rend="i">The Preparation and Style of Manuscripts</hi> (4th ed. <date when="1985">1985</date>)—publishers make use of a variety of more or less well-known manuals to ensure consistency within or between publications. Most of these derive from large overseas publishing firms, for example <hi rend="i">Hart's Rules</hi> (<name key="name-200382" type="organisation">Oxford University Press</name>), <name key="name-120344" type="person">Judith Butcher</name>'s <hi rend="i">Copy-editing</hi> (Cambridge University Press), or the <hi rend="i">Chicago Manual of Style</hi> (University of Chicago Press). G.R. Hutcheson gives 'Some hints on copy and layout' in <hi rend="i">H.B. &amp; J.'s Handbook</hi> (<date when="1938">1938</date>), although as a printer he is most concerned with clarity of instructions and design considerations. The only substantial New Zealand-published style manual was until recently <hi rend="i">The New Zealand Government Printing Office Style Book</hi>, first issued in <date when="1958">1958</date> and revised several times. A third edition appeared in <date when="1981">1981</date>. It resurfaced in <date when="1991">1991</date> as <hi rend="i">The New Zealand Style Book</hi> and in its most recent incarnation is simply <hi rend="i">The Style Book</hi> (revised and expanded by D. Wallace and J. Hughes, <date when="1995">1995</date>). Earlier issues carried an 'Official Section' devoted to the details of legislative publishing, and particular attention was given to the correct names of statutory bodies. A study of the various editions of this manual would also reveal interesting trends in the treatment of things characteristically New Zealand. Its current contents include guidance on punctuation, spelling, capitals, italics, abbreviations and symbols, measurement, nonsexist language and common confusions. <hi rend="i">Write, Edit, Print</hi> (<date when="1997">1997</date>), the most substantial style manual to be issued in New Zealand, is based on the conventions of the Australian Government Publishing Service <hi rend="i">Style Manual</hi> (5th ed. <date when="1994">1994</date>), with substantial New Zealand input. Non-discriminatory language is one of its features, and it includes considerable practical detail on the making of books, from copy preparation to typesetting and printing.</p>
            </div>
            <div type="section" xml:id="_div4-N116F9">
              <head>Design and typography</head>
              <p>Design includes format, choice of typeface, page layout, illustrations, and the design of the book jacket. One designer may be responsible for all parts of a book, but more frequently the cover will be designed separately (at a notably higher rate). The designer, whether freelance or in-house, is briefed by the editor chiefly responsible for the book. To a certain extent design decisions may be based on a house 'look'. Marketing considerations are also relevant here. Any discussion of the design aspects of publications is difficult to separate from considerations of typography relating to printing and production (see Chapter 2). Many amateurs and enthusiasts have taken an interest in this side of publication, and anyone who has ever dabbled in self- or desktop publishing appears to swiftly form firm opinions on typographical topics, particularly regarding legibility. Printers and designers notable for their influence in New Zealand include R. Coupland Harding; <name key="name-208049" type="person">Denis Glover</name>—whose correspondence with Oxford printer John Johnson is reproduced by D.F. McKenzie (<date when="1987">1987</date>)—Bob Lowry and others at the Caxton Press; and the historian J.C. Beaglehole. Many books are designed in-house and little study has been devoted to any development of a specifically New Zealand style. <name key="name-120807" type="person">Dennis McEldowney</name> attempted a survey of New Zealand trends in 'The typographical obsession' (<date when="1980">1980</date>). The recently instituted GP Print Book Design Awards (replacing the New Zealand Book Awards Production category—introduced to focus on design, but too broad in its criteria to accomplish this very successfully) offer its judge an opportunity to air opinions on design in book production. The thoughts of the first judge of the awards (<name key="name-200320" type="person">Lindsay Missen</name>) were published in <date when="1997">1997</date>.</p>
              <p>In the days of hot lead, typesetting was an integral part of the printer's establishment (and a printer's house style was often as influential as a publisher's). With the shift to photosetting after World War II, a number of independent firms were established, and to get the best prices publishers often contracted typesetting and printing separately. The general availability of cheap professional-standard 'desktop' typesetting systems since the late 1980s, and the provision of manuscripts on computer disk, has seen much typesetting work carried out in-house.</p>
              <p>Proofing is usually a joint responsibility of author and publisher, defined in the author's contract. The careful reader may suspect that in many mass-market titles these days both parties have abdicated their responsibility and dispensed with this step altogether—or left it to the computer spell-check. The publisher's production editor will be responsible for checking the technical details of proofs—the grid, margins, folios, widows, orphans and the other arcana of page design. Instructions on proofreading are included in the style manuals cited earlier, and a rare and interesting historical glimpse into one house's practices is to be found in <name key="name-018379" type="person">W.A. Glue</name>'s <hi rend="i">History of the Government Printing Office</hi> (<date when="1966">1966</date>).</p>
              <p>The relationship between publisher and printer is crucial to the quality of the finished product. A number of New Zealand publishers have also been printers (for example Caxton, Whitcombe &amp; Tombs, and the Government Printer). Since the 1970s much printing of New Zealand titles has taken place overseas, particularly in Southeast Asia, for reasons of economics (especially in colour printing), quality assurance and the capacity to produce large casebound books or perform complex printing jobs. The arm's length nature of the relationship with an overseas printer obviously restricts communication and control and usually the delivery of Ozalids or dyelines provides the last opportunity for the publisher to rectify errors. The Industries Development Commission reported in <date when="1978">1978</date> on an appeal by the New Zealand Printing Industry Federation which wished to manufacture a greater proportion of New Zealand-published books (<hi rend="i">Book Production Inquiry</hi>, <date when="1978">1978</date>), finding that restrictive tariffs on overseas printing would be unlikely to help, and would also contravene the Unesco Florence Agreement on the importation of educational, scientific and cultural materials (<date when="1952">1952</date>) to which New Zealand was a signatory. The Commission suggested that printers and publishers should cooperate to develop a small group of specialist manufacturers. Publishers' submissions to the Commission suggested they were not unhappy with the status quo. Recently local printers have been able to offer more competitive terms and the advantage of proximity is clearly appreciated by many publishers, whether or not the quality of the printed product has any bearing on a book's sales.</p>
            </div>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N1171E">
            <head>Education and training</head>
            <p>Most skills in book production came directly to New Zealand from <name key="name-008008" type="place">Europe</name>, especially from the <name key="name-029547" type="place">United Kingdom</name>. Later immigration of skilled tradespeople from Australia also had an influence, and the nature and extent of these importations and their effect on the development of a local publishing practice requires more extensive study. Training for publishers has traditionally been 'on the job', as tyro editorial staff worked their way up to positions of greater influence and responsibility. New Zealand publishers have come from a variety of backgrounds, including bookselling, printing, journalism, librarianship and accountancy, and have imported relevant skills and training. The arrival of the multinational publishing firms brought with it some trained and experienced staff, and occasional opportunities for reciprocal exchanges with other offices, often ground for the fertilisation of new ideas. More recently, formal training has been available from the Australian Book Publishers' Association, and since <date when="1993">1993</date> a one-year full-time course has been offered at <name key="name-200566" type="organisation">Whitireia Community Polytechnic</name> in <name key="name-036349" type="place">Porirua</name>. The scope of this course is indicated in its publication <hi rend="i">First Edition</hi> (<date when="1993">1993</date>, rev. ed. <date when="1995">1995</date>) and its success may be gauged by the fact that a high proportion of its graduates have quickly found employment in the publishing industry. The Book Publishers Association of New Zealand also runs occasional seminars through its Local Publishing Forums.</p>
            <p>Training for editors is also available in a variety of night school, continuing education and WEA contexts; and the journalism courses offered by the University of Canterbury, <name key="name-036499" type="organisation">Wellington Polytechnic</name> and elsewhere include training in many of the skills of book publishing. A number of courses are listed in <hi rend="i">First Edition</hi>.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N1173C">
            <head>Publishers' organisations</head>
            <p>Publishers have always worked together to a certain degree, to protect their common interests and those of other branches of the book trade, and to ensure their survival to compete against each other. The earliest formal publishers' organisation to be established in New Zealand was the British Book Publishers Representatives Association (BPRA), formed in the 1950s. In <date when="1962">1962</date> the New Zealand Book Publishers Association was created at a meeting in Wellington attended by 15 representatives of the commercial and university publishing houses, and a delegate from the Māori Purposes Fund Board. <name key="name-200587" type="person">Albion Wright</name> of the <name key="name-200396" type="organisation">Pegasus Press</name>, <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name>, was elected first president. A small council employed a Wellington accountant part-time as secretary.</p>
            <p>The BPRA and the NZBPA combined in <date when="1977">1977</date> to become the Book Publishers Association of New Zealand (BPANZ). The organisation moved to <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name> and <name key="name-200457" type="person">Ray Richards</name>, who had recently left Reeds, became its secretary. <name key="name-121121" type="person">Gerard Reid</name> was appointed the full-time director of the expanding association from <date when="1979">1979</date>. However, in the later 1980s the economic downturn caused publishers to re-examine their expenditure on Association membership, for some members a hefty sum, as subscription levels rose with turn-over.</p>
            <p>For a number of years booksellers' and publishers' organisations had worked closely together, and by the mid-1980s were holding conferences at the same time, although separately. The preference of a number of publishers for the booksellers' organisation as a marketing body, rather than the BPANZ, was one of the factors, along with a reduction in membership charges, which led to the latter's retrenchment and the closure of its office in <date when="1990">1990</date>. The BPANZ now operates from the office of <name key="name-200111" type="organisation">Copyright Licensing Ltd</name> (jointly owned by the BPANZ and the New Zealand Society of Authors). Combined book trade conferences have been held since the 1980s and Booksellers New Zealand, the flourishing booksellers' trade organisation, began to include publisher members in <date when="1991">1991</date>.</p>
            <p>Other organisations include the New Zealand Book Trade Organisation, set up in <date when="1968">1968</date> by representatives of the NZBPA and the Booksellers' Association to promote their general interests, and now defunct. It issued <hi rend="i">The Booksell Report</hi>, a marketing, sales and promotions newsletter, from 1983 to 1986. The New Zealand Book Council was established in <date when="1972">1972</date> with a more general membership of those who have an interest in books. Brief notes on the trade organisations are to be found in <name key="name-200506" type="person">Gordon Tait</name>'s summary of the New Zealand industry in <hi rend="i">The Book Trade of the World</hi> (<date when="1976">1976</date>) and in Scotts (<date when="1987">1987</date>).</p>
            <p>A brief history of the BPANZ appears in its newsletter <hi rend="i">The Publisher</hi> (no.12, <date when="1995">1995</date>). The draft objects of the original NZBPA and the minutes of its first meeting are held at the Alexander Turnbull Library, and notes on its formation appear in Double (<date when="1969">1969</date>). The Association publishes a newsletter, entitled <hi rend="i">The Publisher</hi> since <date when="1994-03">March 1994</date>, formerly <hi rend="i">New Zealand Publishing News</hi> (1977-93). A useful discussion of the issues relating to booksellers' and publishers' organisations is in Part 4 of Anna and <name key="name-121149" type="person">Max Rogers</name>'s <hi rend="i">Turning the Pages</hi> (<date when="1993">1993</date>).</p>
            <p>Three groups of the BPANZ's records, covering the years from 1970 to 1991, are held in the <name key="name-000507" type="organisation">Turnbull Library</name>'s manuscripts collections. Current records are held by the Association. Data on the history of publishing, its economics and the issues it faces are to be found there. The records include minutes of council meetings, market research (especially of the educational market), statistical surveys of the industry, turnover information, annual conference records, material on major issues such as discounting, copyright, GST, censorship, and labour relations, as well as membership lists, and information on the size of the industry, personnel, and sales. They are a vital—and almost untapped—source for any serious study of the recent history of the New Zealand publishing industry. Lists of members (currently numbering about 70) appear from time to time in <hi rend="i">The Publisher</hi>.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N1177E">
            <head>Trade publications</head>
            <p>Many trade publications are essentially ephemeral in nature. This makes them hard to find, but they are a central documentary source for any study of the publishing business. Substantial exceptions are the annual volumes of <hi rend="i">New Zealand Books in Print</hi>, issued under varying imprints from <date when="1957">1957</date>. Catalogues issued by publishers, usually annually and usually midway through the publishing year, include announcements of recent titles, advance notices of new publications, and often a comprehensive backlist. Intended to be circulated to the trade, and in limited quantities for public consumption, their obsolescent character means that they are often discarded, even by their publishers. Some of those that have survived may have been conserved for extraneous reasons: the <name key="name-000507" type="organisation">Turnbull Library</name> catalogue lists a few, including <hi rend="i">A Caxton Catalogue</hi> (<date when="1938">1938</date>), and some Reed and Whitcombe &amp; Tombs catalogues, but the best collections are probably to be found in library acquisition departments. Government organisations are more likely than commercial publishers to issue consolidated lists or bibliographies of their publications (for example <name key="name-120901" type="person">Elaine Marland</name> and <name key="name-120902" type="person">Keith Pickens</name>'s <hi rend="i">NZCER, 1934-84</hi>, <date when="1985">1985</date>), although Reeds proudly included a comprehensive listing of their output in their two house histories. Whitcombes and Reeds also issued regular newsletters, Whitcombes from the 1930s until about <date when="1970">1970</date> under the title <hi rend="i">Books of Today</hi>. A trade journal, the <hi rend="i">Book Trade Monthly</hi>, appeared between 1979 and 1983 under various titles, latterly as the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Bookseller and Publisher</hi>. Some larger publishers have regularly or occasionally produced in-house newsletters: <name key="name-200282" type="organisation">Longman Paul</name>'s <hi rend="i">Scuttle Butt</hi> is an example. Even more evanescent are publishers' advertisements, fliers, book promotions, and press releases, but any of these which can be found will provide evidence of value to the study of publishing.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N117B1">
            <head>Economics of publishing</head>
            <p>'Publishing is a paradoxical business', remarked the author of the New Zealand Institute of Economic Research's report on the printing and publishing industry, H.M. Oliver, in <date when="1976">1976</date>. Publishers saw themselves as a profession rather than merely a business enterprise, she noted, and the principal criterion of success might not necessarily be profitability. However there is no doubt that at a time of skyrocketing paper prices and other costs <name key="name-200539" type="person">Stanley Unwin</name>'s apophthegm—that a publisher's first duty is to remain solvent—was foremost in their minds. The average salary of someone working in publishing was something like $3,000, Oliver remarked; the desirable print run for general books was probably close to 5,000 copies. The average output of established publishing houses was between 10 and 50 titles per annum, but four publishers of the 18 surveyed produced 600 titles between them, Reeds accounting for about half of these. Publishers expected to make a profit on the sale of the final 25% of an edition—an optimistic estimate compared with <name key="name-200457" type="person">Ray Richards</name>'s in <date when="1973">1973</date>, when he said that only the last 15% of the run would provide any return on the publisher's investment.</p>
            <p>Ten years later, according to the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Official Yearbook</hi>, the average print run of a general book was much the same, having peaked somewhere in the early 1980s, and was declining. Three hundred publishers were now thought to be active, but only about 100 were specialist book importers or publishers. By <date when="1995">1995</date> the average print run was down to 3,000 copies and by <date when="1996">1996</date> it was thought to be approaching 2,000. The <hi rend="i">Yearbook</hi> repeated the same statistics for the number of active publishers, although <hi rend="i">First Edition</hi> in <date when="1995">1995</date> noted a Statistics Department return of 165 (but was able to identify only 64 by name).</p>
            <p>
              <figure xml:id="GriBo102">
                <graphic url="GriBo102.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="GriBo102-g"/>
                <head>A strange coincidence. Two books with the same title published on the same day in <date when="1975">1975</date>; the one on the left went on to two subsequent editions (in 1979 and 1980). The Millwood Press publication on the right was also published in a limited edition of 266 signed copies for $200; the standard issue was priced at $14.95. A further 6 works with the title <hi rend="i">The New Zealanders</hi> have been identified, ranging from Craik's <date when="1830">1830</date> work (about Māori and discovery) to Maurice Shadbolt's collection of short stories, first published in <date when="1959">1959</date> and reissued several times, most recently in <date when="1993">1993</date>. The photographer is unknown but the woman holding the books is identified as Allyson Burgoyne. (Evening Post Collection, Alexander Turnbull Library, reference number F-22718-35MM-EP)</head>
                <figDesc>Black and white photograph</figDesc>
              </figure></p>
            <p>These snapshots of some of the data relating to economic factors in publishing are notable for how much remains outside the frame. The <hi rend="i">Yearbook</hi> noted in <date when="1990">1990</date> that 'no thorough studies have been conducted of the book industry' and collected most of its information from the BPANZ. Official statistics on book production are buried in the Census of Manufacturing in conflated returns for Printing and Publishing. Apart from figures collected by the BPANZ and its predecessors and other professional bodies and published in trade newsletters, there is a lack of available data. BPANZ representations to the Statistics Department over a period of years for more meaningful categorisation of returns appear to have been unavailing. The book trade itself has generally been too busy to spend much time computing or compiling the figures of interest to the student of the economics of New Zealand publishing. Nevertheless publishers in unguarded moments have occasionally let slip useful and revealing details.</p>
            <p><name key="name-200457" type="person">Ray Richards</name>'s frank analysis of the New Zealand publishing situation in <date when="1973">1973</date> ('The man in the middle', <date when="1974">1974</date>) identifies many of the issues central to a study of the New Zealand publishing industry in the era before the advent of the multinational enterprises had really made itself felt. He identifies a number of causes of publishing failure, not neglecting the crucial luck factor, sometimes called Publisher's Flair (or Nose). In the 'small-market, restricted-interest situation' that is the New Zealand book world, he stresses the importance of a strong backlist, and notes the inflation of the economic edition of a book from 1,000 copies in the 1930s to 4,000 in the 1970s. Summaries of statistics from 13 BPANZ members are appended. Any similar picture for later years must be pieced together from fragmentary sources.</p>
            <p>Publishing in New Zealand has sprung from a variety of structures. In earlier years family firms predominated, although they might go elsewhere for additional capital to facilitate expansion. Reeds, for instance, expanded by offering shares to a limited number of directors, staff, booksellers and authors in <date when="1961">1961</date>. Sources of capital for firms may be private investors, a parent institution, a parent company or business group. In recent years the ownership of companies may have changed several times, through takeovers and mergers. The desire of a business conglomerate to divest itself of units not considered to be part of its 'core business' is a current trend which has already had some repercussions in New Zealand. Company structure will depend largely on its funding base and type.</p>
            <p>Information on book sales analysis, the relative turnover of titles from a publisher's backlist and frontlist, comparative sales of overseas and New Zealand titles, overseas sales of books and rights, trade and specialist sales, and analyses of market segments are to be found in publishers' files. Overall statistics for the trade appear intermittently in a variety of sources. Some of these are identified in the section on book buying in Chapter 4 of this guide. W.B. Sutch contributed 'An economic survey' to <name key="name-120205" type="person">R.A. McKay</name>'s <hi rend="i">History of Printing in New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1940">1940</date>), and <name key="name-208782" type="person">Alan Mulgan</name> expressed his opinions in his <date when="1946">1946</date> survey. The only comprehensive census of book publishers, distributors and sellers was conducted in <date when="1987">1987</date>. Some of its results are summarised in the <hi rend="i">Official Yearbook</hi> for <date when="1990">1990</date>.</p>
            <p>A Unesco survey from <date when="1982">1982</date>, <hi rend="i">An International Survey of Book Production During the Last Decades</hi>, records New Zealand book production statistics from 1949 to 1978, during which period New Zealand's annual book production rose from 277 to 2,079 titles. It appears to be unique as a comparative study. Oliver (<date when="1976">1976</date>) includes BPANZ statistics for 1970-74. Average edition size in 1973-74 was 7,430 copies, but no analysis enables this to be broken down into educational and other titles, backlist or new publications. Publishers' cost structures are, however, discussed, a rarer event. Trends in the demand for skilled labour were examined by the <name key="name-024793" type="organisation">Labour Department</name> in a brief survey, <hi rend="i">Printing and Publishing Industry</hi>, in <date when="1984">1984</date>. Examination of Journalists' Union and Editors' Union awards and activities would make an interesting study. <hi rend="i">First Edition</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>) contains a section on book trade statistics which includes a publisher's cost breakdown (sourced to the Book Trade Conference), and a book costing—the formula by which a publisher checks the economic feasibility of issuing a title at a planned retail price (the example given would not see publication).</p>
            <p>The economic history of individual firms may be found in their records. Studies of individual companies (see the section following) provide some financial data but are unlikely to include balance sheets. In the case of active businesses, information on costing, discount structures, profit margins and financial management remains commercially sensitive and is likely to be kept confidential.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div type="section" xml:id="_div2-N1181A" decls="#_div2-N1181A-bibl">
          <head>The publishers</head>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N11825">
            <head>The businesses</head>
            <p>For over 80 years the New Zealand publishing scene was dominated by two firms. In <date when="1882">1882</date> the <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name> bookseller <name key="name-200564" type="person">George Whitcombe</name> combined forces with the printer <name key="name-200520" type="person">George Tombs</name>, thereby controlling the means of production as a printer and having access to the market as a bookseller, an enviable position from which to strike out as a publisher. By the time Whitcombe &amp; Tombs's publishing petered out following <name key="name-209602" type="person">Bertie Whitcombe</name>'s retirement in <date when="1963">1963</date>, their major competitor since the 1930s, A.H. Reed Ltd (better known by its imprint, A.H. &amp; A.W. Reed), was a multinational publisher with an output of 300 titles per annum. Reeds, too, had its beginnings in bookselling—initially in mail-order marketing of religious material—entering publishing in earnest only with a co-production (with the printer Coulls Somerville Wilkie, and hedging their bets with the local university's support) of J.R. Elder's edition of <hi rend="i">The Letters and Journals of <name key="name-208673" type="person">Samuel Marsden</name></hi> in <date when="1932">1932</date>.</p>
            <p>Even the estimated 12 million copies of Whitcombe's story books published between 1908 and 1962 pales beside the unimaginable quantities of material published by the third major player of the era, the Government Printing Office. The Office had its origins in the earliest years of colonial government, in <date when="1842">1842</date>, and after a hiatus from <date when="1847">1847</date> was re-established in Wellington in <date when="1864">1864</date>. Its official function clearly marks it out as a special case but it is also significant as the country's only publisher of major reference works—and contract printer to New Zealand's largest publishing enterprise, the telephone directory.</p>
            <p>Publishing reputations are not made entirely by bulk of output, however. The social ferment of the 1930s was the fertile ground from which a number of significant publishing enterprises sprang, some longer-lasting than others. Aesthetic considerations underlay the enterprises of Harry H. Tombs—son of George—whose serials <hi rend="i">Art in New Zealand</hi> and <hi rend="i">Music in New Zealand</hi>, the annual <hi rend="i">New Zealand Best Poems</hi>, and some ambitiously designed monographs are landmarks whose present reputations might be cold comfort to their hard pressed proprietor who eventually had to give up the publishing business as hopelessly uneconomic.</p>
            <p>Like <name key="name-209478" type="person">Harry Tombs</name>, maintaining its viability with a commercially more robust jobbing printing sideline was the Caxton Press of <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name>. Now of almost legendary status in New Zealand literary history, it first made an impact in <date when="1940">1940</date> with publications by <name key="name-209171" type="person">Frank Sargeson</name> and M.H. Holcroft. The name of <name key="name-208049" type="person">Denis Glover</name> is inextricably linked with this enterprise, as <name key="name-121667" type="person">Bob Lowry</name>'s is with the short-lived <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name> student publication, the <hi rend="i">Phoenix</hi>, perhaps more notable as a literary historical landmark than as a publishing history event. Out of the spirit of the times and the cooperative bookshops set up by the optimistic socialist fellow travellers of the era arose the Progressive Publishing Society (PPS) in <date when="1942">1942</date>, with ambitious plans and some notable authors (including Curnow, Fairburn, Holcroft and Sargeson) and a series, <hi rend="i">New Zealand New Writing</hi>, modelled on <name key="name-017404" type="person">John Lehmann</name>'s <hi rend="i">Penguin New Writing</hi> in the <name key="name-029547" type="place">United Kingdom</name>. The PPS was not notable, however, for successful marketing decisions; and the commercial and political world was about to change again.</p>
            <p>After World War II, Whitcombe &amp; Tombs's publishing successes in readers and schoolbooks were undermined by the ascendancy of the Department of Education's School Publications Branch, as well as by competing firms, notably Reeds. Caxton led in literary publications while Reeds dominated in popular reading. Hamilton bookseller <name key="name-208941" type="person">Blackwood Paul</name>, who had been on the board of the PPS, moved into publishing and on a shoestring budget managed a number of popular successes.</p>
            <p>The University of New Zealand Press was set up in <date when="1947">1947</date> after decades of dogged lobbying by Sir <name key="name-208220" type="person">James Hight</name>. The highlight of the 17 titles it issued before the University's dissolution into its constituent parts in <date when="1962">1962</date> may have been F.H. McDowall's <hi rend="i">Buttermaker's Manual</hi> (2 vols, <date when="1953">1953</date>), although the title best remembered now is probably <name key="name-025098" type="person">Keith Sinclair</name>'s <hi rend="i">Origins of the Maori Wars</hi>. Although other university presses were already established, <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name>'s was the first to become a significant publishing force, from <date when="1966">1966</date> for a time in association with <name key="name-200382" type="organisation">Oxford University Press</name>, followed by Victoria in <date when="1979">1979</date> and Canterbury and Otago in the late 1980s. New Zealand's university presses have branched out from their academic roots and are notable for the general market titles included in their lists.</p>
            <p>Of the 20 New Zealand book publishers listed in Perry's <date when="1952">1952</date> <hi rend="i">New Zealand Writer's Handbook</hi>, only two names (Reed—misleadingly—and Caxton—barely) are recognisably identified with publishers active in New Zealand today, although some others may live on through their lists, now under other imprints. It was in the 1960s that overseas publishing firms began to make an impact on the local scene. William Collins (originally of Glasgow) had had a presence here since <date when="1888">1888</date> and had printed its popular British-originated titles in New Zealand as early as <date when="1943">1943</date>. It did not, however, become a local publisher until the late 1960s.</p>
            <p>Blackwood &amp; <name key="name-121075" type="person">Janet Paul</name>'s absorption into <name key="name-200282" type="organisation">Longman Paul</name> in <date when="1967">1967</date> marked the first 'merger' of local publishing with major overseas interests. Other foreign-owned (i.e. British) firms who entered New Zealand publishing from the late 1960s or early 1970s were Heinemann Educational, Hodder &amp; Stoughton, and <name key="name-200382" type="organisation">Oxford University Press</name> (a comparatively late starter). Through its parent company's ownership of Longman, Penguin absorbed part of a New Zealand list and made a consistent contribution locally from the mid 1980s (its first local venture was a reprint of David Yallop's <hi rend="i">Beyond Reasonable Doubt?</hi>, <date when="1980">1980</date>).</p>
            <p>Another phenomenon of the 1970s was the entry of <name key="name-200201" type="person">Paul Hamlyn</name> into New Zealand publishing, in association with Whitcombe &amp; Tombs, with two substantial series of part-works, <hi rend="i">New Zealand's Heritage</hi> (in 105 parts, 1971-73) and subsequently <hi rend="i">New Zealand's Nature Heritage</hi> (both edited by Ray Knox). Locally these might be seen as drawing on the model of the pictorial survey series <hi rend="i">Making New Zealand</hi>, produced as part of the government's centennial publications programme. However they were also following a worldwide trend of the time. With a high-powered advisory board chaired by J.C. Beaglehole, <hi rend="i">New Zealand's Heritage</hi> claimed to be the first fully-illustrated social history of New Zealand, and at a total of almost 3,000 pages, and with articles by many of the country's leading scholars, it was a significant event. (It included a survey of publishing by M.H. Holcroft in part 97.) There seems to have been no successor to these series (except perhaps for Weetbix cards), perhaps a publishing idea that has fallen out of fashion.</p>
            <p>Local publishers had continued to be active. Reeds had opened an Australian subsidiary but were bought out and dismembered in the 1970s, with the local publishing arm initially becoming <name key="name-200450" type="person">Reed Methuen</name>. In <date when="1979">1979</date> it became part of the aptly-named Octopus group. The imprint has now re-emerged as part of the Anglo-Dutch Reed Elsevier group in the 1990s. Whitcombes merged with the printer Coulls Somerville Wilkie in <date when="1971">1971</date> to become Whitcoulls, but vivisection has seen the backlist sold to Penguin and the portmanteau now adorns only bookshops, presently owned by the same <name key="name-031090" type="place">United States</name> based office products conglomerate which bought GP Print and GP Publishing (the former Government Printing Office before its scandalous privatisation). In <date when="1989">1989</date> the Government Printing Office had been able to claim that it was the largest New Zealand-owned book publisher and distributor.</p>
            <p>Other New Zealand firms—John McIndoe, <name key="name-200509" type="person">Alister Taylor</name>, —had briefer lives, some ceasing through choice, some through economic necessity. The tenacious <name key="name-036076" type="person">Price Milburn</name> and others<name key="name-120815" type="person">Bridget Williams</name> (of <name key="name-200412" type="organisation">Port Nicholson Press</name>, then Allen and Unwin New Zealand, then <name key="name-120815" type="person">Bridget Williams</name> Books and now with Auckland University Press); <name key="name-200030" type="person">David Bateman</name>; <name key="name-200138" type="organisation">Dunmore Press</name> of <name key="name-021386" type="place">Palmerston North</name>; <name key="name-200298" type="person">Ann Mallinson</name> (<name key="name-200299" type="person">Mallinson Rendel</name>); and <name key="name-200459" type="person">Bob Ross</name> and <name key="name-200035" type="person">Helen Benton</name> (currently <name key="name-200507" type="organisation">Tandem Press</name>) are among the relatively long-term survivors of an increasingly competitive environment, where overseas boardroom machinations or trends in business philosophy can wipe out a household name from half a world away.</p>
            <p>The history of Māori language publishing is another story, where factors other than economics have played an important part. From missionary beginnings it has survived 150 years of indifference and manipulation, if not outright suppression. Government and institutional support has enabled the undertaking of some large scale works, from the Māori Bible and the Williamses's <hi rend="i">Dictionary</hi> via <name key="name-208832" type="person">Apirana Ngata</name>'s <hi rend="i">Nga Moteatea</hi> to the <hi rend="i">Dictionary of New Zealand Biography</hi>'s Māori-language series, <hi rend="i">Ngā Tāngata Taumata Rau</hi>. Recently, independent Māori language publishing has re-emerged, with the production of educational and children's books to the fore. The award winning <name key="name-200229" type="organisation">Huia Publishers</name> are a notable example (examined by <name key="name-120865" type="person">Helen McLean</name> in <hi rend="i">Endnotes</hi>, <date when="1997">1997</date>). Most works recently published have been translations, and there is an emerging debate about quality and sources of vocabulary.</p>
            <p><name key="name-120807" type="person">Dennis McEldowney</name>'s stylish survey in the <hi rend="i">Oxford History of New Zealand Literature in English</hi> (<date when="1991">1991</date>, to be updated for early <date when="1998">1998</date> publication) identifies the key businesses in New Zealand's publishing history and adumbrates the changing scene. His footnotes are the researcher's first signposts to an uneven infrastructure of further references. 
                     <name key="name-120960" type="person">Tony Murrow</name> and <name key="name-120804" type="person">Julie McCloy</name> provide brief historical overviews, and <name key="name-121032" type="person">Jo Nicol</name> a paper on Māori publishing, in <hi rend="i">Endnotes</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>). The forthcoming <hi rend="i">Oxford Companion to New Zealand Literature</hi> will also contain entries for the more 'literary' publishers. Specialist publishers in non-literary areas have commonly been overlooked. Such major enterprises as the business information publisher CCH, the medical publisher Adis, and the legal publishers Butterworths (part of <name key="name-200449" type="organisation">Reed Elsevier</name>) and Brookers, are beyond the pale to most chroniclers. Other non-literary types such as <name key="name-200323" type="organisation">Moa Press</name> (now part of <name key="name-200222" type="organisation">Hodder Moa Beckett</name>) and <name key="name-200460" type="organisation">Rugby Publishing</name> have also been politely ignored by the publishing historians.</p>
            <p>Whitcombe &amp; Tombs published no company history, although notes for a planned centennial volume (by A.H. Johnstone) are extensively quoted by Anna and <name key="name-121149" type="person">Max Rogers</name> (<date when="1993">1993</date>). Records of Whitcombe's publishing from 1905 to 1986 are held at the Alexander Turnbull Library (where they were deposited by <name key="name-200399" type="organisation">Penguin Books</name>). Ian McLaren's <hi rend="i">Whitcombe's Story Books</hi> (<date when="1984">1984</date>) is the only systematic study of any aspect of the long-lived firm's output. Reeds produced two celebratory publications, <hi rend="i">The House of Reed</hi> (<date when="1957">1957</date>, written jointly by A.H. and A.W.) and <hi rend="i">The House of Reed, 1957-1967</hi> (<date when="1968">1968</date>), a chronicle of a hugely successful decade, written largely by A.W. Reed. Considerable records, author files and book proofs are now in the <name key="name-000507" type="organisation">Turnbull Library</name> manuscripts collection. <name key="name-200071" type="person">Elizabeth Caffin</name> presented a paper on Reeds' golden age to the History of Print Culture conference in <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> in <date when="1996">1996</date>.</p>
            <p>The records of the enterprising Harry H. Tombs Ltd are held in the <name key="name-000507" type="organisation">Turnbull Library</name> manuscripts collection, as is some Caxton Press material amongst <name key="name-208049" type="person">Denis Glover</name>'s papers. Caxton is one of the <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name> publishers treated in depth in <name key="name-121304" type="person">Noel Waite</name>'s thesis 'Adventure and art' (<date when="1997">1997</date>); the others are Pegasus and Hazard (as well as the more marginal Hawk and Nag's Head presses). <name key="name-120256" type="person">Rachel Barrowman</name> has documented the history of the Progressive Publishing Society in 'Making New Zealand articulate' (<date when="1988">1988</date>) and her book <hi rend="i">A Popular Vision</hi> (<date when="1991">1991</date>). In <date when="1995">1995</date> an exhibition at the National Library Gallery of books published by Blackwood &amp; <name key="name-121075" type="person">Janet Paul</name> was accompanied by a booklet by <name key="name-121075" type="person">Janet Paul</name> and <name key="name-200517" type="person">John Mansfield Thomson</name>, <hi rend="i">Landmarks in New Zealand Publishing</hi>. Some of Blackwood &amp; <name key="name-121075" type="person">Janet Paul</name>'s papers are held at the <name key="name-000507" type="organisation">Turnbull Library</name>, with some restrictions on access. Also restricted are <name key="name-200412" type="organisation">Port Nicholson Press</name> papers and other papers of <name key="name-120815" type="person">Bridget Williams</name> held at the Library.</p>
            <p>Government Printing Office records exist at National Archives, with lacunae caused by the periodic fires that have depleted all government records. <name key="name-121159" type="person">Rachel Salmond</name> examines the earliest years in <hi rend="i">Government Printing in New Zealand, 1840 to 1843</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>) and an overall history was written by <name key="name-018379" type="person">W.A. Glue</name> (<date when="1966">1966</date>). The University of New Zealand Press receives a brief treatment by <name key="name-121069" type="person">Hugh Parton</name> in his history of the University (<date when="1979">1979</date>); an article by J.E. Traue in <hi rend="i">New Zealand Libraries</hi> (<date when="1963">1963</date>) provides a fuller account and a checklist. The Press's papers are at National Archives. <name key="name-120807" type="person">Dennis McEldowney</name> is currently working on the early history of Auckland University Press, and the state of the university presses is surveyed by Nicola Hill and Lis Roche in <hi rend="i">Endnotes</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>).</p>
            <p>Other house histories are few. The publishing house of William Collins issued a booklet to commemorate its centenary in New Zealand as <hi rend="i">Quenching the Thirst for Knowledge</hi> (<date when="1988">1988</date>). It includes a timeline of the company's history in New Zealand, whose milestones include the appointment of <name key="name-200030" type="person">David Bateman</name> as managing director in <date when="1968">1968</date> and <name key="name-200404" type="person">Brian Phillips</name> in <date when="1978">1978</date>. Butterworths devoted a few pages to New Zealand ('the law publisher's paradise') in their <date when="1980">1980</date> history (by <name key="name-120733" type="person">H. Kay Jones</name>) and a subsequent (unpublished) account of their New Zealand activities has been written by Julia Millen. A detailed account of the specialist Wellington publisher <name key="name-200513" type="organisation">Technical Publications</name> is <name key="name-121343" type="person">Francis D. Wootton</name>'s <hi rend="i">There Was a Tide</hi> (<date when="1992">1992</date>) and an article on a similar topic is Hugh Brown's on PSL in <hi rend="i">Endnotes</hi> (<date when="1996">1996</date>). The bare bones of businesses may be discerned in a number of sources: the BPANZ newsletter, <hi rend="i">The Publisher</hi>, includes profiles of publishing firms in many of its issues, and the company listings in <hi rend="i">Book Publishers and Distributors</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>- ) are accompanied by brief descriptions. Authors' handbooks at various times have included lists of publishers with descriptive detail, and publishers are listed in such publications as the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Business Who's Who</hi> (the latest edition is the 38th, <date when="1997">1997</date>) and <hi rend="i">New Zealand Books in Print</hi>.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N11923">
            <head>The people</head>
            <p>The key personnel in publishing are various in their roles: owners and proprietors, managers, editors, accountants, designers, typesetters, sales-persons, and so on. In the 19th century they were likely to be involved in other activities besides book publishing—in allied trades such as printing or bookselling, or in other kinds of business. For researchers seeking, in the first instance, to identify the individuals who have been involved in publishing, general sources such as directories and electoral rolls may be painstakingly combed. Published around the turn of the century, the <hi rend="i">Cyclopedia of New Zealand</hi>, in six volumes divided regionally, provides a useful index of professions and trades under whose heading for 'Printers and Publishers' some of the pioneers will be found. Newspapers are also indexed here.</p>
            <p>In the earlier decades of European settlement in New Zealand after the missionary era, many newspaper proprietors dabbled in publishing. A number of them appear in G.H. Scholefield's <hi rend="i">Dictionary of New Zealand Biography</hi> (<date when="1940">1940</date>), and even more in the first volume (1769-1869) of the <hi rend="i">Dictionary of New Zealand Biography</hi> (<date when="1990">1990</date>), where they can be located through its Categories Index: headings for Commerce, Trades and the Press contain reference to individuals active in publishing. Key individuals in this period include the newspaper publishers and proprietors W.E. Vincent, —mainly political—activities. <name key="name-209029" type="person">Barzillai Quaife</name>, <name key="name-209537" type="person">Julius Vogel</name>, <name key="name-121129" type="person">Samuel Revans</name> and <name key="name-200573" type="person">John Williams</name>on, some of whom are better remembered for their other<name key="name-209679" type="person">Henry Wise</name> the <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> directories magnate, the pamphleteer and controversialist J.G.S. Grant, and Pātara Te Tuhi, editor and publisher of the Māori King's newspaper <hi rend="i">Te Hokioi</hi>, are other notable figures. In the later decades of the 19th century the 'rag-planters', founders of provincial newspapers, proliferated. <name key="name-121548" type="person">Ross Harvey</name>'s work on these individuals includes a substantial number of biographies published in <date when="1993">1993</date> in the <hi rend="i">DNZB</hi>'s second volume (<hi rend="i">1870-1900</hi>). Other prominent figures who appear in this volume are the publishers J.R. Blair, W.R. Bock (of Bock &amp; Cousins, lithographers), Henry Brett, G.T. Chapman and the <name key="name-008123" type="place">Wanganui</name> publisher A.D. Willis.</p>
            <p>It is not until the early 20th century that the founders of the modern publishing industry appear. <hi rend="i">Who's Who in New Zealand</hi>, published from <date when="1908">1908</date>, is the standard biographical reference for succinct information about individuals. <name key="name-200564" type="person">George Whitcombe</name> and <name key="name-200520" type="person">George Tombs</name> left no memoirs, but vivid impressions are recalled by former employees in Anna and <name key="name-121149" type="person">Max Rogers</name>'s <hi rend="i">Turning the Pages</hi> (<date when="1993">1993</date>). <name key="name-209602" type="person">Bertie Whitcombe</name>, George's son, a fixture at Whitcombe &amp; Tombs for more than 70 years (managing director for 41 of these, from his father's death in <date when="1917">1917</date>) is the central figure in an unpublished centennial history by Arthur Johnstone, who joined the firm as office boy in <date when="1909">1909</date>. <name key="name-120807" type="person">Dennis McEldowney</name> has contributed an entry on <name key="name-209602" type="person">Bertie Whitcombe</name> to the <hi rend="i">DNZB</hi> (vol.3, <hi rend="i">1901-20</hi>, <date when="1996">1996</date>). Whitcombe's editor from 1901 to 1907, <name key="name-208220" type="person">James Hight</name>, is better known in his academic context. His successors <name key="name-200482" type="person">Arnold Shrimpton</name>, <name key="name-200502" type="person">Carl Straubel</name> and <name key="name-200266" type="person">David Lawson</name> are more elusive, perhaps partly a consequence of the retiring, or at least back room, nature of the editorial profession.</p>
            <p>A.H. Reed founded his Sunday School Supply Stores in <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> in <date when="1907">1907</date>, although he did not begin publishing pamphlets until <date when="1922">1922</date> and ventured into books ten years later. He and his nephew A.W. (Clif, short for Wyclif) were better historians than their erstwhile competitors Messrs Whitcombe and Tombs. Besides the company chronicles mentioned already, A.H. produced an <hi rend="i">Autobiography</hi> (<date when="1967">1967</date>), and the prolific Clif (author of 160 books by <date when="1966">1966</date>, to Uncle's 85) wrote a memoir of A.H., <hi rend="i">Young Kauri</hi> (<date when="1975">1975</date>), and <hi rend="i">Books are My Business</hi> (<date when="1966">1966</date>) for a British publisher's careers series. <name key="name-200071" type="person">Elizabeth Caffin</name> has contributed an entry on A.W. to the <hi rend="i">DNZB</hi> (vol.4, <hi rend="i">1921-40</hi>, forthcoming). Both A.H. and A.W. have entries in A.H. McLintock's <hi rend="i">Encyclopaedia of New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1966">1966</date>), the only publishers who do.</p>
            <p>To the activists of the new socialist and radical movements in the early 20th century, the printing and publishing of their message was a central concern. These include the Romanian-born W.P. Black and radical printing tradesmen and unionists J.T. Paul and R.S. Ross, all of whom appear in the <hi rend="i">DNZB</hi> (vol.3, <hi rend="i">1901-20</hi>). The entrepreneur publishers <name key="name-209602" type="person">Bertie Whitcombe</name> and A.H. Reed sit perhaps uncomfortably alongside them.</p>
            <p>Further information on individuals is to be found in general biographical sources such as the Alexander Turnbull Library's <hi rend="i">Biographical Index on Microfiche</hi> and <hi rend="i">New Zealand Biographical Clippings, 1890-1988</hi> (also on microfiche, both <date when="1997">1997</date>), the National Library's later computerised indexes, and G.R. Macdonald's 'Dictionary of Canterbury biographies' at the Canterbury Museum (<hi rend="i">Index</hi> on microfiche, <date when="1987">1987</date>). Much biographical information can be gleaned from trade publications, the papers and records of publishing houses and the histories of firms and organisations. The Reed histories (1957 and 1968) contain lists of some staff, as does <name key="name-018379" type="person">Glue</name>'s <hi rend="i">History of the Government Printing Office</hi> (<date when="1966">1966</date>). Other worthwhile sources of information on individuals include Rogers (<date when="1993">1993</date>), <hi rend="i">The Oxford History of New Zealand Literature in English</hi>, <hi rend="i">The Book of New Zealand Women</hi> (<date when="1991">1991</date>)—see the subject index under 'Literature and Scholarship' for editors—and the forthcoming <hi rend="i">Oxford Companion to New Zealand Literature</hi>. The Dictionary of New Zealand Biography's database, accessible to researchers on application, contains data on many individuals who do not find a place in the published volumes. The fourth volume in the series, to appear in <date when="1998">1998</date>, will include some of the figures who first made their mark in the third and fourth decades of the 20th century. The diverse sampling of those involved in publishing includes <name key="name-207415" type="person">Leo Bensemann</name>, <name key="name-208049" type="person">Denis Glover</name>, <name key="name-121667" type="person">Bob Lowry</name>, Harry H. Tombs, <name key="name-208381" type="person">Henry Kelliher</name> and the aerial photography publishing pioneer <name key="name-209611" type="person">Leo White</name>.</p>
            <p>People in the broader cultural sphere who had an influence on aspects of the development of New Zealand publishing include the prolific scribblers <name key="name-207731" type="person">James Cowan</name>, <name key="name-207252" type="person">Johannes Andersen</name>, Pat Lawlor and <name key="name-207424" type="person">Elsdon Best</name>. All have collections of papers in the Alexander Turnbull Library. Women in publishing have been less effectively documented, despite the preponderance of women editors and publishers in many present day firms. Sources include the <hi rend="i">Herstory</hi> diary in general and the diary for <date when="1988">1988</date> in particular, and articles in <hi rend="i">Broadsheet</hi> by R. Taylor (<date when="1982">1982</date>) and <name key="name-120738" type="person">P. Joyce</name> (<date when="1985">1985</date>). (A cumulative name and subject index to <hi rend="i">Herstory</hi> was compiled by <name key="name-121079" type="person">Kathryn Peacocke</name> in <date when="1990">1990</date>.)</p>
            <p>Publishing's denizens may wield unbridled power in their shadowy enclaves but unless their reflected glory may sell a book they are inclined to shun the spotlight. Trade literature is the place to find out about these enigmatic figures. Since <date when="1994">1994</date> a series of 'Profiles from the Trade' compiled by Whitireia Publishing students has been an occasional feature of the BPANZ's newsletter <hi rend="i">The Publisher</hi>. Those profiled so far have included <name key="name-200208" type="person">Wendy Harrex</name>, <name key="name-200055" type="person">Daphne Brasell</name>, <name key="name-200206" type="person">Tony Harkins</name> and <name key="name-200457" type="person">Ray Richards</name>.</p>
            <p>The richest lode for information about people in publishing is still largely unexploited. Many of the best sources of historical, practical and biographical information are still active in the trade. <name key="name-200457" type="person">Ray Richards</name> began at Reeds in <date when="1936">1936</date> as the office boy, became managing director and chairman of the firm's Australian subsidiary, left in <date when="1976">1976</date> to set up New Zealand's first literary agency and became the first executive director of the BPANZ. Now more or less retired from publishing (though still producing <hi rend="i">Pony Club Manuals</hi> with sales of over 100,000) he maintains his agency with over 100 clients. <name key="name-036075" type="person">Hugh Price</name>, formerly manager of Sydney University Press and proprietor of <name key="name-036076" type="person">Price Milburn</name>, continues to publish occasionally as Gondwanaland Press and assiduously collects and records information on New Zealand imprints. Others with long careers or broad experience include <name key="name-005126" type="person">Fergus Barrowman</name>, <name key="name-200030" type="person">David Bateman</name>, <name key="name-200031" type="person">Graham Beattie</name>, <name key="name-200035" type="person">Helen Benton</name>, John and Geoff Blackwell, <name key="name-200071" type="person">Elizabeth Caffin</name>, <name key="name-200081" type="person">Christine Cole Catley</name>, <name key="name-200107" type="person">Jane Connor</name>, <name key="name-200148" type="person">David Elworthy</name>, <name key="name-200194" type="person">John Griffin</name>, <name key="name-200208" type="person">Wendy Harrex</name>, <name key="name-200214" type="person">David Heap</name>, <name key="name-200217" type="person">Bert Hingley</name>, <name key="name-200255" type="person">Ros King</name>, <name key="name-200273" type="person">David Ling</name>, <name key="name-200298" type="person">Ann Mallinson</name>, <name key="name-200404" type="person">Brian Phillips</name>, <name key="name-200437" type="person">Wendy Pye</name>, <name key="name-200459" type="person">Bob Ross</name>, <name key="name-200493" type="person">Rosemary Stagg</name>, <name key="name-200509" type="person">Alister Taylor</name>, <name key="name-200530" type="person">Brian Turner</name>, <name key="name-200550" type="person">Geoff Walker</name> and <name key="name-120815" type="person">Bridget Williams</name>. Publishers may decry the desultory dabblings of effete academics and frivolous amateurs on the more salubrious margins of their risky and sometimes cut-throat business but few have had the inclination or the time to tell the story themselves. The researcher has a rich field for exploration.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div type="section" xml:id="_div2-N119E2">
          <head>General and regional studies</head>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div2-N119E2-1">
            <p>No comprehensive general study has yet been made of New Zealand publishing. <name key="name-120807" type="person">Dennis McEldowney</name>'s essay in <hi rend="i">The Oxford History of New Zealand Literature in English</hi> (<date when="1991">1991</date>) is the closest to a general survey. <name key="name-120609" type="person">Penny Griffith</name>'s preliminary bibliography, <hi rend="i">Printing and Publishing in New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1974">1974</date>), includes monographs published between 1890 and 1960. <name key="name-208941" type="person">Blackwood Paul</name> surveyed 'Publishing and bookselling' for A.H. McLintock's <hi rend="i">Encyclopaedia of New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1966">1966</date>), and <name key="name-200506" type="person">Gordon Tait</name> contributed seven pages on New Zealand to <hi rend="i">The Book Trade of the World, Volume II</hi> (<date when="1976">1976</date>). <name key="name-200457" type="person">Ray Richards</name> takes a practical view in 'The man in the middle' (<date when="1974">1974</date>). Some historical treatment is to be found in the publishing research papers by <name key="name-120960" type="person">Tony Murrow</name> and <name key="name-120804" type="person">Julie McCloy</name> in <hi rend="i">Endnotes</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>). <hi rend="i">Working Titles: Books That Shaped New Zealand</hi>, ed. <name key="name-120257" type="person">Susan Bartel</name> (<date when="1993">1993</date>), the catalogue of an exhibition held at the National Library of New Zealand, provides an illustrated but necessarily selective range of publications which have been influential for New Zealanders. <name key="name-005126" type="person">Fergus Barrowman</name> briefly analyses fiction production from <date from="1979" to="1994">1979 to 1994</date> in his introduction to <hi rend="i">The Picador Anthology of Contemporary New Zealand Fiction</hi> (<date when="1996">1996</date>) and notes the contribution that publishing history has yet to make to the study of New Zealand literature.</p>
            <p>Publishing in New Zealand was initially concerned with producing utilitarian works. As the settlers were able to move from more immediate practical concerns—taming the land, providing shelter and food—so publishing altered, from publishing as an auxiliary activity of printers, to publishing as a separate specific activity. This is virgin territory for print culture historians and it seems especially significant to more carefully distinguish when the distinction between publishers, and publishing as an offshoot of printing, became clear cut in the New Zealand context. Also essential to explore is the role of publishers based elsewhere (notably London) who were closely identified with New Zealand. Aspects of the relationship between the British and New Zealand publishing trade are noted in Luke Trainor's contribution to this chapter about colonial editions and their role in New Zealand.</p>
            <p><name key="name-110358" type="person">McEldowney</name> indicates another factor which needs closer examination, that of the nature of what was published and its change from works of a practical nature to an output covering a wider span. No studies have yet been made of this and the balance needs to be further explored: an analysis of imprints listed in Bagnall's retrospective national bibliography volumes is a possible starting point for the earlier periods.</p>
            <p>Few regional studies of publishing in New Zealand exist. More are needed; they are especially important for the 19th century before the communications infrastructure was sufficiently developed for New Zealand to be considered as a single unit. K.A. Coleridge's work on early publishing and printing in Wellington is a notable exception. Her contribution in this guide on regional publishing in Wellington, and <name key="name-200196" type="person">George Griffiths</name>'s on Otago, suggest what needs to be done for other regions. Each takes a different approach to this topic: Coleridge suggests what needs to be studied to develop a fuller picture, whereas Griffiths has already done some of this detailed work for the Otago region and so can present a fuller description.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N11A1D" decls="#_div3-N11A1D-bibl">
            <head>Colonial editions</head>
            <p>Colonial editions at special prices were a form of British publishing of, chiefly, fiction for the colonial markets. Study of the system offers a window on the British dominance of book culture in New Zealand until the third quarter of the 20th century and what that meant for local print culture.</p>
            <p>The classic form of the colonial edition is exemplified by Rolf Boldrewood's <hi rend="i">A Colonial Reformer</hi> (London, <date when="1890">1890</date>), number 116 in the <hi rend="i">Macmillan's Colonial Library series</hi>, which began in <date when="1886">1886</date>. This is a copy of a novel purchased in New Zealand and its preliminary pages have on it the words 'This Edition is intended for circulation only in <name key="name-005952" type="place">India</name> and the British Colonies'. In form the book was like its British equivalent and was part of the same printing (indeed it became common for the sheets to be sold among publishers who then bound them for their own colonial series). Still this book, like almost all of its kind, was cheaper than the British version both in appearance—it had green cloth—and its noticeably lower sale price in New Zealand. British publishers delivered it to exporters at perhaps 50% of the price at which it was sold in New Zealand.</p>
            <p>As this suggests, the significance of the colonial edition was not so much in any differences in production, which became small after World War I, but rather in its place in the marketing of British books, with all that meant for the colonial connection. Nineteenth-century novels, in three volumes or one, were too expensive for mass sale in New Zealand or other colonies. Local booksellers, agents and wholesalers needed the inducement of a cheap edition, extended terms of credit and—an important point—access to the most recent fiction. The colonial edition met this need. It also suited British print capitalism of the late 19th century by providing a facility for extended and cheap production, linked to heightened international competition where safe colonial markets were of benefit.</p>
            <p>The first book issued in <hi rend="i">Macmillan's Colonial Library</hi> was Lady Barker's <hi rend="i">Station Life in New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1886">1886</date>). Boldrewood, the popular Australian novelist, and Barker (Mary Broome) did not, however, provide representative titles; most of the offering was popular British fiction put on the market at one title each fortnight from 1886 to 1913. Other British publishers also produced colonial editions: Bell was prominent, with 35 agents in New Zealand by <date when="1901">1901</date>, as was Methuen with its editions of Kipling; some were paper bound, some cloth, some drab, like Macmillan, some gaudy with imperial symbols. The authors who were colonial, either by present or former residence, were only a sprinkling, regarded by publishers as interchangeable among their various colonies in providing frontier adventure in exotic settings. This may be seen from the reports of publishers' readers on New Zealand and on other colonial manuscripts submitted to them.</p>
            <p><name key="name-121038" type="person">Simon Nowell-Smith</name>'s <hi rend="i">International Copyright Law and the Publisher in the Reign of Queen Victoria</hi> (<date when="1968">1968</date>) alerted students to the importance of the colonial edition. The publisher <name key="name-102641" type="person">John Murray</name> was first in the field with his <hi rend="i">Colonial and Home Library</hi> (<date when="1843">1843</date>). It was triggered by British Copyright and Customs Acts passed from 1842 to 1847 which attempted to provide protection for British books throughout the empire. Although an interesting precursor, it did not have that key feature of later colonial editions, including Murray's own, that volumes were not to be sold in <name key="name-005976" type="place">Britain</name>. A nearer analogy is provided by <hi rend="i">Bentley's Empire Library</hi> (1878-81) and <hi rend="i">Colonial Library</hi> (from <date when="1885">1885</date>) which developed in conjunction with <name key="name-001298" type="place">Melbourne</name> publisher George Robertson and his London agent, E.A. Petherick, another Australian.</p>
            <p>The trans-Tasman connection was important for colonial editions. British publishers regarded Australia and New Zealand as one market area, their branches and agents covering both. Wholesale and retail booksellers and publishers such as Robertson and Angus &amp; Robertson of Sydney, operated in New Zealand, just as Whitcombe &amp; Tombs established a <name key="name-001298" type="place">Melbourne</name> office. The New South Wales Bookstall Co. under A.C. Rowlandson published cheap local fiction which circulated well in New Zealand, reminding us that neither British publishers, nor colonial editions, had a total predominance. This framework gives added relevance to the recent and most complete study of the colonial edition, <name key="name-120727" type="person">Graeme Johanson</name>'s Monash University doctoral thesis 'A study of colonial editions in Australia 1843-1972' (<date when="1995">1995</date>).</p>
            <p>There is some evidence that the Bentley initiative, as well as the Macmillan one and those that followed in the late 19th century, were influenced by fear of <name key="name-031090" type="place">United States</name> competition, both legitimate and illegitimate. Although world copyright was foreshadowed by the <date when="1886">1886</date> Berne Convention, the <name key="name-031090" type="place">United States</name> did not subscribe to the general exchange of the protection of original work of national authors. British publishers, such as Macmillan, set up <name key="name-031090" type="place">United States</name> branches to meet the provisions of <name key="name-031090" type="place">United States</name> copyright and to facilitate sales, and indeed some colonial editions were printed in the <name key="name-031090" type="place">United States</name>. However, although there are expressions of concern about American pirate editions circulating in New Zealand, for example a <name key="name-031090" type="place">United States</name> edition of Mrs Henry Wood's popular novel <hi rend="i">East Lynne</hi> (<date when="1880">1880</date>) sold in <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name> at 1s 6d when the British price was 7s 6d, the evidence is fragmentary.</p>
            <p>Whatever the truth, Johanson provides evidence of a striking increase in book sales by British publishers to Australia and New Zealand in the late 19th and early 20th centuries. He suggests that the volume of British book exports to Australia had by <date when="1914">1914</date> increased by 2.6 times the <date when="1893">1893</date> level, and raises the possibility of a proportionate increase for fiction, which might have been 20% of the total. Although it is not certain that this translates into the sale of colonial editions in Australia, let alone New Zealand where the calculations have not been done, Johanson makes a convincing case for the importance of colonial editions in Australia, and the shared market area suggests that the same would be true for New Zealand.</p>
            <p>The impact of World War I on colonial editions and British book exports to New Zealand is tolerably clear. Shipping was severely interrupted, costs of production rose with higher material expenses and wages, and binding costs, so important to colonial editions, trebled. Hardback colonial editions rose from 3s 6d to 6s and paperback editions were not produced. The formal differences between the British edition at 7s 6d and the local at 6s were reduced to a stamp notifying that they were colonial editions; the emphasis was now on the pricing arrangement, 'colonial terms'. British book exports to New Zealand fell sharply and the emphasis in the 1920s was on the protection of the booksellers' margins.</p>
            <p>New Zealand had, in proportion to population, a large number of booksellers. The Booksellers' Association, formed in <date when="1921">1921</date>, organised effectively to defend margins against, on one hand, the higher British prices and, on the other, the competition from drapers' stores. Overall, they were in a position analogous to the British book trade 20 or 30 years before and sought the same solution, a Net Book Agreement, to ensure that there was a schedule of prices without discounts enforced by agreement of the British publishers and the New Zealand booksellers. The Booksellers' Association helped form the Australian and New Zealand Booksellers' Association (1924-31) to present a united face to the publishers. Typically, they protested about libraries purchasing colonial editions direct from London, but they also demanded from British publishers' branches in Australia, such as the Australasian Publishing Co., the right of New Zealand booksellers to buy direct from London rather than getting their books from Sydney. In <date when="1923">1923</date> they asked the Publishers Association in <name key="name-005976" type="place">Britain</name> to intervene to prevent exporters directly sending colonial editions to buyers in New Zealand at cut prices. By the end of the decade a fixed schedule of prices was enforced by local booksellers and British publishers. One aim was to have the books sell in Australia at British retail prices. Colonial editions were excluded since they cost less in Australia than in <name key="name-005976" type="place">Britain</name>. Colonial editions were only a part of the total of British books, but they had over many years set the pattern whereby recent colonial fiction retailed in New Zealand at or below the British retail price, and the export price from <name key="name-005976" type="place">Britain</name> was about 50% of the sale price in New Zealand.</p>
            <p>When the <name key="name-007707" type="place">Edinburgh</name> publishers, William Blackwood, produced two novels with Australian settings by Miles Franklin (Brent of Bin-Bin) in 1929-30, they set a price for T.C. Lothian, their agents who travelled New Zealand, of 3s 3d and a sale price of 6s. Lothian took its 10% and country booksellers would buy from wholesalers but there was a substantial basis here for an alliance between local booksellers and publishers at 'Home', especially when the British retail price was 7s 6d.</p>
            <p>The solidity of this linkage in the book trade is indicated by the way in
                     <figure xml:id="GriBo116"><graphic url="GriBo116.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="GriBo116-g"/><head>This well-decorated display stand, presumably at a local trade exhibition, dates from about <date when="1920">1920</date>, the year the Brett Printing and Publishing Co. became a public company. The photographer is unknown. The Auckland business was developed by Sir <name key="name-207496" type="person">Henry Brett</name> (1843-1927) from <date when="1870">1870</date> when he bought into the <hi rend="i">Evening Star</hi>, and went on to become known for a number of popular guidebooks and almanacs, such as <hi rend="i">Brett's Colonists' Guide</hi>. Brett's biography in volume 2 of the <hi rend="i">Dictionary of New Zealand Biography</hi> (<date when="1993">1993</date>) provides more detail of his achievements, and notes that in <date when="1929">1929</date> the company bought out the Lyttelton Times Company to form New Zealand Newspapers.(Alexander Turnbull Library, Wellington, NZ, reference number F-125518-1/2-)</head><figDesc>Black and white photograph
                        </figDesc></figure>which it survived the storms of the 1930s: the Depression, a period of Australian tariffs on books to protect local printing, and devaluation of the pound. Colonial editions, now termed empire editions, or later overseas editions, did not have their previous formal prominence. Some publishers, Murray and Macmillan for example, continued with overseas editions, while others used the <name key="name-200443" type="organisation">Readers Union</name> which from <date when="1935">1935</date> published for distribution in the dominions. But the underpinning of 'colonial terms' continued and, as R.J.L. Kingsford in <hi rend="i">The Publishers Association 1896-1946</hi> (<date when="1970">1970</date>) makes plain, British publishers regarded New Zealand and Australia as their exclusive market areas. There is no work on New Zealand equivalent to Johanson's, although the matter is dealt with in part in Anna and <name key="name-121149" type="person">Max Rogers</name>'s <hi rend="i">Turning the Pages</hi> (<date when="1993">1993</date>) and by <name key="name-120807" type="person">Dennis McEldowney</name> (<date when="1991">1991</date>). There is also valuable material in <hi rend="i">The Book in Australia</hi> ed. D.H. Borchardt and W. Kirsop (<date when="1988">1988</date>).</p>
            <p>Johanson (<date when="1995">1995</date>) quotes a report for British publishers in <date when="1929">1929</date>, 'the phrase "colonial edition" connote(d) not necessarily a distinctive format of a novel, but merely the practice of selling the ordinary English edition at considerably reduced rates (of a discount of 50%) for export purposes'. He traces the colonial edition through to its demise with the end of resale price maintenance in Australia in <date when="1972">1972</date>. Before then, however, the writing was on the wall. In <date when="1946">1946</date>, publisher A.W. Reed remarked that 'the dice are loaded against the New Zealander in his own country'. In Australia a former publisher, P.R. Stephenson, commented in <date when="1962">1962</date> that 'Australia remains a colonial dependency of <name key="name-005976" type="place">Britain</name> . . . In so far as the mind of a nation is conditioned by reading matter, the minds of Australians are conditioned 90% by imported books' (Trainor, <date when="1996">1996</date>, Trainor, <date when="1997">1997</date>). Similar issues may be raised concerning the impact of colonial editions on New Zealand authors. Some were published under this system and enjoyed a circulation that they might never have secured from local publication—Boldrewood provides an Australian example—but national literature may have been stunted by the British dominance.</p>
            <p>Colonial editions are an obvious agenda item for the study of print culture. Their significance will not be known until the detailed work is done, including that on periodicals and readership. Then we shall be better placed to understand the longstanding dominance of British books, the internal dynamics that made that possible in New Zealand, and what that might have meant for the colonisation of the New Zealand mind.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N11AAD" decls="#_div3-N11AAD-bibl">
            <head>Regional publishing: Wellington</head>
            <p>There has been virtually no work on patterns of publishing within the Wellington region, apart from the brief survey article by Coleridge, 'Printing and publishing in Wellington, New Zealand, in the 1840s and 1850s' (<date when="1986">1986</date>), which is primarily statistical in nature. <name key="name-120807" type="person">McEldowney</name> (<date when="1991">1991</date>) touches on the localised character of a number of the publishers that he discusses, but this must be extracted from the general discussion in the text. This section examines the studies that need to be undertaken to present a fuller picture of patterns of publishing within the Wellington region.</p>
            <p>The first need for any study of regional publishing is to identify the works and the publishers. Item by item scanning of <hi rend="i">The New Zealand National Bibliography to <date when="1960">1960</date></hi>, ed. A.G. Bagnall (1969-85), and of the annual volumes of the 'Current National Bibliography' (1961-65), and <hi rend="i">New Zealand National Bibliography</hi> (1968-83), will provide a comprehensive list which can then be sifted to identify the specifically regional publishers, as distinct from Wellington-based national publishers such as the Government Printing Office. Assistance can be found in the bibliography compiled by <name key="name-120821" type="person">Hilda McDonnell</name>, <hi rend="i">Wellington Books</hi> (<date when="1992">1992</date>), covering Wellington City, the Hutt Valley, Porirua City, and the Kapiti Coast. McDonnell's bibliography reveals the range of the very many specialist works with a distinctively regional or local character published by organisations such as schools, churches and local history associations. It does not, however, cover non-historical works, such as poetry or educational material, which are also published by very localised specialist publishers. Searching by place of publication in electronic databases, such as the catalogues of some New Zealand libraries, will also assist.</p>
            <p>Publishers can be identified through business directories, such as the <hi rend="i">Universal Business Directory</hi> (<date when="1948">1948</date>- ) and other directories which are listed in Don Hansen's <hi rend="i">The Directory Directory</hi> (<date when="1994">1994</date>). This exercise will identify a number of publishers based in Wellington, but will miss many of the small part-time and one-person operations which were sometimes significant commercial publishers in specialised areas. For the earlier years, up to perhaps <date when="1930">1930</date>, it will be desirable to also identify the printers in this way, since nearly all except the largest publishers were chiefly printers or booksellers, possibly acting on commission from the author.</p>
            <p>Once publications have been identified, reviews of them may provide further information about the publishers and their activities. Reviews can be located by using the <hi rend="i">Index to New Zealand Periodicals</hi> (1940-86), <hi rend="i">Index New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1987">1987</date>- ), and the specifically business index <hi rend="i">Newzindex</hi> (<date when="1979-10">October 1979</date>- ). For the period before <date when="1940">1940</date> the only universally applicable method of locating relevant articles is by direct searching of the newspapers and periodicals, although some individual titles have been indexed (often selectively) in the Alexander Turnbull Library and other institutions.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N11AEE" decls="#_div3-N11AEE-bibl">
            <head>Regional publishing: Otago</head>
            <p><name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name>'s economic vigour enabled it to dominate southern publishing in the 19th century and lead the field in New Zealand. Of the 550 items listed in the <hi rend="i">New Zealand National Bibliography</hi> as being published south of the Waitaki River to <date when="1890">1890</date>, 90% came out of <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name>. Few of them carried a publisher's imprint, 10% carried no imprint at all, and most were attributed to a printer: 67 items for the Otago Daily Times, Mills &amp; Dick 65, Fergusson &amp; Mitchell 38, and so on. Printing in smaller towns was confined almost entirely to local newspaper offices.</p>
            <p>In subject matter, religion (66 titles) headed the list, publications on evolution, free thought and spiritualism swelling the total to 88 (several titles, fitting more than one category, have been counted into each category). Verse (31), fiction (17), and 'general literature' produced 89; local bodies and amenities 56, commercial 44, education 36, and politics 32. Clubs and societies, and personal pamphlets each produced 24. Such modern preoccupations as women, Māori and sport together barely reached double figures.</p>
            <p>Local bodies, companies and organisations issued many of the items, and so did private individuals—mostly in testimonials, petitions and pamphlets, but also in more ambitious works. <name key="name-121033" type="person">Victor Nicourt</name>, French master at Otago Boys' High School, published the <hi rend="i">Otago French Primer for Beginners</hi> on his own behalf in <date when="1866">1866</date>. The most prolific individual publisher, so prolific that he distorts the statistics, was J.G.S. Grant, who pumped out 60 literary, political and philosophical pamphlets.</p>
            <p>Though some Otago writers had work published abroad, there was a noticeable willingness to publish within the local community, for the gold-rushes enabled enterprising booksellers and printers to reach an adequate market. Title pages seldom stated when bookseller or printer was also doubling as publisher, but in some cases the distinction is clear. <name key="name-123264" type="person">Ben Farjeon</name>'s <date when="1866">1866</date> novel <hi rend="i">Grif: A Story of Colonial Life</hi> was issued by '<name key="name-200212" type="person">William Hay</name>, Publisher, Princes Street'; and the title-page of J.T. Thomson's <hi rend="i">Rambles with a Philosopher</hi> (<date when="1867">1867</date>) and the verso in John Barr's <hi rend="i">The Old Identities</hi> (<date when="1879">1879</date>) credit Mills, Dick &amp; Co. as both publisher and printer.</p>
            <p>Booksellers such as Hay, J. Wilkie, <name key="name-200227" type="person">James Horsburgh</name>, <name key="name-200053" type="person">Joseph Braithwaite</name> and R.T. Wheeler developed publishing as a sideline. Horsburgh leaned towards religious and prohibition titles, but also issued Professor Black's <hi rend="i">Chemistry for the Goldfields</hi> (<date when="1885">1885</date>); Braithwaite favoured the Freethinkers. Wilkie, in 1888-89, published five competent works of fiction by four different authors, all using pseudonyms.</p>
            <p>Surviving information on print runs suggests that 19th-century publishing in <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> could easily be underestimated. Salmond's <hi rend="i">The Reign of Grace</hi> (Horsburgh, <date when="1888">1888</date>) went through five editions, each of 1,000, in a year; Marshall's <hi rend="i">Homeopathic Guide</hi>, issued by a local pharmacist in <date when="1884">1884</date>, had a print run of 5,000; and J.F. Neil's <hi rend="i">New Zealand Family Herb Doctor</hi> (<date when="1889">1889</date>) reached three editions and 5,000 copies by <date when="1891">1891</date>.</p>
            <p><name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> publishing did not end with books and pamphlets, for newspapers and periodicals abounded. More surprising was the city's investment in directories. Local directories had already been issued before the 1870s by Lambert, Harnett, Mackay and Wise. But Wise's <hi rend="i">New Zealand Post Office Directory</hi> (<date when="1872">1872</date>) laid the foundations of an empire which took in New Zealand and parts of Australia. <name key="name-200499" type="person">John Stone</name>, who entered the field in <date when="1884">1884</date> and was outstandingly successful with his Otago-Southland directories, also serviced North Island markets.</p>
            <p>Though the bookseller R.J. Stark issued Thomson's <hi rend="i">A New Zealand Naturalist's Calendar</hi> in <date when="1909">1909</date>, southern publishing in the early 20th century generally depended on printers. Newspaper offices such as the Southland Times, Gore Publishing Co. and the two Oamaru newspapers frequently issued in pamphlet form material from their own columns, and the Otago Daily Times published many notable regional histories: <hi rend="i">Memories of the Life of J.F.H. Wohlers</hi> (<date when="1895">1895</date>), Gilkison's <hi rend="i">Early Days in Central Otago</hi> (<date when="1930">1930</date>), Pyke's <hi rend="i">Early Gold Discoveries</hi> (<date when="1962">1962</date>), and the three-volume <hi rend="i">Advance Guard</hi> (1973-75), before its publishing department stuttered to a close.</p>
            <p>The rise of Whitcombe &amp; Tombs changed the regional pattern considerably. <name key="name-200564" type="person">George Whitcombe</name>, bookseller, and <name key="name-200520" type="person">George Tombs</name>, printer, merged their independent <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name> businesses in <date when="1883">1883</date> then took over a branch of Fergusson and Mitchell in <date when="1890">1890</date>, creating a base in <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name>. <name key="name-209602" type="person">Bertie Whitcombe</name>, general manager from <date when="1911">1911</date>, opened bookshops throughout Australasia and soon dominated New Zealand publishing, particularly in children's books.</p>
            <p>Whitcombe's success, coinciding with a developing New Zealand identity, offered an example for other firms to emulate. Two such—Coulls Somerville Wilkie and the House of Reed—had <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> origins. The economic situation after World War I had caused disarray in the city's bookselling and printing trades. J. Wilkie and Co., taken over by the Somerville family in <date when="1894">1894</date>, produced Wilson's <hi rend="i">Reminiscences of the Early Settlement</hi> (<date when="1912">1912</date>), but in <date when="1922">1922</date> amalgamated with Coulls, Culling &amp; Co. to create the enlarged printing firm of Coulls Somerville Wilkie. As for the book trade, the only survivors in <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> were Whitcombe &amp; Tombs, A.H. Reed and Newbold's secondhand bookshop. Reed, then a wholesaler of devotional literature, formed a partnership with his nephew and occupied a gap left by the financial collapse of the Bible Depot.</p>
            <p>In <date when="1932">1932</date> Coulls Somerville Wilkie and Reed jointly published <name key="name-208673" type="person">Samuel Marsden</name>'s letters and journals on behalf of the University of Otago. Coulls Somerville Wilkie, more conscious of good design than many contemporaries, continued in book work until after World War II, but remained essentially printers. The two Reeds, however, became increasingly involved in authorship and publishing, and their <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> operation laid the foundation for a national publishing firm.</p>
            <p>Early in <date when="1946">1946</date>, two years before the centenary of the Otago settlement, a special committee commissioned a history of the province, expanding the concept to include 20 district histories under the general direction of A.H. McLintock. The project was outstandingly successful: 16 ancillary titles eventually appeared, totalling some 25,000 copies; a volume in matching format was commissioned by Western Southland; McLintock added <hi rend="i">The Port of Otago</hi> (<date when="1951">1951</date>); and the Otago Daily Times ran a novel-writing competition which produced Georgina McDonald's <hi rend="i">Grand Hills for Sheep</hi> (<date when="1949">1949</date>). The body of Otago history almost doubled overnight. Unfilled gaps became apparent and the concept of publishing by community committee showed how those gaps might be filled.</p>
            <p>In another development the McIndoe family's long-established jobbing printing firm was led by <name key="name-208567" type="person">John McIndoe</name> junior, back from RAF service, into publishing from <date when="1956">1956</date>. In the following 30 years until his retirement, McIndoe became one of New Zealand's best publishers, showing an awareness of literature and social issues. Significant works of poetry, novels, short stories and substantial histories of Otago and <name key="name-006540" type="place">Canterbury</name>, as well as booklets of charm and individuality, were produced. Generally southern publishing has been solid but unstylish, but <name key="name-208567" type="person">John McIndoe</name> had an eye for design and typography.</p>
            <p>In <date when="1968">1968</date> McIndoe also became publishers to the University of Otago Press. Prior to this, university publishing activities included those of the Bibliography Room which in the 1960s and 1970s produced booklets of verse by such writers as <name key="name-207374" type="person">James K. Baxter</name>, Hōne Tūwhare and Ruth Dallas. An attempt in <date when="1948">1948</date> to establish a University Press came to nothing and though the Press adopted an imprint in <date when="1959">1959</date>, its early titles never achieved viability.</p>
            <p>Under the editorial direction of first <name key="name-110358" type="person">W.J. McEldowney</name> and from <date when="1988">1988</date> Helen Watson White, and with production and distribution by McIndoe from <date when="1968">1968</date>, more substantial works appeared. John Parr's <hi rend="i">Introduction to Opthalmology</hi>, feared uncommercial, turned out to be a runaway success. In <date when="1993">1993</date> <name key="name-200208" type="person">Wendy Harrex</name> was appointed to run the Press full-time on the lines of an independent publishing house, increasing output to 20 titles a year and broadening its range.</p>
            <p>Individual publishers, mainly of verse, appear from time to time. The most determined of them has been <name key="name-200451" type="person">Trevor Reeves</name>, of <name key="name-200083" type="organisation">Caveman Press</name>, who issued numerous booklets of poetry and crusading politics. But neither the individuals, nor such provincial newspaper jobbing offices as the Southland Times and the Oamaru Mail, both of which published books with short bursts of enthusiasm, have become full-time permanent publishers.</p>
            <p>In Invercargill, the Southland Times interest was taken over in the 1960s by Craig Print, its work in this field greatly expanding as Southland communities, following Otago's example, began producing many substantial local histories. In <date when="1976">1976</date> the company published Sheila Natusch's <hi rend="i">On the Edge of the Bush</hi> on its own behalf and has since maintained a steady output, mainly of history and non-fiction, and not restricted to Southland. It has now printed or published over 300 titles.</p>
            <p>Since the late 1970s <name key="name-200378" type="organisation">Otago Heritage Books</name>, functioning as both publisher and bookshop, has issued many titles on aspects of southern history, including the notable four-volume <hi rend="i">Windows on a Chinese Past</hi> (Ng, <date when="1993">1993</date>- ). <name key="name-200281" type="organisation">Longacre Press</name>, set up by McIndoe's former editorial team when that firm moved out of publishing, began operations with the sumptuous <hi rend="i">Timeless Land</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>). Its main thrust has been in the field of young adult fiction, and its products have been popular in Australia as well as in New Zealand.</p>
            <p>Marketing is a permanent problem for southern publishers. Population imbalance and transport costs meant that a publisher of McIndoe's standing found it barely possible to distribute good quality poetry nationwide. No southern publisher has tackled the national popular market front on. Craig Print and Otago Heritage design their output to markets within reach, Longacre aims for a niche market, and the University of Otago Press depends in part on its academic and textbook interests. Nevertheless, considering the region's small population, publishing in Otago and Southland has maintained quite remarkable vigour, particularly in the field of history.</p>
          </div>
        </div>
        <div type="section" xml:id="_div2-N11BA4">
          <head>Some categories of publication</head>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div2-N11BA4-1">
            <p>The student of publishing in New Zealand is handicapped by the lack of bibliometric studies. There is, for instance, no equivalent for New Zealand of <name key="name-120510" type="person">Simon Eliot</name>'s <hi rend="i">Some Patterns and Trends in British Publishing 1800-1919</hi> (<date when="1994">1994</date>), a study which examines the size, patterns and nature of book production based on detailed statistical analyses of lists of what was published. We do not have for New Zealand any firm knowledge of quantities published, and what kinds of publications they were, beyond the most cursory information. Short surveys of some of the most important of the categories of publications produced in New Zealand form the bulk of this chapter. The selection of categories is not comprehensive: there is, for example, no coverage of map publishing. Nor is the selection balanced, and in this sense it reflects the current state of research into aspects of New Zealand's print culture.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N11BB9" decls="#_div3-N11BB9-bibl">
            <head>Government publishing</head>
            <p>From its earliest days the State in New Zealand has been a major publisher. The colonial government's first official notices were printed on the <name key="name-200092" type="organisation">Church Missionary Society</name>'s press in early <date when="1840">1840</date>; its first separately issued official <hi rend="i">Gazette</hi> came out towards the end of the same year. <name key="name-121159" type="person">Rachel Salmond</name> tells the story of those early and sometimes makeshift days in <hi rend="i">Government Printing in New Zealand, 1840 to 1843</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>), drawing expertly upon archival sources. <name key="name-018379" type="person">W.A. Glue</name>'s <hi rend="i">History of the Government Printing Office</hi> (<date when="1966">1966</date>) takes the narrative briskly forward more than a century. <name key="name-018379" type="person">Glue</name>'s account focuses on personalities, equipment and buildings, but nonetheless makes the magnitude of the State's undertakings as a publisher clear. Its parliamentary publications kept citizens informed in great and sometimes crushing detail of their government's activities; its legislative publications guided citizens (or at least their lawyers) on their rights and duties; its departments became exemplary publishers in the fields of agriculture, education, statistics, science and health, with even occasional excursions into the world of arts.</p>
            <p>Unfortunately, the mass of material so produced over the years has been less than perfectly mapped. <name key="name-120539" type="person">Alison Fields</name>, writing in <hi rend="i">New Zealand Libraries</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>), noted that New Zealand is one of the few countries in the world to have national bibliographic coverage for monographs for the entire span of its written history. Yet, within this record, government publications are in fact a submerged, although substantial, part of a miscellaneous bulk. Navigational problems are acute. Guides include <name key="name-121185" type="person">Kathleen Shawcross</name> et al., <hi rend="i">A Guide to the New Zealand Primary Sources in the Davis Law Library</hi> (<date when="1977">1977</date>), C.L. Carpenter's <hi rend="i">Guide to New Zealand Information Sources Part V: Official Publications</hi> (<date when="1980">1980</date>), updated by <name key="name-120366" type="person">Jill Best</name> in <date when="1994">1994</date>, and J.B. Ringer and <name key="name-121139" type="person">C. Campbell</name>'s <hi rend="i">New Zealand Government Publications: An Introduction</hi> (<date when="1980">1980</date>). The Office of the Clerk of the House of Representatives has published the <hi rend="i">Users' Guide to Parliamentary Publications</hi> (<date when="1989">1989</date>). <name key="name-120831" type="person">David McGee</name>'s <hi rend="i">Parliamentary Practice in New Zealand</hi>, first published in <date when="1985">1985</date> but revised and expanded in <date when="1994">1994</date>, includes much incidental detail on the organisation and form of parliamentary publications. J.B. Ringer's <hi rend="i">An Introduction to New Zealand Government</hi> (<date when="1991">1991</date>) includes not only chapters on parliamentary, legislative and statistical publications, but also notes on publishing by local government and selected quasi-state organisations. The tripartite format of each chapter offers background information on the history, functions and structure of government, guidance on using related publications and lists of further references. This guide, however, like the others mentioned above, now badly needs updating, particularly in relation to the new MMP environment.</p>
            <p>The above guides are manuals of a kind, pragmatic in nature. This is also true of the few legal textbooks that give guidance on the availability of statutes, the most informative of which is perhaps J.F. Burrows's <hi rend="i">Statute Law in New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1992">1992</date>).</p>
            <p>Over the past decade attention has gradually turned from the practice of government publishing to its theory: from what is available to what should be available, and in what format. This has been in part inspired by the consequences of the major government restructuring which began in the mid 1980s. The deregulation of government printing in <date when="1986">1986</date>, the sale of the Government Printing Office in <date when="1989">1989</date>, and the continuing fragmentation of the public service have had a major effect on departmental and other government publishing programmes. <name key="name-121104" type="person">Pleasance Purser</name>'s article 'Production, distribution and bibliographic control of New Zealand government publications' (<date when="1988">1988</date>) reviewed the scene after deregulation but prior to the sale of the Government Printing Office. D.I. Matheson's 'Access to New Zealand government information' (<date when="1988">1988</date>) reviewed current and potential problems of accessing information.</p>
            <p>It should be clear by now that there are large gaps in research on New Zealand government publishing. The bibliographic groundwork has not even been done. Some departments have issued spasmodic promotional catalogues of their publications; some have more or less regularly issued bibliographies or chronological lists (the Department of Statistics has been perhaps the most consistent performer here). However, few if any systematic and comprehensive bibliographies of any aspects of government publishing have been compiled, nor are satisfactory cumulative indexes available to the major publications.</p>
            <p>Apart from Salmond (<date when="1995">1995</date>) and Glue (<date when="1966">1966</date>), and a chapter on the Government Printing Office in <name key="name-120205" type="person">R.A. McKay</name>'s centennial compilation (<date when="1940">1940</date>), little or no work has been done on the history of the government's involvement in publishing. This is especially true of departmental publishing. Few departmental histories make more than a fleeting mention of their department's publishing programmes. This is the case even for the publicly-funded scientific institutes, one of whose primary functions is, presumably, to publish. A rare exception, <name key="name-121259" type="person">Rose-Marie C. Thompson</name>'s <hi rend="i">The First Forty Years: New Zealand Oceanographic Institute</hi> (<date when="1994">1994</date>) still devotes no more than two pages to the topic. A more notable exception is Sir <name key="name-121341" type="person">George Wood</name>'s <hi rend="i">Progress in Official Statistics 1940-57</hi> (<date when="1976">1976</date>).</p>
            <p>No work at all has been done on the publication practices of local and regional government, or state owned enterprises; little research has been done into the accessibility and usefulness of government information in print form. R.C. Lamb, writing in <hi rend="i">New Zealand Libraries</hi> (<date when="1958">1958</date>), examined the idiosyncrasies and shortcomings of a cumulative index to the <hi rend="i">Appendices to the Journals of the House of Representatives</hi> (matters left uncorrected in subsequent indexes). Genealogical researchers such as Denis Hampton and —uses incidental to the original purposes of publication. <name key="name-121278" type="person">Alan Tunnicliffe</name> have focused on the historical uses of major publications to family historians<name key="name-120648" type="person">David Hay</name> in <hi rend="i">What About the Users?</hi> (<date when="1991">1991</date>) suggests that public sector reports in today's formats are of little use and little valued by external users (that is, users other than parliamentarians and their staff).</p>
            <p>The ideology underlying government publications has also been little studied. The Education Department's long term flagship, the <hi rend="i">School Journal</hi>, is one exception, with a pioneering essay by David Jenkins on its social attitudes (<date when="1939">1939</date>), and a history by <name key="name-120499" type="person">P.R. Earle</name> (<date when="1954">1954</date>), followed by an article by B.P. Malone, 'The <hi rend="i">New Zealand School Journal</hi> and the imperial ideology' in <hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of History</hi> (<date when="1973-04">April 1973</date>), and more recent unpublished work by <name key="name-120869" type="person">Rebecca McLennan</name> and Michael Reid. Now that government departments and agencies have more overtly than ever taken up advocacy roles, similar service could well be done for virtually any of them. A framework for future study is potentially provided by Judith Urlich's thesis 'Government communication in New Zealand: changing roles and conventions' (<date when="1995">1995</date>), although this pays little direct attention to individual publications or publications policies. The field is therefore open.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N11C3E" decls="#_div3-N11C3E-bibl">
            <head>Science journal publishing</head>
            <p>Scientific publishing is defined as the formal communication across time and distance of methods, results, and implications of scientific research. Its purpose is both deposition (archival aspects) and transmission (awareness aspects); fellow scientists (peers) are the prime target audience for science publications which comprise mostly articles ('papers') in learned journals.</p>
            <p>In New Zealand, Māori had of old a practical interest in scientific matters (horticulture, fishing, medicine, geography) but without a written language their findings cannot be considered published. It was not until this century that their orally transmitted knowledge started being committed to the scientific record.</p>
            <p>Although sighted in <date when="1642">1642</date> by the Dutch explorer and trader <name key="name-034630" type="person">Abel Tasman</name>, New Zealand was not visited by western scientists until <date when="1769">1769</date>. They recorded their observations in discovery logs, made public upon return to their homelands. These publications, mainly of a descriptive nature in the fields of plant and animal taxonomy and geography/geology, are exemplified by the logs of Captain <name key="name-207700" type="person">James Cook</name>, and of the scientists Joseph Banks and Daniel Solander who accompanied him. The first book published about New Zealand was an account of Cook's first voyage by John Hawkesworth (<date when="1773">1773</date>) based on material from the journals of Cook, Banks and others aboard HMS <hi rend="i">Endeavour</hi>. <name key="name-202732" type="person">Ernest Dieffenbach</name>'s <hi rend="i">Travels in New Zealand</hi> was the first general scientific account of the country. Published in London in <date when="1843">1843</date>, it attracted the attention of other scientists and travellers from the <name key="name-031090" type="place">United States</name>, <name key="name-008009" type="place">France</name>, <name key="name-008556" type="place">Germany</name>, and Austria. Consequently many detailed reports, books, and articles concerning scientific matters relating to New Zealand appeared from Northern Hemisphere publishers.</p>
            <p>Since the early colonial days (the mid 1800s) New Zealand has had an active scientific community. Scientific societies were formed in nearly every main centre and several major museums and universities were built. A national scientific academy was established in <date when="1867">1867</date>. Initially named the New Zealand Institute, in <date when="1933">1933</date> it became the Royal Society of New Zealand. Sir Charles Fleming published a centennial history of the Society: <hi rend="i">Science, Settlers, and Scholars</hi> (<date when="1987">1987</date>). In it he lists one of the main reasons for federating local societies under the New Zealand Institute as 'to give a publication medium for New Zealand scientific research, such as none of the individual societies could afford'.</p>
            <p>The early New Zealand Institute publications were in two categories, published in a single volume: <hi rend="i">Proceedings</hi>, defined as 'a current abstract of the proceedings of the Societies . . . incorporated with the Institute' and <hi rend="i">Transactions</hi>, 'comprising papers read before the Incorporated Societies'. In <date when="1885">1885</date> the Board of the Institute also resolved to publish monographs, eventually bringing out a <hi rend="i">Bulletin</hi> series as well as occasional publications. Dissatisfaction with the annual <hi rend="i">Transactions</hi> (particularly the lag between submission and publication) led to the establishment of a quarterly <hi rend="i">Journal of Science</hi> in <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> in <date when="1882">1882</date>. Too few contributors and subscribers meant that this journal folded after three years, to be resurrected in <date when="1891">1891</date> but lasting only one more year. In <date when="1887">1887</date>, the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Medical Journal</hi> was established. It ran for ten years, was briefly discontinued, then resumed under the same name (restarting with vol.1) in <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> in <date when="1900">1900</date>, where it is still being edited.</p>
            <p>The establishment of the Polynesian Society's <hi rend="i">Journal</hi> in <date when="1892">1892</date> was followed by that of the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Agriculture</hi> in <date when="1910">1910</date>, and by the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Science and Technology</hi> in <date when="1918">1918</date>. Neither of the latter has survived, but a greater variety of more specialised journals, research reports, and bulletins has emerged from various sources.</p>
            <p>The Department of Scientific and Industrial Research (DSIR) was established in <date when="1926">1926</date>. By the Scientific and Industrial Research Act <date when="1926">1926</date>, it was given a statutory responsibility for the dissemination of scientific research. It took over publication of the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Science and Technology</hi> (established in <date when="1918">1918</date>) from the Board of Science and Art, established in <date when="1913">1913</date> primarily to print scientific papers. The editor of the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Science and Technology</hi> was also responsible for a <hi rend="i">Bulletin</hi> series initiated by the Board of Science and Art, the <hi rend="i">Annual Report of DSIR</hi>, and <hi rend="i">Geological Bulletins</hi> of the Geological Survey, previously published by the Mines Department. The Geological Survey had been established in <date when="1865">1865</date> and, with the Government Analyst and the National Museum, was part of the first government-funded scientific organisation in New Zealand. It became a prolific publisher of New Zealand scientific books and maps.</p>
            <p>Between 1938 and 1957, the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Science and Technology</hi> published alternating <hi rend="i">Parts A</hi> (Agricultural Section) and <hi rend="i">B</hi> (General Section). Science and scientific output greatly expanded in New Zealand, especially at universities which added active research to their teaching obligations. To provide publishing avenues for this expanded research effort, in <date when="1958">1958</date> the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Science and Technology</hi> was replaced by the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Agricultural Research</hi>, the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Geology and Geophysics</hi>, and the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Science</hi>. Soon after, additional journals emerged:</p>

            <list>
              <item><hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Botany</hi> (est. <date when="1963">1963</date>)</item>
              <item><hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Marine and Freshwater Research</hi> (est. <date when="1967">1967</date>)</item>
              <item><hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Experimental Agriculture</hi> (est. <date when="1973">1973</date>)</item>
              <item><hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Zoology</hi> (est. <date when="1974">1974</date>)</item>
            </list>

            <p>The relative importance of the generalist <hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Science</hi> decreased, and in <date when="1984">1984</date> it was replaced by the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Technology</hi>; it folded in <date when="1987">1987</date>.</p>
            <p>A perceived overlap between the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Experimental Agriculture</hi> and the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Agricultural Research</hi> was remedied by changing the name and content of the former to <hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Crop and Horticultural Science</hi> in <date when="1989">1989</date>. The <hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Agricultural Research</hi> then concentrated on pastoral and animal research.</p>
            <p>Agricultural extension had been a prime role for the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Journal of Agriculture</hi> (1918-88), originally established as <hi rend="i">Journal of the Department of Agriculture</hi> (1910-12), later the <hi rend="i">Journal of Agriculture, NZ</hi> (1913-18). This journal remained with the Department of Agriculture until <date when="1965">1965</date> when a commercial publisher gave the contents a more popular focus. After a series of takeovers, it finally disappeared.</p>
            <p>Within the DSIR, direct responsibility for publishing had mostly resided within its head office, since <date when="1944">1944</date> as a separate unit, from which a Science Information Division emerged in <date when="1975">1975</date>. The Science Information Division undertook to produce the Department's journals and bulletins series, as well as a variety of other science publications. The publications were produced using hot-metal typesetting and printing, predominantly at the Government Printing Office. Although established in <date when="1864">1864</date> as the Government Printing and Stationery Department for parliamentary documentation, the Government Printing Office became also an important publisher of science monographs, such as the monumental <hi rend="i">Flora of New Zealand</hi> series.</p>
            <p>In the late 1970s and early 1980s, computer developments and applications started to have an increasing impact on New Zealand publishing and on the scientific community. The Government Printing Office introduced computer typesetting in New Zealand in <date when="1976">1976</date>. Developments in association with the Science Information Division of DSIR resulted in the ability to prepare input files outside the printing plant, for example at the Hansard office. This was a world first. The cost-effectiveness of this and other developments undoubtedly helped to further centralise the production of DSIR journals, bulletins, and other departmental publications.</p>
            <p>In <date when="1989">1989</date>, following major changes in government structure, DSIR had to compete for research funds, which forced it to streamline its operations, including publications. Reorientation placed greater emphasis on the profitability of publishing scientific and popular-scientific books. The name of the unit was changed to DSIR Publishing in <date when="1988">1988</date>. As DSIR Publishing now had to charge other divisions within DSIR and outside organisations for its services, scientific publishing became less centralised, even within the Department. For example, the Entomology Division assumed full production control of its monumental <hi rend="i">Fauna of New Zealand</hi> series. The 1989-90 financial year saw the biggest reorganisation of DSIR since <date when="1926">1926</date>. As a result DSIR Publishing's books enterprise was closed down entirely, leaving only the journals and the Alpha series of educational leaflets. Printing was tendered to commercial printers, since the Government Printer, now GP Print, had been privatised.</p>
            <p>It was mainly for financial reasons that the DSIR in <date when="1990">1990</date> sought to distance itself entirely from its research journals. A Cabinet Committee on Education, Science, and Technology indicated that the potential of the journals should be investigated. After wide consultation with the scientific community, officials from DSIR and the Ministry of Research, Science and Technology found that publication of New Zealand journals was justified on several grounds, which included the 'profound' influence they have on the quality of research, and 'preservation of knowledge'.</p>
            <p>As a result of the external evaluation, the six journals were transferred to the Royal Society of New Zealand, separate from any government department, on <date when="1991-07-01">1 July 1991</date>. The unit started operating under the banner 'Scientific and Industrial Research Publishing of New Zealand', SIR Publishing for short. With the transfer came an allocation of funds (supplementary to subscriptions) for three years. Funding has continued for these New Zealand science journals through an annual contract with the Ministry of Research, Science and Technology.</p>
            <p>Now the major national scientific publisher, the Royal Society continues to produce the quarterly <hi rend="i">Journal of the Royal Society of New Zealand</hi> (successor to the Transactions 1869-1971) and the annual <hi rend="i">Proceedings</hi> of the Society, alongside the 'ex-DSIR journals'. Although experiments with various electronic formats for journal distribution have been conducted using CD-ROM and the Internet, the principal form of science communication remains that of articles printed in its seven quarterly scientific journals.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N11D60" decls="#_div3-N11D60-bibl">
            <head>Newspapers</head>
            <p>Newspapers assume special significance in the New Zealand publishing context. Unlike the situation in <name key="name-005976" type="place">Britain</name>, where book publishing was established well over one century before newspapers were produced, in its New Zealand colony newspapers came first. J.E. Traue comments, 'If New Zealand's cultural topsoil was deficient in monographs, it was enriched by the newspaper printing press,' and he demonstrates this by citing numbers of newspapers produced in New Zealand: 16 by <date when="1851">1851</date>; 28 by <date when="1858">1858</date>; and between 1860 and 1879, 181 newspapers were founded (<date when="1985">1985</date>, pp.12-13). The study of newspapers in New Zealand, especially for the 19th century, therefore assumes special significance in the history of print culture in New Zealand.</p>
            <p>This section is primarily concerned with publishing of newspapers, rather than with production aspects (see Chapter 2) and with the role of the media in the political process; note, however, that this distinction is on occasion difficult to draw and so the user can profitably read both sections. It is also heavily weighted to 19th- and early 20th-century newspapers, the period which has been most closely examined. Research into more recent aspects of the newspaper press have been largely concerned with control and ownership of the newspapers and with their role in the political process, which is not the primary interest of this section.</p>
            <p>The student of the history of New Zealand newspapers needs to be constantly vigilant about distinguishing fact from fiction, and this is as true for recent material as it is for the 19th century. Journalists and editors, perhaps because their stock in trade is skill with words, manufacture their own myths and history rather more than other writers.</p>
            <p>A considerable amount of information about newspapers is to be found elsewhere in this guide. Note in particular the section on Māori newspapers later in this chapter, and also the sections in Chapter 6 which note newspapers published in New Zealand in languages other than English and Māori.</p>
            <p><hi rend="i">History</hi></p>
            <p>New Zealand, as a British colony, took its models from that country and retained strong links to it. Newspapers were no exception. British immigrants were advised to arrange, before leaving, 'to receive a file of some weekly London paper' (Wakefield, quoted in Hankin, <date when="1981">1981</date>, p.39); this provided important links to 'home' and reinforced the colonial's ties with <name key="name-005976" type="place">Britain</name>. However, no research has been carried out to establish more precisely the similarities between the British models and their New Zealand offshoots, nor to ascertain when and how divergence from the models occurred. Works about British newspapers such as Brown's <hi rend="i">Victorian News and Newspapers</hi> (<date when="1985">1985</date>) provide a starting point for such research, and Australian models should also be examined for similarities and differences.</p>
            <p>Harvey in 'Formula for success' (1993b, pp.208-209, based on Day, <date when="1990">1990</date>) has characterised the establishment of newspapers during this period. In the 1840s and 1850s newspaper ownership was unremunerated, political advantage rather than financial profit being the main incentive. During the 1860s many newspapers were established with financial profit as the main motive: both large city dailies and small circulation weeklies were feasible, and newspaper management became a full-time occupation. The 1870s saw a rapid expansion in the number of titles and the opening of the trans-Tasman cable in <date when="1876">1876</date>; and in the 1880s the telegraph and other factors resulted in a uniform news service and newspapers played a role in establishing the national identity.</p>
            <p>Newspapers were initially established in New Zealand as government organs, whether directly or indirectly subsidised, and were centred at or close to the main areas of European settlement. Government control of these early newspapers is an essential element to understand and has been examined in several studies, most notably in G.M. Meiklejohn's <hi rend="i">Early Conflicts of Press and Government</hi> (<date when="1953">1953</date>) and <name key="name-121159" type="person">Rachel Salmond</name>'s <hi rend="i">Government Printing in New Zealand, 1840 to 1843</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>). A still useful study of these early newspapers is Patricia Burns's <date when="1957">1957</date> thesis 'The foundation of the New Zealand press, 1839-50'. More recent is <name key="name-120462" type="person">Patrick Day</name>'s <hi rend="i">The Making of the New Zealand Press</hi> (<date when="1990">1990</date>) which examines the shift of newspapers from a primarily political role to become profit-oriented businesses.</p>
            <p>As European settlement expanded and as land communication links (rail and road) were gradually developed, more newspapers were established. A newspaper was regarded as an essential requisite of every progressive town, as this <date when="1875">1875</date> rhyme suggests: 'Our printing press, telegraph, and steam, / Proclaim our town's advance no idle dream' (Hogg <date when="1875">1875</date>).</p>
            <p>Newspapers (many of them short-lived) were established as a response to the sharp increase in immigration which followed the discovery of gold; the phenomenon of the goldfields newspaper in New Zealand has been briefly examined by Harvey (<date when="1994">1994</date>) but deserves more serious attention. The arrival of the telegraph in the mid 1860s caused a major shift in focus from local opinion to news from a wider catchment area, and the inclusion of overseas news became feasible when a cable link to Australia was established in <date when="1876">1876</date>. Day (<date when="1986">1986</date>) notes some aspects of this in '<name key="name-209537" type="person">Julius Vogel</name> and the press'. The 1860s and 1870s saw the founding of the major dailies, most of which are still publishing today.</p>
            <p>Surprisingly little attention has been paid to the period of consolidation which occurred from the 1880s. As settlements became more established, their newspapers became more stable. Chains of newspapers were now feasible in country areas such as Taranaki and Southland where there was sufficient population density to support them. They were established by such 'rag-planters' as <name key="name-208324" type="person">Joseph Ivess</name> and J.H. Claridge: Ivess is examined by Harvey (<date when="1988">1988</date>), and Claridge's activities are noted by C.J. Claridge (c.<date when="1965">1965</date>), J.C. Claridge (<date when="1975">1975</date>), and <name key="name-120735" type="person">Stella Jones</name> (<date when="1979">1979</date>, <date when="1980">1980</date>). The consolidation extended also to the main population centres where some vigorous battles for circulation ensued during this period. The 1890s saw the introduction of technological innovations, chief among them mechanical typesetting machinery (primarily Linotypes), which had a major impact on the personnel of the newspaper trade and on the trade organisations. Curiously, this appears not to have been studied in the New Zealand context.</p>
            <p>Geographical conditions in New Zealand were particularly conducive to the establishment of small-town newspapers. (A study of the relationship between New Zealand's geography, its settlement patterns and its newspaper press is well overdue.) A short tongue-in-cheek but informative introduction to the difficulties which small-town newspaper operators faced is found in 'New Zealand's country press' (<date when="1906">1906</date>). This attributes the high rate of failure of such enterprises to lack of capital, especially during the initial period until a new country paper became firmly established.</p>
            <p>The weekly newspapers, which were usually particularly targeted to rural areas, were influential—older New Zealanders will recall the pink covers of the <hi rend="i">Auckland Weekly News</hi>—and require further study. No serious research has been carried out into the contents of these or into their influence, for example as a factor promoting social cohesion. An interesting small study could also be made of the uses which were made of these weekly papers beyond those immediately intended: E.H. McCormick, reminiscing about his childhood, noted:

                     <quote><p>We had long ceased to paper our houses with the illustrated pages of the <hi rend="i">Auckland Weekly News</hi>, although traces of this pioneer custom were still to be found in the privies and occasionally in the kitchens of our rural neighbours . . . We had passed beyond that unsophisticated stage and now used the supplements issued with various journals, hanging them, suitably framed, on a background of floral or oatmeal wallpaper.
                        <lb/>(McCormick, 1959a, p.12)</p>
                     </quote></p>
            <p>Up to World War II, the newspaper in New Zealand was essentially of two kinds: a large metropolitan paper, owned by a company or perhaps still under family control; or a small or medium-sized country paper, perhaps issued daily but more likely issued bi-weekly or tri-weekly, and very likely to be under the control of a working proprietor in the case of the smallest papers or, in larger towns, family owned and perhaps also family operated. World War II changed this. Skilled personnel was in short supply and many newspapers closed, never to reopen. (This, too, has not been well studied: for instance, a series of case studies to more closely identify the forces which caused closure could be carried out.) After <date when="1945">1945</date> the ownership of newspapers gradually consolidated into the hands of a small number of companies.</p>
            <p>Other factors also reshaped the face of newspaper publishing in New Zealand, although few of these, if any, were unique to New Zealand. Overseas ownership of the media was hotly debated, especially during the early 1980s. Competition from other mass media was of concern. Technological change, this time from hot-metal to electronic typesetting, and reskilling caused considerable anxiety in the newspaper trade, as Hill and Gidlow (<date when="1988">1988</date>) demonstrate. The rise of free community papers ('shoppers') is a phenomenon which warrants further study. The combination of changing demographics and changing economics of production have resulted in casualties, recently the <hi rend="i">Manawatu Herald</hi>, well over one century old, in <date when="1997-05">May 1997</date>.</p>
            <p>Media comment about newspaper publishing in the 1980s and 1990s is plentiful and is usually focused on the question of ownership and control, especially in relation to ownership by overseas companies or by investment houses. Some of the most informative of this writing is the media comment found in the monthly magazines <hi rend="i">North and South</hi> and <hi rend="i">Metro</hi>. Examples include <name key="name-120310" type="person">Pat Booth</name>'s 'Catch a falling star: <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name>'s newspaper blues' (<date when="1991">1991</date>), Carroll du Chateau's 'Why two old bodgies couldn't save the Star' (<date when="1991">1991</date>, about the <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name> <hi rend="i">Star</hi>) and <name key="name-121276" type="person">Jim Tucker</name>'s 'Sunday snooze' (<date when="1994">1994</date>, about <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name>'s Sunday newspapers). The indexes to current New Zealand periodicals can be used to identify similar material.</p>

            <p><hi rend="i">Sources</hi></p>

            <p>Harvey (1991a) summarises the history and current state of the bibliography of 19th-century newspapers published in New Zealand, concluding that they are 'bibliographically well controlled but . . . only to a limited degree'. To locate surviving copies the starting point is Harvey's <hi rend="i">Union List of Newspapers</hi> (<date when="1987">1987</date>). Still lacking is detailed bibliographical work to provide a full account of the number of newspapers published, where they were published, and their impact on New Zealand society, for by no means all newspapers published in New Zealand have been preserved. Harvey has made a preliminary beginning on this for 19th-century newspapers (Harvey 1989b). Other listings, compiled for specific reasons, also exist and are useful to the researcher; for example, the <hi rend="i">List of Newspapers Placed on the Register at the General Post Office, Wellington</hi> was first published in about <date when="1883">1883</date> and notes titles registered in order to be eligible for cheaper postal rates.</p>
            <p>Few New Zealand newspapers have been indexed. Those indexes to individual titles which have been compiled are listed in Peacocke's <hi rend="i">Newspaper Indexes in New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1994">1994</date>) and also Harvey (<date when="1987">1987</date>). Useful detailed indexes to a range of titles published in one city or region also exist in libraries throughout the country; an example is the index located in the Dunedin Public Library, to references about newspapers published in <name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name> city.</p>
            <p>The major collection of New Zealand newspapers is at the National Library of New Zealand in Wellington. Significant collections also exist at <name key="name-200020" type="organisation">Auckland Public Library</name> and at the Hocken Library, University of Otago (these are especially strong for local titles) and at the British Library, London. The National Library of New Zealand's microfilming programme has provided increased access to many newspapers.</p>
            <p>Scholefield's <hi rend="i">Newspapers in New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1958">1958</date>) remains the only general survey, but is not error free and should be used with caution. Much briefer general accounts are those by Cohen (<date when="1922">1922</date>) and Mills (<date when="1940">1940</date>) which incline towards the myth-making approach to newspaper history often favoured by journalists. <name key="name-120348" type="person">Ruth Butterworth</name> (<date when="1989">1989</date>) has provided a more recent, but regrettably short, overview.</p>
            <p>No recent studies have been made of newspapers in particular regions or localities, yet there is considerable scope for such studies, particularly for the 19th and early 20th centuries when local and regional interests overrode national interests, and when communications channels were not fully developed. Existing studies include F.A. Simpson's 'Survey of the newspapers and magazines of the Province of Otago' (<date when="1948">1948</date>) for Otago, A.A. Smith's <hi rend="i">Printing in Canterbury</hi> (<date when="1953">1953</date>) and A.E.J. Arts's <hi rend="i">A History of the Canterbury Master Printers' Association, 1889-1989</hi> (<date when="1989">1989</date>) for <name key="name-006540" type="place">Canterbury</name>, and R.F. Johncock's <hi rend="i">Brief History of the Press</hi> (<date when="1991">1991</date>) for Hawkes Bay.</p>
            <p>Material about local newspapers and their history is frequently present in local histories. Two examples of the many which abound can be found in <hi rend="i">Tauranga 1882-1982</hi> ('Communications', <date when="1982">1982</date>) and in Bagnall's <hi rend="i">Wairarapa</hi> (<date when="1976">1976</date>).</p>
            <p>Newspapers in Māori are noted later in this chapter. Newspapers in languages other than English and Māori are noted in Chapter 6.</p>
            <p>The only detailed published history of an influential daily newspaper is R.B. O'Neill's <date when="1963">1963</date> study of the <name key="name-007584" type="place">Christchurch</name> <hi rend="i">Press</hi>. Other newspapers await similar detailed studies. More plentiful are studies which address specific periods during the life of a newspaper or a newspaper business. Two works based on work originally submitted as university theses are Salmond's <hi rend="i">Government Printing in New Zealand, 1840-43</hi> (<date when="1995">1995</date>) which examines <name key="name-200326" type="person">John Moore</name>'s role in the Auckland Newspaper and General Printing Co., and the role of the newspaper in the governmental process in a fledgling British colony; and <name key="name-120767" type="person">Lishi Kwasitsu</name>'s <hi rend="i">Printing and the Book Trade in Early Nelson</hi> (<date when="1996">1996</date>) which notes the <hi rend="i">Nelson Examiner</hi> from 1842 to 1874. <name key="name-036063" type="person">Frances Porter</name>'s <hi rend="i">Born to New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1989">1989</date>), a biography of <name key="name-207296" type="person">Jane Maria Atkinson</name>, includes in passing much about the day-to-day editorial concerns of running the <hi rend="i">Taranaki Herald</hi> during its early years. Harvey (<date when="1994">1994</date>) notes one year of the <hi rend="i">Inangahua Herald</hi>, Reefton, a case study of the setting up of a goldfields newspapers. R.C.J. Stone's biographies of the <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name> businessman Logan Campbell (<date when="1982">1982</date>, <date when="1987">1987</date>) include much about the day-to-day running and financing of the <hi rend="i">Southern Cross</hi>. Many similar works have been published.</p>
            <p>Anniversary issues—especially centennial issues—of newspapers may provide useful information, although the user should take into account their often anecdotal and not always critical approach. Some which contain useful newspaper history (as distinct from anecdote, or reproductions of early issues) are:</p>

            <list>
              <item><hi rend="i">Taranaki Herald</hi> Centennial Issue <date when="1952">1952</date></item>
              <item><hi rend="i">Taranaki Daily News</hi> Centennial Number, <date when="1957-05-14">14 May 1957</date></item>
              <item><hi rend="i">The Otago Daily Times First Hundred Years, 1861-1961</hi>, <date when="1961-11-15">15 Nov. 1961</date></item>
              <item><hi rend="i">The Ensign 1878-1978</hi> (Gore)</item>
              <item><hi rend="i">120 Years: The Nelson Evening Mail, 1866-1986</hi>, <date when="1986-03-11">11 March 1986</date></item>
            </list>

            <p>Theses are also an important source of studies of individual newspapers or of specific periods of their lives. An example of this genre is Graeme Robinson's 'The <hi rend="i">Evening Press</hi> 1884-94' (<date when="1967">1967</date>).</p>
            <p>An unusual, perhaps unique, source for newspaper history is a film running just over two minutes which depicts some of the activities involved in producing the <hi rend="i">Taranaki Herald</hi> in <date when="1912">1912</date> (<hi rend="i">The Production of the Taranaki Herald and Budget</hi>, <date when="1912">1912</date>). Its shot list notes: 'Public Offices and Office Staff; Editorial Room; Linotypes, setting the evening paper; Stereo room, casting plates for printing press; Machine room, Foster Rotary single reel press; Premises; Exterior shot of building, people rushing out with newspapers.'</p>
            <p>The only newspaper company history is <name key="name-121292" type="person">Leslie Verry</name>'s <date when="1985">1985</date> study of Wellington based <name key="name-200239" type="organisation">Independent Newspapers Ltd</name> (INL). This contains histories of the individual newspapers which eventually combined to form INL, chief among them the <hi rend="i">Evening Post</hi>, the <hi rend="i">Dominion</hi>, <hi rend="i">Truth</hi>, the <hi rend="i">Waikato Times</hi>, the <hi rend="i">Manawatu Evening Standard</hi>, the <hi rend="i">Southland Times</hi> and the <hi rend="i">Timaru Herald</hi>; and more recent history of the company and its mergers and takeovers. Verry's final chapter is titled 'How independent are Independent Newspapers?', the theme of much of the recent writing about newspapers in New Zealand.</p>
            <p>Much has been published about individual newspaper personnel, although it has not yet been collected into a directory of printing trade personnel. Starting points are the entries in biographical compendiums. The biographical entries in the <hi rend="i">Cyclopedia of New Zealand</hi> have been extracted and reproduced in <hi rend="i">Printing, Bookselling and their Allied Trades in New Zealand c.<date when="1900">1900</date></hi> (<date when="1980">1980</date>). The <hi rend="i">Dictionary of New Zealand Biography</hi> (<date when="1990">1990</date>- ) notes the biographies of some newspaper personnel, and the earlier <hi rend="i">Dictionary of New Zealand Biography</hi> (ed. Scholefield, <date when="1940">1940</date>) is still a valuable source. For the late 1870s and early 1880s useful biographical data about newspaper personnel (especially those who were itinerant, moving within New Zealand as well as between New Zealand and other countries, mainly the Australian colonies and <name key="name-006940" type="place">California</name>) is present in the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Press News and Typographical Circular</hi> and the <hi rend="i">Colonial Printers' Register</hi>.</p>
            <p>There are also many periodical articles and monographs with biographical content. An early Wellington newspaperman and his role in the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Colonist and Port Nicholson Advertiser</hi> (Wellington, 1842-43) can be found in Coleridge's '<name key="name-200079" type="person">Edward Catchpool</name>, Master Printer in London and Wellington' (<date when="1993">1993</date>). The newspaper activities of <name key="name-209029" type="person">Barzillai Quaife</name>, the editor of the anti-government newspapers the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Advertiser and Bay of Islands Gazette</hi> and the <hi rend="i">Bay of Islands Observer</hi> published in Kororareka (Russell), New Zealand's first seat of government, are noted in <name key="name-120747" type="person">Peter Kennett</name>'s biography (<date when="1991">1991</date>). From a later period <name key="name-208620" type="person">Alexander McMinn</name>'s activities have been documented by Frean (<date when="1985">1985</date>). The activities of J.H. Claridge in establishing numerous newspapers in the early 20th century can be read about in at least four sources (C.J. Claridge, c.<date when="1965">1965</date>; J.C. Claridge, <date when="1975">1975</date>; Jones, <date when="1979">1979</date>, <date when="1980">1980</date>). Autobiographical accounts by journalists include Robyn Hyde's <hi rend="i">Journalese</hi> (<date when="1934">1934</date>) and <name key="name-121257" type="person">William Thomas</name>'s <hi rend="i">The Inky Way</hi> (<date when="1960">1960</date>).</p>
            <p>Politicians in New Zealand have often also been newspapermen, not surprising as the newspaper was, until the advent of other mass media, the primary vehicle through which politicians could express local needs. They have been well investigated by New Zealand historians. Some, like <name key="name-209537" type="person">Julius Vogel</name>, have warranted more than one study (Dalziel <date when="1986">1986</date>, Day <date when="1986">1986</date>). McIvor's biography of <name key="name-207328" type="person">John Ballance</name> (<date when="1989">1989</date>) includes much about Ballance's newspaper, the <hi rend="i">Wanganui Herald</hi>. The newspaper activities of a less successful politician, <name key="name-208324" type="person">Joseph Ivess</name>, are noted by Harvey (<date when="1988">1988</date>).</p>
            <p>Much unpublished biographical material still remains to be fully assessed. One example is the diary of <name key="name-200066" type="person">David Burn</name>, an invaluable and probably unique autobiographical account of the day-to-day activities of an <name key="name-002817" type="place">Auckland</name> newspaper editor and shipping correspondent during the 1840s and 1850s; a flavour of it can be found in Harvey (<date when="1990">1990</date>). Another example is T.S. Forsaith's 'Autobiographical memoranda' (<date when="1846">1846</date>- ) which includes material about the <hi rend="i">Daily Telegraph</hi> (<name key="name-035893" type="place">Dunedin</name>).</p>
            <p>Press associations were formed for the purposes of controlling and disseminating news by regulating access to the telegraph. They played a key role in New Zealand's newspaper history. The New Zealand Press Association was established in <date when="1879">1879</date> as the United Press Association, continuing the activities of several similar organisations such as the Reuters Telegram Co. The United Press Association changed its name to the New Zealand Press Association in <date when="1942">1942</date>. Throughout its 19th-century existence it was the cause of much contention, particularly because it acted as a cartel which represented the interest of its powerful members, the major metropolitan daily newspapers, and in effect ignored all others. It monopolised the supply of news to New Zealand's newspapers by its control of the telegraph and consequently was frequently criticised, for example by politicians—there was a parliamentary enquiry into its activities in <date when="1880">1880</date> (Press Telegrams Committee <date when="1880">1880</date>)—and by newspaper proprietors who were not eligible to become members of the Association.</p>
            <p>The standard history of the New Zealand Press Association and its predecessors is <name key="name-121164" type="person">James Sanders</name>'s <hi rend="i">Dateline-NZPA</hi> (<date when="1979">1979</date>). An earlier and still useful work is <name key="name-207931" type="person">George Fenwick</name>'s <hi rend="i">The United Press Association</hi> (<date when="1929">1929</date>). The archives of the New Zealand Press Association archives, held at the <name key="name-000507" type="organisation">Turnbull Library</name>, contain a wealth of information about the day-to-day operation of
                     <figure xml:id="GriBo135"><graphic url="GriBo135.jpg" mimeType="image/jpeg" xml:id="GriBo135-g"/><head>At the time the <hi rend="i">Otorohanga Times</hi> was established as a bi-weekly newspaper in <date when="1912">1912</date> the population of the riding it served was only 822, and this photograph (by an unknown photographer) dates from then. The paper was founded by James Henry Claridge (1862-1946; in suit and bowler hat) who is associated with nine <name key="name-030978" type="place">Waikato</name> country newspapers, described in his <hi rend="i">75 Years in New Zealand . . .</hi> (<date when="1938">1938</date>). He also wrote a 22-page verse account (<hi rend="i">The Iron Horse</hi>) of a trip on the Auckland-Wellington train, published in <date when="1936">1936</date>. The <hi rend="i">Otorohanga Times</hi> continued until <date when="1980">1980</date> when it merged with the <hi rend="i">King Country Chronicle</hi> to form the <hi rend="i">Waitomo News</hi>. (Alexander Turnbull Library, reference number F-12462-1/2-)</head><figDesc>Black and white photograph
                        </figDesc></figure>the news gathering process, for both overseas news and local news redistributed to newspapers through the telegraph system leased to the Association. This material will repay further investigation.</p>
            <p>Another relevant association history is that of the New Zealand Journalists' Association (<date when="1962">1962</date>), covering the period 1912 to 1962.</p>
            <p>The day-to-day activities involved in running a newspaper and the economics of the newspaper business have been an area of interest to researchers. Harvey (1993a, 1993b) examines available evidence about profitability, circulation, income, expenditure, advertising revenue and similar factors for 19th-century titles. Other publications deal with specific aspects. Advertising is noted in <name key="name-120380" type="person">Roderick Cave</name>'s 'Advertising, circulation and profitability' (<date when="1989">1989</date>), Coleridge's <hi rend="i">Building a Paper Economy</hi> (<date when="1991">1991</date>) and 'Newspaper advertising in a pioneer colony' (<date when="1995">1995</date>), and by Kwasitsu (<date when="1996">1996</date>). Aspects of government advertising, an important form of patronage for early New Zealand newspapers, is noted in Harvey (1988-89); there is scope for further study on this, and the returns of government advertising published in the <hi rend="i">AJHR</hi> provide a starting point. Circulation figures for 19th-century newspapers are noted in Harvey (1988-89), and in Harvey (<date when="1996">1996</date>) which examines circulation figures in relation to population size for a range of titles.</p>
            <p>Aspects of the news-gathering process in the 19th century are covered by Day (<date when="1986">1986</date>) for the role of the telegraph, and by <name key="name-005082" type="person">Rollo Arnold</name>, who provides in Chapter 15 of <hi rend="i">New Zealand's Burning</hi> (<date when="1994">1994</date>) a study of the role of the 'own correspondent' (local correspondents) and also of the weekly newspapers. News gathering in more recent times can be read about in <name key="name-120632" type="person">John Hardingham</name>'s <hi rend="i">The New Zealand Herald Manual of Journalism</hi> (<date when="1967">1967</date>).</p>
            <p>Harvey's 'Editors and compositors' (<date when="1990">1990</date>) notes, from contemporary accounts, some of the day-to-day activities involved in running newspapers in 19th-century New Zealand.</p>

            <p><hi rend="i">Further research</hi></p>

            <p>Despite the considerable number of publications which exist about New Zealand newspapers, particularly for the 19th century, much research is still needed. In addition to the lacunae noted above, more needs to be known about newspapers published in specific regions, and about news-gathering (including the role of the telegraph). More histories of individual newspapers are essential, for example to allow better knowledge of whether New Zealand newspapers differ from colonial papers published in other countries. This list can be refined and extended almost indefinitely.</p>
            <p>Many sources are available to further this research. The <hi rend="i">New Zealand Parliamentary Debates</hi> (Hansard) warrant attention: they include, for example, information about postage rates and subsidies for newspapers, about funding of the Māori language newspaper <hi rend="i">Te Waka Maori</hi>, and about government patronage in the form of advertising. Significant archival material is available in libraries: demanding attention in this category are the New Zealand News archives (<name key="name-000507" type="organisation">Turnbull Library</name>), a major source awaiting further investigation and analysis. They include, among much else, detailed business records of the Lyttelton Times Co. Other extant business records of newspapers are noted in Chapter 2. Government publications, such as the <hi rend="i">AJHR</hi>, will reward further study. The registrations of newspapers required under various Acts from <date when="1868">1868</date>, available at National Archives and some High Court registries, are also an untouched source.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N11F9E" decls="#_div3-N11F9E-bibl">
            <head>Māori newspapers</head>
            <p>Many newspapers published in the second half of the 19th century used Māori language, though not all were published by Māori. The earliest titles were those published by the government or its spokesmen. <hi rend="i">Te Karere o Niu Tireni</hi> (in various titles, 1842-63) contained government announcements and correspondence, <hi rend="i">Te Pihoihoi Mokemoke i runga i te tuanui</hi> (<date when="1863">1863</date>) was established to counter <hi rend="i">Te Hokioi</hi> (see below), and <hi rend="i">Te Waka Maori</hi> (1863-79 and <date when="1884">1884</date>) was under government control after its first few years. Newspapers produced wholly by Māori begin with <hi rend="i">Te Hokioi o Niu-Tireni, e rere atu na</hi> (1862-63) under the auspices of the Māori King Pōtatau, and range from</p>
            <p><hi rend="i">Te Paki o Matariki</hi> (<date when="1892">1892</date>- ) produced for King Tāwhiao, to <hi rend="i">Te Wananga</hi> (1874-78) and <hi rend="i">Te Puke ki Hikurangi</hi> (1897-1913). These newspapers illustrate the high degree of Māori confidence in printing their own language and are invaluable historical and cultural taonga. Periodicals in Māori which used a newspaper format also included several of a religious motivation: <hi rend="i">The Anglo-Maori Warder</hi> (<date when="1848">1848</date>), <hi rend="i">Te Whetu o te Tau</hi> (<date when="1858">1858</date>), <hi rend="i">Te Haeata</hi> (1859-62) sponsored by the Methodist Church, <hi rend="i">Te Korimako</hi> (1882-88), and <hi rend="i">Te Hoa Maori</hi> (1885-97), published by the Plymouth Brethren, are examples. Most of these newspapers in Māori took a particular stance on political or religious issues, but they all frequently also contain reports of hui, obituaries, waiata, advertisements, local news, correspondence and so on, which are all valuable sources of historical information.</p>
            <p>Periodicals in Māori which can be defined as newspapers declined in numbers from the early 20th century. Although there were several Māori magazines, it was not until the 1980s that <hi rend="i">Tu Tangata</hi> subtitled itself <hi rend="i">Maori News Magazine</hi>. Māori newspapers began to flourish again from the 1980s. Some are listed in a <date when="1986">1986</date> <hi rend="i">Tu Tangata</hi> article, for example <hi rend="i">Te Iwi o Aotearoa, Maori Kuii-ee!</hi> (from Sydney), and in the 1990s <hi rend="i">Kia Hiwa Ra</hi> (Te Kūiti).</p>
            <p>Brief overviews of the early Māori newspapers are included in articles by Sheila Williams and by Nicola Frean in the <date when="1990">1990</date> issue of the <hi rend="i">Turnbull Library Record</hi>.</p>
            <p>Publications about Māori newspapers have so far concentrated on extracts from them. <name key="name-200229" type="organisation">Huia Publishers</name> has produced three volumes in Māori only, <hi rend="i">Te Pakiwaitara</hi>, <hi rend="i"><name key="name-100279" type="person">Te Puni</name> Wahine</hi>, and <hi rend="i">Te Mareikura</hi>. Letters to newspapers are included in the writings of <name key="name-208832" type="person">Sir Apirana Ngata</name>, and of Rēweti Kōhere, edited by Wiremu and Te Ohorere Kaa. Individual stories in Māori newspapers have been the focus of Margaret Orbell's articles in <hi rend="i">History Now</hi>.</p>
            <p>Study of Māori newspapers has been hampered in the past by the location of scarce copies in research libraries. In an attempt to improve accessibility the Alexander Turnbull Library, in cooperation with other libraries which held copies, first produced microfilm copies through the National Library, then in <date when="1996">1996</date> produced microfiche copies, aiming to allow study through any library or institution with a microfiche reader. The complete set of <hi rend="i">Niupepa 1842-1933</hi> has been purchased by a few major libraries, and digitisation of the papers is currently under discussion. However, the microfiche edition includes only those titles which began publication before <date when="1900">1900</date>. Some later titles are available on microfilm from the National Library of New Zealand.</p>
            <p>Avenues for further study of Māori newspapers are many. Bibliographic coverage is patchy so far. <name key="name-121548" type="person">Ross Harvey</name>'s <date when="1987">1987</date> <hi rend="i">Union List of Newspapers</hi> gives place of publication, frequency, date ranges, title changes and holdings information for most early titles. Cataloguing of the early titles for the New Zealand National Bibliography in <date when="1989">1989</date>, in preparation for microfilming, means a form of bibliography can be produced through the New Zealand Bibliographic Network. A 12-page booklet issued with the <date when="1996">1996</date> microfiche gives title, place of publication, language(s) used, frequency, alternate titles and continuations, inclusive dates, and number of microfiche, for the titles which were microfilmed. An Early Māori Imprint project is currently in progress in the Alexander Turnbull Library and will include many of the titles above, but only a small part of its overall coverage will be periodicals, and those only from the 19th century. Bibliographic coverage as planned will therefore remain patchy; in addition, studies interpreting the content of Māori newspapers will require further information about their context, ownership, and readership.</p>
            <p>There is therefore an urgent need for a distinct and detailed bibliography of Māori newspapers including, for example, changes in size and pagination, title changes, supplements issued, editors, printers and publishers, addresses, and language, and summary of contents. Twentieth-century newspapers in particular need study, as they are excluded both from the microfiche available, and from the Early Māori Imprint project. Studies of individual newspapers are also needed, and hopefully they will be written by Māori with access to iwi support and resources. Comparative studies of, for example, production, readership, iwi linguistic variations, and the way Māori owners and publishers used Pākehā printers, will not be possible until sufficient individual studies have been produced.</p>
            <p>Newspaper content is a rich source of historical material (used by <name key="name-120285" type="person">Judith Binney</name> and Anne Salmond among others) and more writers confident in using sources in 19th-century Māori are needed. Indexing of the newspapers would help enormously. Māori newspapers are also a rich source for linguistic studies. Elaine Geering's analysis (<date when="1993">1993</date>) of words 'loaned' from Māori to English from the 1860s to <date when="1900">1900</date>, drawing on articles in the <hi rend="i">Weekly News</hi> and <hi rend="i">Auckland Weekly News</hi>, is an example of this from an English language viewpoint. In contemporary times, an interesting comparison of print and oral cultures could be made between the growth of Māori radio stations such as Te Upoko o te Ika and Te Reo Irirangi o <name key="name-207099" type="organisation">Te Arawa</name>, and modern Māori newspapers.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N1204E" decls="#_div3-N1204E-bibl">
            <head>Periodicals</head>
            <p>Periodicals include glossy magazines, annual reports, newsletters, critical journals, conference proceedings, monographs in series, directories and almanacs. They are published for a variety of purposes by private firms, government agencies, educational institutions, political parties, individuals, church and community groups. Many periodicals are not strictly published items, for example, newsletters that are intended solely for the members of a club. In New Zealand most periodicals have been written in English, but some have been written in other languages, especially Māori. They are usually published on paper but sometimes in microform and now electronically. Some periodicals are produced simultaneously in more than one medium. Some have been copied to other media, such as microform, for preservation.</p>
            <p>Periodicals, along with newspapers, have been very important in the development of New Zealand literature. In the 19th and early 20th centuries they were the main outlets for writing in New Zealand because of the commercial difficulties of publishing books here. The publishing of periodicals has until recently paralleled that of newspapers, and it is sometimes difficult to distinguish one from the other. The pictorial newspapers such as the <hi rend="i">Otago Witness</hi> and <hi rend="i">New Zealand Free Lance</hi> that were popular in the 19th and early 20th centuries have been considered as both newspapers and periodicals.</p>
            <p>Newspapers and periodicals have been published since the early days of European colonisation. Most had a short life span. In the 19th century periodicals and newspapers regularly failed because the population was too small and scattered to support them financially. In the 20th century there were additional reasons for their failure, such as shortages of staff and paper during World War II, and the competition from broadcast media, especially television. Periodicals have, in New Zealand, also had to compete for readers with overseas magazines like the <hi rend="i">Bulletin</hi>. Newspapers and periodicals also competed with one another, especially in the 19th and early 20th centuries, when newspapers regularly carried literary pieces and published weekly digests and pictorial issues.</p>
            <p>Most popular and serious periodicals published in New Zealand have lacked originality. They were usually modelled on British and Australian titles. In the last 20 years there has been a resurgence in periodical publishing with the success of general interest magazines like <hi rend="i">Metro</hi> and <hi rend="i">North and South</hi> and niche magazines like <hi rend="i">New Zealand Gardener</hi> and <hi rend="i">Marketing</hi>.</p>
            <p>Despite their undistinguished and often ephemeral nature, New Zealand periodicals are a valuable source of information, covering a wide range of topics. They can all conceivably be used for research. They often provide a record of an organisation and its business. However, there has been little research into periodical publication in New Zealand. Only literary periodicals have received much attention, although there has been a little done on directories and almanacs by Hansen (<date when="1994">1994</date>).</p>
            <p>The essays by <name key="name-120807" type="person">McEldowney</name> and Thomson in the <hi rend="i">Oxford History of New Zealand Literature in English</hi> (<date when="1991">1991</date>) and G.A. Wood's <hi rend="i">Studying New Zealand History</hi> (<date when="1992">1992</date>) are the starting points for research into periodicals in New Zealand. They give some history and cite the basic sources for research. Research into periodical publication is, however, hampered by the fact that there is no definitive listing of New Zealand periodicals. It is probably impossible to know how many periodicals have been produced because so many were ephemeral, short-lived and local. The Alexander Turnbull Library estimates that there have been at least 20,000 titles produced. The <hi rend="i">Union List of Serials in New Zealand Libraries</hi>, (3rd ed. <date when="1969">1969</date>) has over 40,000 titles, but unfortunately the New Zealand titles are not distinguished from the overseas ones. According to the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Official Yearbook <date when="1990">1990</date></hi>, 560 periodicals that accepted advertising were published in <date when="1989">1989</date>. New periodicals have been catalogued in the <hi rend="i">New Zealand National Bibliography</hi> since <date when="1966">1966</date>. Periodicals registered with the Post Office were listed annually in the <hi rend="i">List of Newspapers and Magazines Placed on the Register at Post Office Headquarters, Wellington</hi> (1886-1986).</p>
            <p>Some subject bibliographies of periodicals have been published, such as Iris Park's <hi rend="i">New Zealand Periodicals of Literary Interest</hi> (<date when="1962">1962</date>), and subject bibliographies that include some periodicals, for instance <name key="name-120331" type="person">Ann Burgin</name>'s <hi rend="i">Women's Societies in New Zealand</hi> (<date when="1965">1965</date>). Periodicals are often cited in the bibliographies included in monographs.</p>
            <p>The best collection of New Zealand periodicals is held at the Alexander Turnbull Library, which is responsible for building and maintaining the nation's collection of serials published nationally. Local periodicals are only collected comprehensively for the Wellington region. Good collections of New Zealand periodicals are also held at the National Library, the Parliamentary Library, the Hocken Library, the larger public libraries, the university libraries and the libraries of the major museums.</p>
            <p>Periodicals need indexing to improve access for researchers. Although considerable indexing of New Zealand periodicals has been carried out, much of it is recorded on card indexes in libraries and is not readily accessible. The <hi rend="i">Index to New Zealand Periodicals</hi> (1941-86) is the most important index. This was continued as <hi rend="i">Index New Zealand</hi> and is available online as <hi rend="i">INNZ</hi> through Kiwinet. Other databases on Kiwinet include entries for periodicals, such as the <hi rend="i">Legal Index (LINX)</hi> and <hi rend="i">Newzindex (NEWZ)</hi>. Some periodicals issue their own indexes, for example <hi rend="i">Landfall</hi>, and indexes have been published for some periodicals, for instance J.J. Herd's <hi rend="i">Index to 'Tomorrow', 1934-40</hi> (<date when="1962">1962</date>).</p>
            <p>Even when periodicals have been identified, the next problem is locating them. Many important older periodicals, such as <hi rend="i">New Zealand Building Progress</hi> and the <hi rend="i">New Zealand Tablet</hi>, are quite rare. The National Library of New Zealand has recently begun microfilming periodicals, for example <hi rend="i">Tomorrow</hi>, in an attempt to improve access. On-line indexing, and indexes on CD-ROM and microfiche, will also raise awareness and appreciation of periodicals as a research source, and encourage further research into their publication.</p>
            <p>The scope for further research into New Zealand periodicals is immense. There is a great need for subject bibliographies of periodicals to augment the basic bibliographical details given by library catalogues. Research is needed into the commercial aspects of periodical publishing. Some starting points are available: <hi rend="i">Here and Now</hi> and <hi rend="i">Comment</hi> published articles on these aspects in the 1950s and 1960s, and Nielsen Press Research have published media guides since the middle of the 1980s that give information on print runs, circulations, subscriptions and advertising rates. Coleridge (<date when="1995">1995</date>), Harvey (1993b) and Cave (<date when="1989">1989</date>) have published articles on the commercial aspects of the press in New Zealand in the 19th century. While these articles are mostly concerned with newspaper publication, their approach can be applied to periodicals. Anniversary issues of periodicals sometimes contain information about their publishing history.</p>
            <p>Some other areas that require research include: popular periodicals, especially women's magazines and sports magazines; the influence of overseas periodicals on New Zealand periodicals; politics and periodical publishing, for instance, the role of government in periodical publishing, the ideological underpinnings of periodicals, and the influence of periodicals on public opinion.</p>
          </div>
          <div type="section" xml:id="_div3-N12107" decls="#_div3-N12107-bibl">
            <head>Children's books</head>
            <p>From the earliest years New Zealand's isolation and small population have had a profound impact on local publishing for children. During the last century and early this century, New Zealand authors have had to find publishers overseas. As few copies of these early books made it back to these shores the authors were frequently popular overseas, but remained little known or unacknowledged in their homeland. Within N